JP2023181364A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing the attention paid to a game.SOLUTION: A ball entry unit is arranged on a right route of a game area. A performance gate is provided above the ball entry unit, and the game balls having passed through the performance gate flow into an upper distributor. The upper distributor functions as distribution means for distributing the game balls to a first branch passage unit and a second branch passage unit. The game balls distributed to the first branch passage unit enter a lower operation port to be won through a non-electric accessory. In a third variable display area on a display screen 500aF of a symbol display device, a special performance is executed on the basis of the fact that the game balls enter the lower operation port to be won. In the third variable display area, the special performance is executed on the basis of the fact that the game balls pass through the performance gate while the special performance is not executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 89

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a game ball passes through an operating port provided in a gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state. At the same time, the changing display of the symbols is started. If the player wins the lottery, a specific symbol combination, etc. is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2005-074175

In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase the degree of attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention level to the games.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably improve the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention
A game machine comprising a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means capable of firing game balls into the game area,
a starting ball entry section provided in the gaming area;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
acquired information storage means capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information;
Shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the determination by the transition determining means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information. a game state transition means for causing the
The game repetition operation is carried out, with a time when the game repetition operation is ended as a result of a notification corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining means after the game repetition operation is started being performed. a game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so as to
a display means having a display section;
Effect execution means for executing an effect corresponding to the determination result by the transition determination means on the display unit;
a passage section provided in the gaming area, through which game balls flowing down the gaming area pass;
and a detection means capable of detecting a game ball passing through the passage section,
The starting ball entry section and the passing section are arranged in a predetermined flow path formed in the gaming area, and are configured such that a game ball that has passed through the passing section can enter the starting ball entry section. Ori,
The performance execution means is
a first starting means for starting a first special effect in a predetermined area of the display section based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry section;
a second starting means for starting a second special effect in the predetermined area of the display section based on the game ball passing through the passage section;
has
The second starting means executes the second special effect in the predetermined area based on the game ball passing through the passage section under the condition that the first special effect is not executed in the predetermined area. is configured to start and
The first special performance and the second special performance are characterized in that at least a portion of each special performance, including a beginning part, is recognized by the player as being the same.

According to the present invention, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine developed. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine developed. It is a front view showing the composition of an inner frame. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board unit. It is a perspective view of the game board unit seen from the back side. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing the configuration of the inner frame. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the configuration of the back pack unit. (a) A front view of the variable display unit, and (b) a perspective view of the variable display unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the variable display unit. FIG. 3 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the variable display unit. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the variable display unit. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing how light is emitted. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a mounting structure of a light guide plate. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between a light emitting part and a light guide plate. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram showing various counters. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration related to symbol display. It is a schematic diagram showing a pattern displayed on a variable display unit. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an arrangement of symbols displayed on a variable display unit. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an overview of display in a variable display unit. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of side LEDs. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the winning process for the operating port. It is a flowchart which shows information acquisition processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display control process performed by MPU of a notification/performance control device. It is a flowchart which shows processing for a fluctuation start. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display mode and the jackpot expectation level. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of performance in normal reach that does not support special changes. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of performance in normal reach compatible with special changes. It is a flowchart which shows processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows light emission and drive control processing. 7 is a flowchart showing special fluctuation display processing. It is a timing chart showing the flow of performance in normal reach that does not support special changes. It is a timing chart showing the flow of performance in normal reach compatible with special changes. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between a visible range and a boundary portion. (a) A flowchart showing a light emission regulation process, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the positional relationship between a side LED to be regulated and a boundary portion. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of a variable display unit in a second embodiment. (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between each light guide plate and the background, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the background. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of a variable display unit. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of a variable display unit in a third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of symbols etc. displayed on the inner reels. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between symbol combinations displayed on the inner reels and jackpot types. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for upper operating ports. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start process for upper operation ports. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for lower operating ports. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start process for lower operating ports. (a) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the types of lottery mode and support mode; (b) A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the variable display time. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and lighting/extinguishing of each display unit. (a) A schematic diagram showing a display mainly on the outer reel, and (b) a schematic diagram showing a display mainly on the inner reel. It is a flowchart which shows the display process for upper operation openings performed by MPU of a notification/performance control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main control process for upper operation ports. It is a flowchart which shows the special control process for upper operation ports. It is a flowchart which shows the display process for lower operating ports. It is a flowchart which shows the main control process for lower operating ports. It is a flowchart which shows the special control process for lower operating ports. It is a schematic diagram showing a gaming machine in a fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the destination of the game balls that have reached the distribution mechanism. (a) A schematic diagram of a sorting mechanism in a non-restricted state, and (b) a schematic diagram of a sorting device in a restricted state. (a) A perspective view of the ball receiver mechanism seen from above, and (b) a longitudinal sectional view of the ball receiver mechanism. It is a schematic diagram of a gaming machine in a non-assistance state. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a gaming machine in an auxiliary state. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the gaming device. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the gaming device. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the gaming device. It is a schematic diagram showing a modification of the gaming device. It is a front view showing a game board unit in a fifth embodiment. It is a perspective view of the game board unit seen from the front side. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit showing an enlarged view of the lower part of the game area. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the ball entry unit seen from the front side. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the ball entry unit showing a state in which the front cover is removed from the base body. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a ball entering the ball. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing differences in guidance targets to the lower croon. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between a lower croon and a non-electric accessory. It is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the number of reservations related to the lower operation port. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration in a fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing display contents on a display screen. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display control process for 1st/2nd variable display areas performed by MPU of a notification/performance control device. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display control process for the 3rd variable display area performed by MPU of a notification/performance control apparatus. It is a flowchart showing processing for the first normal game state. It is a schematic diagram showing the required period when a game ball moves within the ball entry unit. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2nd/3rd phase. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of display performance. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of display performance. It is a schematic diagram showing a variable display time table corresponding to a losing result that is referred to in the first normal gaming state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of display effects as the game progresses. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing display contents on a display screen in a sixth embodiment. (a) A flowchart showing processing corresponding to commands for hold display control executed by the MPU of the display control device, and (b) a schematic diagram illustrating hold display. 3 is a flowchart showing information acquisition processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a reservation notice. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a pending command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for pending notice performance performed by MPU of a notification/performance control device. It is a schematic diagram showing the types of pending notice performances. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a pending notice performance. (a) A schematic diagram showing setting values in the seventh embodiment, and (b) a flowchart showing a setting suggestion process executed by the MPU of the notification/effect control device. (a) A schematic diagram showing the winning rate of setting suggestions, and (b) a schematic diagram showing an outline of setting suggestions. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between a game board unit and a check sheet in an eighth embodiment. It is a front view of a check sheet. It is a schematic diagram showing a positioning line for a check sheet. (a) A schematic diagram showing a light guide function, and (b) a block diagram showing an electrical configuration related to the light guide function. It is a schematic view of the light emitting effect in the glass unit as seen from the front of the gaming machine. 108(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a partially sectional view taken along the line XX in FIG. 108(a). It is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 seen from the front, and FIGS. 3 and 4 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 developed. In addition, in FIG. 3, the configuration within the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main section 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting elongated frame members on four sides, and is formed into a rectangular frame shape as a whole. By attaching and fixing this outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. It should be noted that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility of a game hall or the like.

The gaming machine main section 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in an openable/closable state. Specifically, an upper supporting metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion of the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. A side support fitting 18 is provided. These upper support metal fittings 17 and lower support metal fittings 18 constitute a support mechanism, and the support mechanism allows the main part 12 of the gaming machine to rotate on the left side when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 11. , can be rotated forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the right side as the rotation tip side (see FIGS. 3 and 4).

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the gaming machine main section 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a front door frame 14 disposed behind the inner frame 13. A back pack unit 15 is provided. It should be noted that an inner frame 13 of the main part 12 of the gaming machine is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation end side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. In addition, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. There is.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a frame body 20 made of synthetic resin whose outer shape is almost the same as the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. There is. A generally elliptical window 21 is formed in the center of the frame 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE, which will be described later, can be viewed from the front. It is closed from the back side of the front door frame 14.

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition section that partitions the holding area of the glass panel 23 into front and rear sections, and both glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear directions with the partition section in between. In other words, by securing a predetermined gap between both glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the gaming area PE is covered twice from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

Note that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, in view of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to make these glass panels face each other in the front and back with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to use a transparent synthetic resin panel member in place of the glass panel.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, an annular illumination section 26 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window section 21 . The annular illumination section 26 lights up or blinks in response to changes in the gaming state, such as when a jackpot is won or when a predetermined reach is reached. In addition, an error display lamp section 27 is provided at the center of the annular illumination section 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, which lights up when a malfunction such as an error occurs, and further on the left and right of it, during the payout of prize balls. A prize ball lamp section 28 that lights up is provided. In addition, a speaker section 29 is provided at a position close to the left and right award ball lamp sections 28 to output sound effects, BGM, etc. according to the game state (see FIG. 3).

Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge portion 31 and a lower bulge portion 32 that bulge toward the front are vertically arranged in parallel. An upper tray 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 32 (see FIG. 2). The upper tray 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later, and guiding them to a game ball firing mechanism described later while arranging them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33, and a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33, and a function of storing game balls that have not reached the game area PE (see FIG. 3) among the game balls fired by the game ball firing mechanism. It functions as a receptacle for storing ejected game balls when the balls are returned to the player.

A game ball firing handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball firing handle 41, a game ball is fired from a game ball firing mechanism which will be described later. The firing speed of the game ball increases as the amount of operation (amount of rotation) of the game ball firing handle 41 increases, and when this amount of operation is adjusted by the player and reaches a predetermined amount, the game ball is fired. It will reach area PE. In addition, by adjusting this amount of operation by the player, it becomes possible to separately hit the game ball to the right route and the left route, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back side of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door side upper plate passage communicating with the upper plate 33 and a front door side lower plate passage communicating with the lower plate 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a socket part that protrudes rearward and is open upward is formed in the upper corner thereof, and by partitioning the socket part into left and right sides by a partition wall, the entrance of the upper tray passage on the front door side is formed. section and an entrance section of the front door side lower plate passage are formed into sections. The upper tray passage on the front door side and the lower tray passage on the front door side are connected on the upstream side to a game ball distribution section which will be described later, and the game balls that have entered the upper tray passage on the front door side are guided to the upper tray 33 and are passed through the lower tray passage on the front door side. The game balls entering the tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

On the rear side of the front door frame 14 on the rotation base end side, protruding shafts are provided at the upper and lower ends thereof. These protruding shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. Note that in FIG. 5 as well as in FIG. 3, the configuration within the gaming area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11. The height of the inner frame base body 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height of the outer frame 11. Further, the inner frame base body 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain plate is arranged below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, the lower end thereof), and when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 is placed on the curtain plate. It will be posted. Note that a slight clearance may be provided between the curtain plate and the inner frame base body 50 for the purpose of preventing mutual interference.

Support fittings 71 and 72 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the front surface of the inner frame base body 50 on the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 5). Although not shown, the support fittings 71 and 72 have shaft parts, and by inserting the bearing parts provided in the front door frame 14 into these shaft parts, the front door frame is attached to the inner frame 13. 14 is rotatably supported.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is disposed on the rotating tip side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame base body 50. The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end portion (vertical frame member described later) of the inner frame base body 50, and has front door hook members 76 arranged scattered in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction). have. In the inner frame base body 50, a hook receiving member 49 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back side of the front door frame 14 has a slit for protruding toward the front side of the inner frame 13, corresponding to each front door hook member 76. It is formed in this way. The front door hook members 76 protruding through the slits are locked to the front door hook members 76 provided on the front door frame 14 in one-to-one correspondence with each front door hook member 76. The front door frame 14 is locked against the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Further, the locking device 75 has an inner frame hook member 77 extending toward the rear side of the inner frame 13. When these inner frame hook members 77 are hooked on the hook receiving members 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, the gaming machine main section 12 is locked in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75 is installed on the inner frame base body 50 (locking device 75). The cylinder lock 78 is provided separately from the locking unit (the hook members 76 and 77, the interlocking rod, etc.) constituting the main part of the locking device 75, and is arranged adjacent to the locking unit. When the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the right (clockwise), the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the left (counterclockwise). The locking of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released when the inner frame 13 is unlocked.

An accommodating recess 51 for accommodating the game board unit 80 is formed in the central portion of the inner frame base body 50. The storage recess 51 is recessed toward the rear of the game machine in accordance with the outer shape of the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 is fixed by a manual locking mechanism while being fitted into the storage recess 51 from the front of the game machine. . A substantially rectangular window hole 52 is formed at the bottom of the housing recess 51, and the back structure of the game board unit 80 (back surface block 80b to be described later) protrudes to the rear of the inner frame 13 through this window hole 52. . It should be noted that almost the entire area of the window hole 52 is covered from the front of the game machine by the game board unit 80 mounted on the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 includes a front block 80a mainly formed of a plate made of synthetic resin material, and is provided on the back side of the front block 80a, and includes various game parts (variable display device, control device, movable performance), which will be described later. mechanism, etc.) are mounted on the base body 251, and are integrated with the rear block 80b.

The front block 80a has a game area forming body 310 made of transparent resin, and the above-mentioned game area PE is formed on the front surface of the game area forming body 310, into which game balls flow. As already explained, the game area PE is covered by the glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23). The glass unit 22 is configured such that the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front surface of the game area forming body 310 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is connected to the same game area PE. are arranged so that they are not lined up one after the other at the same location. This suppresses ball clogging in the gaming area PE. Note that the game area forming body 310 is not limited to being made of synthetic resin, but may also be made of wood.

Hereinafter, the game board unit 80 (especially various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game area forming body 310) will be explained based on FIGS. 6 and 7. 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 seen from the rear.

A plurality of large and small openings are formed in the game area forming body 310, passing through the game area forming body 310 in its thickness direction (back and forth direction). As shown in FIG. 6, each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, a variable winning device 82, an operating opening unit 83 (operating openings 83a, 83b), a through gate 84, etc., respectively. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating holes 83a and 83b, the game ball is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entering portion, and the detection result is Based on this, benefits such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) are given to the player. In addition, an out port 89 is provided at the lowest part of the gaming area forming body 310, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry sections are discharged from the gaming area PE through the out port 89. In the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of a game ball into the out port 89, the entry of a game ball into the general winning port 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83a and 83b will also be referred to as "winning". express.

In addition, various game parts such as a large number of game nails 93 and windmills 94 are arranged in the game area forming body 310 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling path of the game balls. The falling path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations such as the game nail 93 and the windmill 94, and is adjusted so that winnings to the above-mentioned general prize opening 81 etc. occur with a moderate probability.

A central opening 85 is formed in the center of the front block 80a (gaming area forming body 310), and a transparent opening cover 86 is attached to cover this central opening. Behind this central opening 85, the variable display unit 500 and the like belonging to the back block 80b are located, and the variable display unit 500 and the like are visible from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening (opening cover 86). . In addition, in FIG. 6, for convenience of explanation, the aperture cover 86 is indicated by a two-dot chain line, and a state in which the variable display unit 500 is visible is shown.

An operating port unit 83, a through gate 84, etc. are arranged around the central opening 85. The operating port unit 83 is provided with an upper operating port 83a disposed below the variable display unit 500 and a lower operating port 83b disposed below the upper operating port 83a. Of these two operating ports 83a, 83b, the lower operating port 83b is provided with an electric accessory 91 as an opening/closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric accessory 91 has a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece, and can be in an open state (auxiliary state) in which the ball can enter the lower operation opening 83b or easily. It is possible to switch to a closed state (non-assisted state) in which entering the ball is impossible or difficult.

The through gate 84 is arranged upstream of the lower operating port 83b (more specifically, on the side of the variable display unit 500: right route), and a lottery ticket triggered by a game ball passing through the through gate 84 wins. In this case, the electric accessory 91 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, when a ball enters the upper operating port 83a, three game balls are put out, and when a ball enters the lower operating port 83b, four game balls are put out. However, the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above.

The variable winning device (special ball entry device or special ball entry means) 82 is formed with a grand prize opening through which game balls can pass, and also serves as an opening/closing member (opening/closing means) for opening and closing the grand prize opening. A body is provided. The opening/closing body can be switched between an open state (allowing state) in which the entry of a game ball is possible or easy, and a closed state (blocking state) in which the entry of the game ball is not possible or difficult. In addition, the opening/closing body is connected to a variable prize drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid, etc.) provided on the back side of the game board unit 80, and under normal conditions, the opening/closing door remains closed and the internal lottery If you win the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution state) in (Jackpot: If you win the transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state), you can now switch to the open state. It has become.

Here, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to which the player enters when a jackpot is won. The opening mode of the variable winning device 82 in the opening/closing execution mode is, for example, one round when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined number of prizes (e.g., 10) have been won, and a plurality of rounds (e.g., 16 rounds) is the upper limit. The door is set to open and close repeatedly.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the variable display unit 500. The variable display unit 500 constitutes a symbol display device that variably displays symbols (fluctuating display) using winnings to the operating ports 83a and 83b as a trigger, and the display contents are controlled by the notification/performance control device and the display control device, which will be described later. is controlled. In the variable display unit 500, symbols are displayed side by side, for example, on the left, middle, and right, and these symbols are scrolled, for example, in the up and down direction, and are variably displayed. When a jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset active line, and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot).

A center frame 95 is provided in the game area forming body 310 so as to surround the central opening 85. The center frame 95 is fixed to the gaming area forming body 310 from the front side thereof, and when it is fixed in this way, it stands up from the front side of the gaming area forming body 310, so that the center frame 95 and The gap between the glass unit 22 and the glass unit 22 is configured to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area PE are prevented from colliding with the variable display unit 500, and the falling path of the game balls flowing down the game area PE is set so that the variable display unit 500 (more specifically, the center frame 95) is on the right side. It is roughly divided into the above-mentioned right route, which detours from the center, and the above-mentioned left route, which detours from the left side.

The above-mentioned variable winning device 82 and through gate 84 are arranged on the right route, and game balls flowing down the left route are prevented from winning in these variable winning device 82 and through gate. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right route is prevented from entering the upper operating port 83a. Therefore, when the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b is in the high-frequency support mode or in the opening/closing execution mode, the game can be advantageously advanced by firing the game ball to the right route. If you are in low frequency support mode, you can advance the game advantageously by firing the game ball to the left route. In other words, the player can advance the game advantageously by selecting the falling route of the game ball from the right route or the left route depending on the game situation.

A stage part 96 on which the game ball can roll left and right is formed on the upper surface of the frame part constituting the lower part of the center frame 95. Game balls flowing in from the inlet formed in the left frame portion of the center frame 95 are discharged onto the stage portion 96 through a warp passage 97 also formed in the center frame 95. Regarding the stage part 96, in order to make it easier for the game balls that have reached the stage part 96 to flow into the upper operating port 83a, specifically, compared to the game balls that do not pass through the stage part 96, the upper operating port 83a, which contributes to increasing the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on this stage section 96.

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, the central opening 85 is covered by the transparent opening cover 86, so that the game ball that has reached the stage section 96 does not move toward the back block 80b (variable display unit 500). It is regulated as follows.

Further, a first holding lamp part 98a and a second holding lamp part 98b are provided on the front surface of the frame part constituting the lower part of the center frame 95. The first holding lamp section 98a on the left side corresponds to the upper operating port 83a, and the number of times the game ball passes through the upper operating port 83a is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is increased by lighting the first holding lamp section 98a. It is now displayed. The second holding lamp section 98b on the right side corresponds to the lower operating port 83b, and the number of times the game ball passes through the lower operating port 83b is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is determined by lighting the second holding lamp section 98b. is now displayed.

The operating ports 83a and 83b are arranged at positions closer to the central opening 85 (variable display unit 500). Since it is possible to shift to a special gaming state using a winning at the operating ports 83a, 83b as a trigger, the player pays attention to whether or not a winning occurs at the operating ports 83a, 83b, and grasps whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. Therefore, it is considered that attention should be paid to the variable display unit 500. The fact that the operating ports 83a and 83b are provided closer to the variable display unit 500 is a contrivance for concentrating the player's attention around the variable display unit 500.

At the right end of the game area forming body 310, a game area dividing member 99 that defines a game area PE together with a guide rail 100, which will be described later, is disposed. The game area dividing member 99 is provided with a stopper member with which a game ball flying along the guide rail 100 collides and a main display unit 87. The stopper member is a buffer member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member will flow down the game area PE after its momentum is weakened. In other words, the stopper member is provided with an energy reducing function that weakens the momentum of the colliding game ball.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the main display unit 87. The main display unit 87 is embedded in the game area dividing member 99, and a part thereof is arranged to face the glass unit 22. A main display section on which a predetermined pattern or the like is displayed is provided in this opposing portion. The main display unit 87 is electrically connected to a main control device to be described later, and the display contents of the main display section are controlled by the main control device.

The main display section includes a display section for the lower operating port that displays the lottery results based on winnings in the upper operating port 83a, and a display section for the lower operating port that displays the lottery results based on winnings in the lower operating port 83b. and a display section. In the display section for the lower operating port, a variable display of symbols is performed using a win to the upper operating port 83a as a trigger, and as a result of the stoppage of the variable display, an internal lottery conducted based on a winning to the upper operating port 83a is displayed. Results are made clear. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry to the upper operating port 83a is a winning result that corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the variable display is stopped on the lower operating port display section, and a predetermined result is determined as the stop result. After the picture is displayed, the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the display section for the lower operating port, a variable display of symbols is performed using a win to the lower operating port 83b as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery drawn based on a winning to the lower operating port 83b is displayed. Results are made clear. If the result of the internal lottery based on the prize entered into the lower operating port 83b is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the variable display is stopped on the lower operating port display section, and a predetermined picture is displayed as the stopped result. After that, the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode according to the result.

Here, based on winning to either of the operating ports 83a, 83b, a variable display is started on the corresponding operating port display section, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the game continues until the above variable display is stopped. This corresponds to one time. However, one game round is not limited to the above content, for example, a single display area is provided, and even if a winning occurs in either of the operating ports 83a, 83b, that single display area is displayed. In a configuration in which a variable display is performed in a display area, one gaming session is the time from when the variable display starts in the single display area until the variable display is stopped while displaying a predetermined stop result. It is also possible to do this.

In addition to the above-mentioned two display sections, the main display section of the main display unit 87 is also provided with a through-gate display section that displays lottery results based on winnings in the through-gate 84. In the display section for the through gate, a changing display of symbols is performed using a win in the through gate 84 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the changing display, the result of an internal lottery conducted based on a win in the through gate 84 is clearly displayed. be done. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning through gate 84 is a winning result that corresponds to the transition to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result will be displayed on the through gate display section and the fluctuation display will be displayed. After being stopped, it transitions to the power open state. In the electrically powered open state, the electrically powered accessory 91 provided in the lower operating port 83b is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times a game ball passes through the through gate 84 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the main display section of the main display unit 87 displays the number of held balls. A display section for the number of reservations is provided.

The main display section detailed above is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and the game balls are prevented from moving in front of these various display sections. Therefore, its visibility is guaranteed.

To explain the structure of the inner frame 13 again using FIG. 5, below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50, a game ball is ejected to the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball ejecting handle 41. A game ball firing mechanism 110 is provided.

(Game ball firing mechanism 110)
The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game ball launcher located at the launch standby position. The main components include a ball feeding device 113 that supplies balls and a base plate 114 to which various components 111 to 113 are attached, and when the base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base 50, the same It is integrated with the inner frame base body 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an obliquely inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board unit 80 side. A groove portion having a substantially V-shaped cross section is formed in the firing rail 112, and the game ball is fitted into the groove portion to define the front and rear positions of the game ball.

A ball stopper is arranged near the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the firing rail 112 to keep the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the firing standby position described above. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source/launch control device that will be described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion and contraction direction based on the output of an electrical signal from the power supply/launch control device, so that the game ball placed in the firing standby position is moved to the game board unit 80 side. The ball is launched toward the guide rail 100 attached to the game board unit 80.

The guide rail 100, together with a game area dividing member 99 fixed to the game board unit 80 (specifically, the front surface of the board), divides the game area PE so that the outer shape of the game area PE is approximately circular. . Further, the guide rail 100 consists of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 that are arranged to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide path 103 is defined by these rails 101 and 102. has been done. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 open to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion 105 located above the game area PE. A game ball fired based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the firing rail 112→guidance rail 100 (entrance portion 104→exit portion 105). In addition, in the game board unit 80, on the forward side of the exit portion 105, more specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, there is a back-preventing member 106 that prevents the game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning into the guide path 103. This prevents the game ball that reached the game area PE first from interfering with the launch of the following game ball.

Each of the rails 101 and 102 constituting the guide rail 100 is in the shape of an arc centered approximately at the center of the gaming area PE. Therefore, the game ball passing through the guide path 103 is likely to move (slide or roll) along the outer rail 102, that is, while in contact with the outer rail 102, due to the centrifugal force generated within the ball. In other words, when a game ball is launched so as to deliver it to the game area PE, the area along the outer rail 102 in the guide path 103 substantially constitutes a passage area (passing route) through which the game ball passes. However, the area along the inner rail 101 is an area through which the game ball does not substantially pass.

As shown in FIG. 5, the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112 are configured such that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip end of the launch rail 112 diagonally face each other across the lower edge of the game board unit 80. It is located. In other words, both of the rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are shifted from side to side near the lower edge of the game board unit 80. As a result, both rails 100 and 112 are brought closer to the lower edge of the game board unit 80, and a gap at a predetermined interval is formed between the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the firing rail 112.

A foul ball passage is provided below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage is integrally formed with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return inside the guide path 103 as foul balls, those foul balls will enter the foul ball path through the gap. Become. The foul ball passage leads to a lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that have entered the foul ball passage are discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in FIG. 1. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be fired.

A rail cover 107 is provided at the left end of the game area forming body 310 so as to cover the outer rail 102 from the side. The game board unit 80 is often handled alone during manufacturing or maintenance work, and at this time the outer rail 102 may collide with the game machine or the like. The rail cover 107 is a member installed in view of such circumstances, and is provided with a protective function to prevent the outer rail 102 from being deformed due to the above factors.

In the inner frame base body 50, a through hole is formed on the left side of the firing rail 112 (specifically, on the side supporting the front door frame 14), which penetrates the inner frame base body 50 in the front and rear direction. A passage forming member 121 is disposed at. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base 50 and has a main body side upper plate passage 122 and a main body side lower plate passage 123. The upstream sides of the main body side upper tray passage 122 and the main body side lower tray passage 123 communicate with a game ball distribution section to be described later. Further, a socket part of a passage forming unit attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and a front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage 122. A front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage 123.

An opening/closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 is attached below the passage forming member 121 in the inner frame base body 50. The opening/closing members 124 are biased to a forward position that closes the main body side upper pan passage 122 and the main body side lower pan passage 123, and when the front door frame 14 is opened, each opening/closing member 124 is biased by this biasing force. By being in the closed state, falling of game balls from each passage 122, 123 is avoided. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open by the socket provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14 against the urging force. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage communicate with each other.

Next, the back structure of the inner frame 13 (inner frame base body 50 and game board unit 80) will be explained based on FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 8, a bearing fitting 132 is attached to the rotation proximal end side (right side in FIG. 8) on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50. As shown in FIG. Bearing parts 133 are formed in the bearing fitting 132 at vertically spaced intervals, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing parts 133. Further, on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50, a plurality of fixing levers 134 are provided for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in a closed state.

As already explained, the bottom part of the storage recess (game board storage part) 51 in the inner frame base body 50 is penetrated in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50 and opened to the back side of the inner frame base body 50. A window hole 52 is formed, and the window hole 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 accommodated in the accommodation recess 51. Various components such as a control device are mounted on the back side of the game board unit 80 (back block 80b), and these various components are exposed on the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. Here, the configuration of the back side of the game board unit 80 will be explained.

As already explained, the back block 80b is attached to the back of the game board unit 80. The back block 80b has a substantially box-shaped base body 251 that is open to the front block 80a side, and when this base body 251 is fixed to the back side of the game board unit 80, the front block 80a and the back block are connected. 80b are integrated.

The front side of the base body 251 is an area for arranging movable presentation mechanisms, etc., and the back side thereof is an area for arranging a control device for controlling these various components and the variable display unit 500.

More specifically, a part of the base body 251 protrudes to the back side of the inner frame base body 50, and the above-mentioned variable display unit 500 (see FIG. 6) and the variable display unit are attached to the protruding part. A notification/effect control device 140 for driving 500 is attached. The variable display unit 500 and the notification/performance control device 140 are arranged one on top of the other in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50) such that the variable display unit 500 is on the front side and the notification/performance control device 140 is on the rear side. has been done.

The notification/effect control device 140 is equipped with a notification/effect control board that controls audio output, lamp display, and control of the variable display unit 500 according to instructions from the main control device, which will be described later. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 141 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

A main control device unit 160 is provided below the notification/performance control device 140 so as to cover the base body 251 from the rear. The main controller unit 160 includes a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the back of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the back block 80b), and a main controller 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. There is. The main control device 162 is equipped with a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power outage monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a board box 163 consisting of, etc.

The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. These box base and box cover are unopenably connected by a box sealing portion 164 serving as a sealing means, thereby sealing the substrate box 163. A plurality of box sealing parts 164 are provided on the short sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box sealing part 164 as long as it connects the box base and the box cover in an unsealable manner. The base and the box cover are joined together in an unopenable manner. The sealing process performed by the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening of the box after it has been sealed, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, such a situation can be detected early and easily. Even after opening the package, it is possible to reseal it. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole among the plurality of box sealing parts 164. When the board box 163 is unsealed in the event of a malfunction of the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the connecting portion between the box sealing part into which the locking pin is inserted and the main body of the board box 163 is removed. cut. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 163 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, if the sealing process is to be performed again, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If a history indicating that the board box 163 has been opened is left in the board box 163, it can be easily discovered by looking at the board box 163 that the board box 163 has been opened in an unauthorized manner.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are unopenably connected by a base sealing portion 165. Specifically, the pedestal sealing part 165 has a locking hole and a locking pin like the box sealing part 164, and when the locking pin is inserted into the locking hole, the base sealing part 165 is connected to the board box 163. The mounting base 161 is connected inseparably. This makes it easier to identify the fact that the board box 163 has been illegally removed.

A portion of the front surface of the base body 251 facing the lower back surface of the game board unit 80 is provided with holes corresponding to the game board openings of the general prize opening 81, the variable prize winning device 82, and the operating ports 83a and 83b, and on the downstream side. A collection passageway (not shown) is formed in which the pipes gather at one place. As a result, all the game balls that have won in the general prize opening 81 etc. are configured to gather below the game board unit 80 via the collection path. That is, the base body 251 is provided with a function of collecting game balls that have entered various winning holes.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 80, and the game balls gathered below the game board unit 80 are led out into the discharge passage by the collection passage. The out port 89 also communicates with the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports are led out into the discharge passage through the out port 89.

In addition, the base body 251 constituting the back block 80b includes a general winning hole detection sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning hole 81 as a detection sensor for each of the above-mentioned ball entering portions, and an operating hole 83a. , 83b is installed, and a detection sensor for the operating port is installed to detect the game ball that has entered the ball, and a winning detection mechanism is constituted by these various detection sensors. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and each detection sensor outputs detection information (detection signals) to the main control device 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be explained based on FIGS. 9 and 10. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by a back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as the main body of the back pack unit 15, and a dispensing mechanism section 202, a discharge passage panel, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201. .

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and includes a base part 211 to which the payout mechanism part 202 and the like are attached, as shown in FIG. 212. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the top surface are closed, and only the bottom surface is open, and has a size sufficient to at least surround the variable display unit 500 (see FIG. 10).

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal board. The external terminal board is provided with various output terminals, and various signals are outputted to a management control device (hall computer) on the gaming hall side through these output terminals. Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower latching pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the latching pins 214 are connected to the bearings provided on the inner frame 13. By being inserted through the portion 133, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions into which fixing levers 134 provided on the inner frame 13 are inserted, and when the fixing lever 134 is inserted into the insertion portions, it is applied to the base portion 211 from behind. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by contacting the inner frame 13.

The dispensing mechanism section 202 is disposed on the base section 211 so as to bypass the protective cover section 212. The payout mechanism section 202 is provided with a tank 221 which is disposed at the top of the back pack 201 and opens upward, and the tank 221 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Ru. A tank rail 222 that slopes gently toward the downstream side is connected to the side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A dispensing device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223 . The game balls put out by the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution section 225 provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 224.

The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function of distributing the game balls put out from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or a discharge passage described later, and has an inner opening that is connected to the main body described above. It is formed so that it communicates with the upper plate 33 via the side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage, and the outer opening communicates with the lower plate 34 via the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage. has been done.

A discharge passage panel and control device assembly unit 204 is attached to the lower end of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end in the front and back directions. A discharge passage opened to the rear is formed on the surface of the discharge passage panel facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the game hall, etc., and the game balls led to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage etc. are delivered to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage. be discharged.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a mounting base 241 having a horizontally long shape, and a dispensing control device 242 and a power source/firing control device 243 are mounted on the mounting base 241. The payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 242 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is housed in a board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box 244. For example, when the state recovery switch 245 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing device 224, the ball jam is cleared.

In the power source/launch control device 243, a power source/launch control board is housed in a board box 246. The power supply/launch control board generates and outputs a predetermined power required by various control devices, etc., and further controls the launch of the game ball as the player operates the game ball launch handle 41. Specifically, drive control of the solenoid 111 that constitutes the game ball firing mechanism 110 and drive control of the ball feeding device 113 are executed.

Further, the power supply/launch control device 243 is provided with a power switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched to an on state (on state) or a cut off state (off state).

Here, this pachinko machine 10 has a memory retention function for various data, and even in the event of a power outage, it retains the state at the time of the power outage, and returns to the state at the time of the power outage when recovering from the power outage. It is now possible to do so. For example, when the power is shut off in a normal procedure, such as when a game hall is closed, the state before the shutoff is stored and retained. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 166 provided on the main controller 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine by opening the main part 12 (inner frame 13) of the gaming machine and exposing the back side of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, in a state where the opening of the gaming machine main section 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, the various switches cannot be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. In other words, the various switches mentioned above are difficult to operate when the main part 12 of the gaming machine is closed, and can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine by someone who does not own the key for the locking device 75 (for example, a fraudulent person). is difficult.

(Variable display unit 500)
As already explained, in this embodiment, the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the operating port unit 83 is notified by the variable display unit 500 mounted on the game board unit 80. The configuration of the variable display unit 500 is distinctive. The variable display unit 500 in this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14. 11(a) is a front view of the variable display unit 500, FIG. 11(b) is a perspective view of the variable display unit 500, FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the variable display unit 500, and FIG. 13 is a longitudinal section of the variable display unit 500. 14 are cross-sectional views of the variable display unit. Note that, in FIG. 12, some of the drum units are shown with a light guide section, which will be described later, omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11, the variable display unit 500 includes a substantially box-shaped housing 521 that is open to the front of the gaming machine, and a plurality of (more specifically, three) drum units 523 that are housed in the housing 521 so as to be lined up from side to side. The housing 521 is fixed to the gaming area forming body 310 from the back side thereof, so that it is integrated with the gaming area forming body 310. It should be noted that the housing 521 is colored and opaque to block light from outside the housing 521 from entering through the flesh of the housing 521.

A portion of the drum unit 523 protrudes forward through the opening 522 of the housing 521. A part of this protruding portion is visible from the front of the gaming machine through a central opening 85 formed in the gaming board unit (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11(a)). In other words, the central opening 85 functions as a defining part or a window part that defines a visible area on the variable display unit 500.

As shown in FIG. 12, the drum unit 523 includes a plate-shaped base body 524 that constitutes an attachment portion to the housing 521, and a rotating body (drum) 525 held by the base body 524. When the base body 524 is fixed to the housing 521 , the base body 524 divides the internal area of the housing 521 into three equal parts to the left and right, corresponding to each drum unit 523 .

The rotating body 525 is mounted on the base body 524 via a motor 526. Specifically, a motor 526 is fixed to a base body 524, and a rotating body 525 is fixed to an output shaft of the motor 526. The output shaft of the motor 526 extends in the direction in which the drum units 523 are arranged side by side (left-right direction), and the rotating body 525 is configured to rotate around the axis of the output shaft (rotation center axis CL). The motor 526 is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, and is configured to be driven and controlled by the notification/performance control device 140. The motor 526 is a stepping motor, and the rotational position of the rotating body 525 can be adjusted by the number of pulses of the output drive signal.

Note that a position detection sensor 527 that detects the rotational position of the rotating body 525 is mounted on the base body 524. The position detection sensor 527 is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, and the notification/performance control device 140 grasps the rotational position of the rotating body 525 based on the detection information (detection signal) from the position detection sensor 527. If the rotational position of the rotary body 525 deviates due to the influence of an external force or the occurrence of malfunction, the rotational position of the rotary body 525 is corrected (corrected) based on the grasped position information.

The rotating body 525 includes a circular frame 531 that constructs the skeleton of the rotating body 525, and a light guiding portion 532 that is approximately cylindrical and has a constant thickness that covers the outer peripheral portion of the frame 531. As shown in FIG. 12, the frame 531 includes a hub 535 as a center portion to which the output shaft of the motor 526 is fixed, an annular rim 536 as the outer peripheral portion to which the light guide portion 532 is fixed, the hub 535 and The spokes 537 connect the rims 536.

Specifically, the rim 536 includes a pair of left and right annular portions 541 centered on the rotation center axis CL, and an elongated connecting portion 542 that connects the annular portions 541. The light guide portion 532 is superimposed on the connecting portion 542 from the outside of the frame 531 and is fixed to the connecting portion 542 using a fixing means. The frame 531 shown in this embodiment is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a colorless and transparent adhesive is used as the fixing means. This is a contrivance to make the frame 531 and the fixed portion (fixing means) to the frame 531 less noticeable when the light guide section 532 is visually observed.

As shown in FIG. 13, a background display device 529 is provided inside the light guide section 532. The background display device 529 includes a decorative sheet 581 provided with a pattern imitating a seaside, a backlight 582 located behind the decorative sheet 581 and irradiating light to the decorative sheet 581, and a decorative sheet 581 and the backlight 582. The holder 583 is fixed to the base body 524 so that the holder 583 is integrated with the base body 524. The decorative sheet 581 is arranged so that the sheet surface on which the pattern is applied faces the front of the gaming machine (the side of the central opening 85), and is placed on the inner surface 552 of the light guiding section 532 from the inside of the frame 531 with a gap therebetween. They are facing each other. Thereby, the background drawn on the decorative sheet 581 can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine through the light guide section 532. Although the decorative sheet 581 has light transmittance, it is colored and opaque, and is configured so that the backlight 582 and the like located on the back side of the decorative sheet 581 cannot be seen through the decorative sheet 581.

The backlight 582 is connected to the notification/effect control device 140, and is switched on/off by the notification/effect control device 140. When the backlight 582 is turned on, the light from the backlight 582 passes through the decorative sheet 581, and the decorative sheet 581 emits bright light.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a configuration related to light emission of the light guide section 532 will be described. A contact portion 543 is formed on the rim 536 of the frame 531. The contact portion 543 contacts the light guide portion 532 from the side opposite to the base body 524 side. The contact portion 543 defines the left and right positions of the light guide portion 532 . An end of the light guide portion 532 on the side opposite to the contact portion 543 (on the base body 524 side) extends laterally from the rim 536. The base body 524 is formed with an insertion portion 561 into which this extending portion (end portion) is inserted.

The insertion section 561 has a groove shape open to the light guide section 532 side, and the end of the light guide section 532 is inserted into the insertion section 561 through this open section (hereinafter referred to as the first open section 564). There is. A light emitting board 571 on which a plurality of light emitters 572 (specifically, LEDs) are mounted is disposed on the opposite side of the light guide part 532 across the bottom 562 of the insertion part 561. The light emitting board 571 is connected to the notification/effect control device 140, and the light emission control of the light emitting substrate 571 is performed by the notification/effect control device 140.

A plurality of through holes 563 are formed in the bottom portion 562 of the insertion portion 561 in accordance with each light emitting body 572, and the light emitting body 572 mounted on the light emitting board 571 is connected to the end surface 554 of the light guide portion 532 through the through hole 563. are facing each other. The optical axis of each light emitting body 572 faces in the same direction as the rotation center axis CL of the rotating body 525, and the light from these light emitters 572 is irradiated onto the end surface 554 of the light guide section 532. The base body 524 (including the insertion portion 561) is made of a colored, opaque synthetic resin material, and has a light absorbing function. This suppresses light leakage from the insertion portion 561. In this embodiment, the end surface 554 of the light guide section 532 is located on a virtual plane perpendicular to the rotation center axis CL, and the distance between the light emitting body 572 and the end surface 554 is determined at which rotation position. The configuration is such that the value is also constant.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 15, the light from the light emitter 572 is repeatedly reflected at the outer surface 551 and inner surface 552 of the light guide 532, and heads toward the opposite end surface of the light guide 532. Here, a light emitting part 553 made of fine irregularities is formed on the outer surface part 551 of the light guide part 532. The light supplied to the light guiding section 532 reaches the light emitting section 553 and is emitted toward the front of the gaming machine. The light emitting portion 553 corresponds to various patterns to be described later, and these patterns are displayed on the outer surface 551 of the light guiding portion 532 when the light emitting portion 553 emits light. In other words, when the light emitting section 553 is not emitting light, the pattern is hidden. Note that since the light emitting part 553 is formed by fine irregularities, environmental light such as lighting in the game hall enters the light guide part 532, making it virtually invisible or extremely difficult to see under normal circumstances. A certain light emitting section 553 can be visually observed. Although details will be described later, the variable display unit 500 shown in this embodiment is designed to suppress the occurrence of such inconveniences.

Regarding the rotating body 525 shown in this embodiment, a light guide portion 532 having a generally cylindrical shape as a whole is constructed by combining a plurality of light guide panels 555 to 557 provided separately in the rotation direction. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 16, a supplementary explanation will be given of the specific configuration of the light guide section 532.

The light guide panels 555 to 557 are made of transparent synthetic resin, and each has a plate shape with a constant thickness and a constant curvature. Furthermore, the length dimension in the rotation direction of the rotating body 525 and the width dimension in the rotation center axis CL direction are also the same, and the appearance is the same except for the light emitting part 553 (displayed pattern). It is formed like this. Although the light guide panels 555 to 557 are each fixed to the rim 536 (specifically, the connecting portion 542) of the frame 531 using a transparent adhesive as the fixing means, the light guide panels 555 to 557 are not attached to each other. It is not fixed.

As described above, in the configuration in which one end of the light guide section 532 is inserted into the insertion section 561, in order to improve the light supply efficiency, etc., the inner surface of the insertion section 561 and the light guide section 532 are separated as much as possible. It is preferable to make them close together. However, in constructing such a structure, it is necessary to take into consideration the possibility that the light guide panels 555 to 557 may be distorted due to manufacturing errors or changes over time, and a certain amount of allowance must be added to the gap between them. Here, in this embodiment, by not fixing the light guide panels 555 to 557 to each other, it is possible to avoid distortions that may occur when the light guide panels 555 to 557 are fixed. This makes it possible to reduce the margin as much as possible.

Note that when the rotating body 525 is constructed using the light guide section 532, the expressive power of the variable display unit 500 can be improved, but on the other hand, the weight of the rotating body 525 tends to increase. There is a concern that this may be a factor in reducing the responsiveness when rotating/stopping the rotating body 525. In this regard, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16(b), overlapping in the thickness direction of the light guide panels 555 to 557 is avoided. This suppresses an increase in the weight of the light guide section 532 and suppresses a decrease in responsiveness.

In the boundary region BP1 between the light guide panels 555 to 557, adjacent light guide panels 555 to 557 face each other with a gap in between. This is a contrivance to avoid strong interference between the light guide panels 555 to 557 at the boundary portion BP1 when the light guide panels 555 to 557 vary in size due to manufacturing errors or the like. By avoiding strong interference between the light guide panels 555 to 557, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of deformation such as the above distortion in the light guide panels 555 to 557.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 16(b), the boundary portion BP1 is shifted in the rotation direction with respect to the connecting portion 542 of the frame 531, and both ends of each of the light guide panels 555 to 557 in the rotation direction are It is not fixed (free end). This is an idea to separate the adhesive fixing point from the boundary part BP1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a supplementary explanation will be given of the insertion portion 561. The insertion portion 561 extends along a portion of the light guide portion 532 that projects forward from the opening 522 of the gaming machine. Open portions on both upper and lower sides of the insertion portion 561 (hereinafter referred to as second open portions 565) are expanded so that the width gradually increases toward the ends. This prevents the boundary portion BP1 from getting caught when passing through the second open portion 565.

When the second opening portion 565 is expanded, light leakage from the side light 528 is likely to occur. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the second opening portions 565 are both formed to face rearward, specifically, to face obliquely rearward. This is a contrivance to make it difficult for the light to enter the player's eyes when light leaks from the second opening portion 565.

Note that the bottom portion 562 of the insertion portion 561 may also be formed such that the distance from the light guide portion 532 increases toward both the upper and lower ends of the insertion portion 561. With such a configuration, it is possible to more preferably suppress the boundary portion BP1 from getting caught when passing through the insertion portion 561.
(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram of FIG. 18.

An MPU 602 is mounted on a main control board 601 provided in the main control device 162. The MPU 602 includes a ROM 603 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 602, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 603. It is an element that includes a RAM 604, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 602, such as the functions of the ROM 603 and the functions of the RAM 604, may be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port. Connected to the input side of the MPU 602 are a power outage monitoring board 605 provided in the main control device 162, a payout control device 242, various detection sensors 611a to 611e, and the like. In this case, the power supply/launch control device 243 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 605, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power outage monitoring board 605. In addition, as a part of the various detection sensors 611a to 611e, various winning ball entry parts such as a general winning opening 81, a variable winning device 82, an operating opening unit 83 (upper operating opening 83a, lower operating opening 83b), and a through gate 84 are included. The detection sensors provided in each ball entry section (ball entry section for payout) are connected to each other, and based on the detection information (detection signals) from these detection sensors, the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 determines the winning of each ball entry section ( A ball entering judgment) is performed. Furthermore, the MPU 602 executes a jackpot occurrence lottery based on winnings to the upper operating port 83a and lower operating port 83b, and also executes a support occurrence lottery based on winnings to the through gate 84.

A power outage monitoring board 605, a payout control device 242, and a notification/presentation control device 140 are connected to the output side of the MPU 602. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 242, for example, based on the winning determination result for the winning ball entering portions such as the above-mentioned operation ports 83a and 83b. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when outputting the prize ball command. When a winning to the general winning opening 81 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 82 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output, and when a winning to the upper operating port 83a is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the paying out of three game balls is output, and a winning to the lower operating port 83b is specified. When specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

The main control device 162 outputs various commands such as a variation command, a type command, a variation end command, an opening command, and an ending command to the notification/effect control device 140. When outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Note that each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 602, a variable winning drive unit 82c that opens and closes the door of the variable winning device 82, an electric accessory drive unit 91c that opens and closes the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating opening 83b, and a main display unit. 87 is connected. The main control board 601 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 602 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 602 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 82c so that the big winning opening is opened and closed. Further, when the support lottery for the electric accessory 91 is won, the MPU 602 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 91c so that the electric accessory 91 is opened and closed. Furthermore, display control of the main display unit 87 is executed by the MPU 602.

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602, and through this external output terminal board 213 ball entry information to various ball entry sections is sent to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the gaming hall side. Information on lottery results such as winnings and jackpots is output. This makes it possible to grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10 on the hall computer HC.

The power outage monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power supply/launch control device 243, and the power outage monitoring board 605 has a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 243. It has the ability to monitor. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power source/launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the necessary operating power is generated for the main control board 601, payout control device 242, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. Further, the power source/launch control device 243 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

The notification/performance control device 140 controls the display lamp sections 26 to 28 provided on the front door frame 14, the speaker section 29, and the variable display provided on the game board unit 80 based on various commands input from the main control device 162. It controls the unit 500. In particular, the notification/performance control device 140 uses various commands input from the main control device 162 to determine the performance mode in each game round, such as an outline of the variable display mode of the symbols on the variable display unit 500 (for example, the presence or absence of reach and It has the function of determining the content of the reach effect, etc.) and the stop display mode of the symbols (the type of combination of symbols that will be finally stopped and displayed (determined display) upon completion of the variable display).

(About various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained.

During the game, the MPU 602 uses various counter information to perform jackpot lottery, settings for the display on the main display unit 87, settings for the symbol display on the variable display unit 500, etc. Specifically, the schematic diagram in FIG. 19 As shown in FIG. 2, a jackpot random number counter C1 used in the lottery for occurrence of a jackpot, a jackpot type counter C2 used to judge the type of jackpot such as a variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, and a variable display unit 500 are used to detect the jackpot random number. Determine the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach random number lottery when the jackpot random number counter C1 is used, the random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variable display time in the main display unit 87 and the variable display unit 500. A variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, an electric accessory release counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b should be placed in the electric role release state.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 631 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 604. In the lottery counter buffer 631, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as an acquired information storage means when a winning occurs in the upper operation opening 83a or the lower operation opening 83b. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of .

The holding ball storage area 632 includes a holding area RE consisting of an upper operating port holding area Ra and a lower operating port holding area Rb, and an execution area AE. The holding areas Ra, Rb include a first area Ra1, Rb1, a second area Ra2, Rb2, a third area Ra3, Rb3, and a fourth area Ra4, Rb4. In accordance with the winning history, numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 is stored as pending information in any of the areas Ra1 to Ra4, Rb1 to Rb4. is stored in Note that the pending information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area Ra1, Rb1 to fourth area Ra4, Rb4, if winnings to the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b occur multiple times in a row, the first area Ra1, Rb1 → the fourth area Ra4, Rb4 Each piece of numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of two areas Ra2, Rb2→third areas Ra3, Rb3→fourth areas Ra4, Rb4. By providing each of the four areas Ra1 to Ra4 and Rb1 to Rb4 in this way, the winning history of game balls entered into the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b can be stored on hold for up to four each. It has become. In addition, the reserved ball storage area 632 is provided with a storage area for the total number of reserved balls, and the total number of reserved balls storage area specifies the number of reserved winning histories of the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b. Information for doing so is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first areas Ra1 and Rb1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display on the main display unit 87. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, judgments of validity and the like are performed.

In detail about each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b.

The value of the random number that results in a jackpot is stored as a win/fail table (win/fail information group) in a win/fail table storage area 621 as a win/fail information group storage means in the ROM 603. Here, the contents of the validity table will be explained.

In the win/fail table, address information consisting of binary number information and jackpot numerical value information also consisting of binary number information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, the address information is expressed in decimal numbers and is set in 10 types from "1" to "10", and the jackpot numerical information is expressed in decimal numbers as "7", "36", and "67". , "100", "131", "164", "195", "223", "241", "272" are set, and these address information and jackpot numerical information are 1:1. are associated. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical information is included in the numerical range of "0" to "299" of random number information that can be updated in the jackpot random number counter C1.

Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the win/fail lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low probability mode and the number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the high probability mode are different, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low probability mode, only the jackpot numerical information whose address information is "1" is referenced during the lottery, and in the high probability mode, the jackpot numerical information corresponding to all address information is referenced during the lottery. Referenced. In other words, in the low probability mode, there is one piece of numerical information that results in a jackpot, and in the high probability mode, there are 10 pieces of numerical information, which is more than in the low probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low probability mode is 1/300, while the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode is 1/30, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode. The probability of winning is higher. Note that the number and value of random numbers for winning are arbitrary as long as the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b.

Here, in this pachinko machine 10, there are two modes: (1) a win/fail lottery mode in the win/fail lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode in the electric accessory 91 of the lower operation opening 83b after the opening/closing execution mode ends. By setting differences in the two conditions, multiple types of jackpot results are set. As the win/fail lottery mode, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as described above.

The support mode is based on the frequency with which the electric accessory 91 of the lower operating port 83b becomes open per unit time when compared with the situation where the game balls continue to be launched in the same manner into the game area PE. A low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) are set so that the values are relatively high and low.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 91 will be in the open state when the electric role open state is won is set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode, and the number of times the electric accessory 91 will be in the open state is set to be greater than that in the low-frequency support mode. The time is set too long. In this case, in the case where the electric accessory open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the electric accessory 91 is opened multiple times, the closed state after one open state ends until the next open state starts. The time is set shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, a shorter time is selected as the secured time between one electric accessory opening lottery and the next electric accessory opening lottery than the low-frequency support mode. is set to be

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a prize will be won in the lower operating port 83b is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the upper operating port 83a is higher than that of the lower operating port 83b, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the lower operating port 83b is higher than that of the upper operating port 83a. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning occurs in the lower operating port 83b, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while trying not to reduce the number of balls he has too much. be able to.

Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency of electric role release states per unit time in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and may include, for example, a lottery for electric role release. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric combination open state in . In addition, the secured time that is secured after one electric accessory opening lottery is held and the next electric accessory opening lottery is held (for example, the amount of time that is secured in the accessory result display section based on winnings in the through gate 84) In configurations where multiple types of variable display times (times of variable display executed during execution) are prepared, it is easier to select a shorter securing time in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, or the average securing time is set to be shorter. may have been done. Furthermore, increasing the number of openings, lengthening the opening time, and shortening the time secured between one electric accessory opening lottery and the next electric accessory opening lottery (i.e. Apply any one condition or any combination of the following conditions: (1) shorten the display time of one fluctuation in the accessory result display section), shorten the average time of the secured time, and increase the probability of winning. This may increase the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode.

The destinations to which game results are distributed to the jackpot type counter C2 are stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area serving as distribution information group storage means in the ROM 603. As such distribution destinations, a normal jackpot result (special game result corresponding to low probability) and a variable jackpot result (special game result corresponding to high probability) are set.

For normal jackpot results, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes a low probability mode, and after the support mode shifts, high-frequency support is provided until the number of games reaches the end standard number (specifically, 100 times). This is a jackpot result that becomes a mode. Note that after the end reference number of times has elapsed, the mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

The variable probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the win/fail lottery mode becomes a high probability mode and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the win/fail lottery becomes a jackpot state winning, and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode accordingly.

In the distribution table, "0 to 19" correspond to normal jackpot results, and "20 to 29" correspond to probability variable jackpot results, but the distribution of these numbers is arbitrary. In addition, the distribution destination of the jackpot result is not limited to the above two types, for example, multiple modes can be set so that the expected value of the game ball to be acquired is high or low in the opening/closing execution mode, and the destination is the opening/closing execution mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the types of jackpot results are increased beyond the above two types by providing a difference in the mode to which the mode is transferred.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the holding area RE of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate a reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603. However, in the game round that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 602 determines the occurrence of a reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually depending on the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the ready-to-reach display (ready-to-reach state) is equipped with a variable display unit 500 that can perform variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and in game times that are in the opening/closing execution mode, the display stops after the variable display. In a gaming machine where the display result is a special display result, the special display result is displayed after the start of variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures) in the variable display unit 500 and before the stop display result is derived and displayed. This is a display state that makes the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to occur.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the plurality of symbol columns displayed on the variable display unit 500, there is a possibility that a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode will be established. It is a display state in which a certain combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a step before ending the fluctuating display of symbols, a combination of reach symbols that has the possibility of forming a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is selected on a preset active line. This is to form a reach line by stopping and displaying the symbol, and to perform a fluctuating display of the symbols according to the last stopped symbol row under the condition where the reach line is formed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the configuration related to the fluctuating display of symbols in each game round and the outline of the fluctuating display will be explained. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an overview of the display in the variable display unit 500. In the following explanation, the configurations related to the left drum will have an "L" at the end of the identification code, the configurations related to the middle drum will have an "M" at the end of the identification code, and the configurations related to the right drum will have an "M" at the end of the identification code. are appropriately distinguished by adding "R" to the end of the identification code.

The variable display unit 500 is set with three symbol columns: left, middle, and right, and a left variable display area DL, a middle variable display area DM, and a right variable display area DR are provided corresponding to each of these symbol columns. It is being In the variable display unit 500, the symbols in each symbol column are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll periodically in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom). In each of the variable display areas DL, DM, and DR, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. ing.

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) to (j), the above-mentioned designs are composed of nine types of main designs, which are numbers "1" to "9", and sub-designs, which are pictorial designs imitating seashells. has been done. Main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "high probability symbols", and when the high probability symbols are aligned, a jackpot state, which is a special gaming state, is entered, and after that, Transition to high probability state. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "low probability symbols", and when the low probability symbols are aligned, it will transition to a jackpot state, but in such a case, the high probability It does not move to the state of time.

As shown in FIG. 22 (schematic plan view of the light guide section 532 of each drum), in the left symbol row and the middle symbol row, nine main symbols are arranged in descending order with a sub symbol in between. . On the other hand, in the right symbol row, nine main symbols are arranged in ascending order with sub-symbols in between. Note that in FIG. 22, for convenience of explanation, a state in which the light emitting section 553 provided in the light guide section 532 emits light is shown.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 20, the variable display unit 500 is set with five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, an upward-left line L4, and an upward-right line L5. Then, in each game, the variable display of symbols is stopped in the order of left symbol row → right symbol row → middle symbol row, and a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, the same number is displayed on any of the active lines L1 to L5). When the fluctuating display of all symbol rows is completed in a state where a combination of symbols (combinations of symbols) is formed, a jackpot video is displayed as a normal jackpot result or a variable probability jackpot result.

When the above-mentioned ready-to-reach display is performed, first the variable display of symbols is finished in the left variable display area DL, and then the variable display of symbols is finished in the right variable display area DR, and then the valid lines L1 to L5 are displayed. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying symbols with the same number attached to at least one of the above, and a fluctuation display of the symbols is performed in the medium fluctuation display area DM under the situation where the reach line is formed. This will display the reach. When the opening/closing execution mode occurs, the same symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row is ended.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 19, the variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 602 to determine the variable display time in the main display unit 87 and the variable display time of symbols in the variable display unit 500. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, when the variable display unit 500 determines the variation pattern at the start of symbol variation, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired.

For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is configured such that it is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 249, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 249). The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 633 of the RAM 604 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 91 to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 199, the electric accessory 91 is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=200 to 249, the electric accessory 91 is not controlled to be in the open state.

As already explained, the MPU 602 uses at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS to determine the variable display time in the variable display unit 500, but the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 is used for this determination. It will be done. In addition, the MPU 602 determines the stop result in the main display unit 87 using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. The stop result table stored in the result table storage area 624 is referred to.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 23, a supplementary explanation will be given of the symbol display in the variable display unit 500. As already explained, the rotating body 525 shown in this embodiment has the light guide part 532, and the pattern is displayed by supplying light to the light guide part 532 from the side light 528. The light guide section 532 is transparent, and the background display device 529 can be visually recognized through the light guide section 532. Therefore, when the variable display unit 500 is viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the symbols appear to be floating in front of the background. In this embodiment, in particular, the background display device and the outer surface section 551, which is the display surface of the light guide section 532, are separated, and the distance between the pattern and the background is coordinated.

Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 24, the relationship between the light emitting body 572 constituting the side light 528 and the pattern display position will be described. In this embodiment, the light emitters 572 are arranged in a line along the edge of the light guide section 532 (see FIG. 17). These light emitting bodies 572 include an upper light emitting body 572a that supplies light to the light emitting part 553 located at the effective line L1 (upper stage) among the light emitting parts 553 formed in the light guide part 532, and an upper light emitting body 572a that supplies light to the light emitting part 553 located at the effective line L1 (upper stage); A light emitter 572b for the middle stage that supplies light to the light emitting part located at L2 (middle stage), a light emitter 572c for the lower stage that supplies light to the light emitting part located at the effective line L3 (lower stage), and a light emitter 572c for the upper stage that supplies light to the light emitting part located at the effective line L3 (lower stage). An upper-limit light-emitting body 572d in the central opening 85 disposed above the light-emitting body 572a, and an intermediate light-emitting body 572e disposed between the upper-stage light-emitting body 572a and the middle-stage light-emitting body 572b. , an intermediate light emitter 572f disposed between the middle light emitter 572b and the lower light emitter 572c, and a lower limit light emitting body 572f disposed between the middle light emitter 572b and the lower light emitter 572c; It is roughly divided into 572g of light emitters.

When the light emitting body 572a for the upper stage lights up, light is emitted from the light emitting part 553 located at the upper stage, and a pattern appears (displayed) on the upper stage. When the light emitting body 572b for the middle row is turned on, light is emitted from the light emitting part 553 located in the middle row, and a pattern appears (displayed) on the middle row. When the light emitting body 572c for the lower stage lights up, light is emitted from the light emitting part 553 located at the lower stage, and a pattern appears on the lower stage.

In this embodiment, the light emitting section 553 may move across the upper stage light supply range and the middle stage light supply range due to the rotation of the rotating body 525. These light supply ranges are connected via the light supply range by the intermediate light emitter 572e. By supplying light from the intermediate light emitting body 572e, it is avoided that the symbols become difficult to see when moving from the upper row to the middle row. Further, due to the rotation of the rotating body 525, the light emitting section 553 may move across the light supply range for the middle stage and the light supply range for the lower stage. These light supply ranges are connected via the light supply range by the intermediate light emitter 572f. By supplying light from the middle light emitting body 572f, it is avoided that the pattern becomes difficult to see when moving from the middle to the lower stage.

Note that when the light emitting section 553 moves from outside the central opening 85 onto the effective line L1, the light emitting section 553 passes through the range of light supplied from the upper limit light emitting body 572d, so that the light emitting section 553 moves onto the effective line L1. The display of the symbol will start before reaching the destination. Furthermore, when the light emitting section 553 moves from above the effective line L3 to outside the central opening 85, the light emitting section 553 passes through the range of light supplied from the lower limit light emitting body 572g, thereby moving away from the effective line L3. The symbol continues to be displayed even after it is removed.

(About various processes executed by the main controller 162)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 602 in the main control device 162 to advance the game in each game round will be explained. In addition to the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 602 executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and NMI interrupt processing that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). , description of these various processes will be omitted.

(timer interrupt processing)
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This process is started by the MPU 602 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various winning detection sensors is executed. That is, it reads the states of various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 162, determines the states of the winning winning detection sensors, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the subsequent step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the following step S104, a winning process for a through prize is executed in conjunction with a winning to the through gate 84. In the winning process for the through gate, it is determined whether or not the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the power holding area. On the condition that the stored accessory storage number is less than 4, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric accessory holding area. Further, the notification/performance control device 140 executes a process for lighting the reservation lamp unit 98 corresponding to the number of reservations stored. If the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 635, the winning detection flag is deleted and the winning processing for the through gate ends.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, in which the winning process for the actuating opening associated with winning to the actuating ports 83a and 83b is executed, and this timer interrupt process ends. do.

(Winning processing for actuation port)
Here, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 26 and 27, the winning process for the actuation port will be described.

In step S201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a (winning). If it is determined that the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a, the process advances to step S202, and a prize ball command is set for causing the payout control device 242 to pay out three game balls.

In the subsequent step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that the ball has entered the upper operating port 83a. After that, in step S204, information acquisition processing is performed to store the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, etc., and the main prize winning processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 83a, the process advances to step S205. In step S205, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b (winning). If it is determined that the game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b, the process advances to step S206, and a prize ball command is set for causing the payout control device 242 to pay out four game balls. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S206 is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in an external output process (S701) of the normal process described later.

In the subsequent step S207, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that the ball has entered the lower operating port 83b. Thereafter, information acquisition processing is performed in step S204, and the main winning processing ends.

Note that if a negative determination is made in both steps S201 and S205, that is, if there is no ball entering either the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b, the main winning processing is directly ended.

Here, the information acquisition process in step S204 will be described with reference to FIG. 27.

(Information acquisition processing)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, the starting pending memory number N stored in the pending number storage area FE of the pending ball storage area 632, specifically, the number N of the start pending memory stored in the pending number storage area FE of the pending ball storage area 632, specifically, the number N of the start holding memory stored in the holding number storage area FE of the holding ball storage area 632. It is determined whether or not the starting pending storage number N related to the ball entry section that triggered the start is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If the starting pending memory number N is the upper limit value, this information acquisition process is immediately terminated, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the starting pending memory number N of the corresponding ball entry section is incremented by 1 in step S302. At the same time, the total number of reservations (hereinafter referred to as common reservation number CRN) stored in the reservation number storage area FE in step S303 is incremented by one.

In the subsequent step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS updated in step S103 are transferred to the first storage area among the free storage areas of the reservation area RE. That is, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the common reservation number CRN incremented by 1 in step S302.

In the subsequent step S305, a pending command setting process is executed to make the notification/presentation control device 140, which is a sub-side (auxiliary side) control device, recognize that a winning has occurred in the operating ports 83a and 83b, and this information is Terminate the acquisition process. The hold command set in the hold command setting process of step S305 will be transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process to be described later.

(normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started upon power-on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing in steps S401 to S406 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing in steps S408 and S409 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, in step S401, external signal output processing is executed. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 242. In addition, if various commands such as variation commands, type commands, variation end commands, etc., suspension commands, and shift commands to be described later are set, they are sent to the notification/production control device 140. do.

Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the subsequent step S403, a game round control process for controlling the game in each game round is executed. In this game round control process, jackpot determination, setting of variable display of symbols by the variable display unit 500, display control of the operating opening display part of the main display unit 87, etc. are performed.

After executing the game time control process in step S403, the process advances to step S404, and a game state transition process is executed. This gaming state transition process shifts the gaming state to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like.

In the subsequent step S405, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 91 provided in the actuating port unit 83 is executed. In this electric role support process, the electric role release is determined whether or not to put the electric role model 91 in an open state using the numerical information acquired from the electric role model release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 633 of the RAM 604. A lottery is held, and when the electric accessory open state is won, opening/closing processing of the electric accessory 91 is executed. It also controls the display of the through-gate display section so as to teach the lottery results of the power lottery.

As already explained, a low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set as modes of support by the electric accessory 91, and transition to either support mode is performed in the game state transition process. After this process, if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the mode becomes high-frequency support mode, and if the flag is not set, the mode becomes low-frequency support mode.

In the electric support support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. In the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 91 will be in the open state when the electric role open state is won is set to be greater than in the case of the low-frequency support mode. Set the opening time to be longer. In addition, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, if the electric role opening state is won and the electric role opening state occurs multiple times, the next opening state will start after one opening state ends. The closing time is set to be shorter than the opening time.

Incidentally, when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode.

After that, in step S406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is energized once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 seconds) on the condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply/launch control device 243. do. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the following step S407, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 604. Furthermore, in step S409, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the change type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 604.

The execution time of each process in steps S401 to S406 changes depending on the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly The variation type counter CS can also be updated randomly.

(Game time control processing)
Next, the game time control process in step S501 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 29 to 30.

In the game time control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the main game cycle is continued without executing any of the processes after step S502, that is, the game cycle start process of steps S503 to S505 and the game cycle progression process of steps S506 to S508. Control processing ends.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the operating port display section of the main display unit 87 is in the variable display mode. If the operating port display section is not in the variable display mode, the process proceeds to steps S503 to S505 for starting the game round. In the process for starting a game round, first, in step S503, it is determined whether the total number of starting reservation balls (common reservation number CRN) is "0" or not. When the common reservation number CRN is “0”, it means that no reservation information is stored in the reservation ball storage area 632. Therefore, the main game round control process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if the common reservation number CRN is not "0", in step S504, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation ball storage area 632 for variable display, Further, in step S505, after executing a variation start process for starting the variable display on the main display unit 87 and the variable display on the variable display unit 500, the game round control process ends.

Here, the data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be explained in detail.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, among the start pending storage numbers N stored in the pending number storage area FE, the one targeted for the current setting process and the common pending number CRN are decremented by one. Subsequently, if the target of the current setting process is based on the ball entering the upper operating port 83a, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process is executed to shift the data (ie, reservation information) stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 of the reservation area RE. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area Ra1, and also clears the data in the second area Ra2→ Data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area Ra1, third area Ra3→second area Ra2, fourth area Ra4→third area Ra3, and so on.

If the target of the current setting process is based on the ball entering the lower operating port 83b, the data stored in the first area Rb1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process is executed to shift the data (ie, reservation information) stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 of the reservation area RE. This data shift process is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area Rb1, and also clears the data in the second area Rb2→ The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area Rb1, third area Rb3→second area Rb2, fourth area Rb4→third area Rb3, and so on.

Next, a shift command is set, which is information for making the notification/effect control device 140 recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. After that, this data setting process ends. The set shift command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 28). In the notification/performance control device 140, by receiving the shift command, it is understood that the shift of the pending information has occurred.

(Fluctuation start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S505 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30.

In the variation start process, first, in step S601, a validity determination process is executed to determine whether the pending information referred to in the current variation start process corresponds to a jackpot win. Specifically, information for jackpot determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. When the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, the obtained information is changed to the information corresponding to the jackpot by referring to the low probability mode win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 621 of the ROM 603. If the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the high probability mode win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 is referred to, and the information grasped above is used as a jackpot. Identify whether the information is included in the information corresponding to winning.

In the following step S602, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination process in step S601 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the result corresponds to a jackpot win, type determination processing is executed in step S603.

In the type determination process, information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Further, by referring to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, it is specified whether the information for type determination grasped above is included in the information corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result. Specifically, if the holding information corresponds to the ball entering the upper operating port 83a, the distribution table for the upper operating port 83a is referred to, and the holding information corresponds to the ball entering the lower operating port 83b. If so, the type is determined with reference to the distribution table for the lower operating port 83b.

In the subsequent step S604, it is determined whether the type of the current jackpot win is a variable probability jackpot result based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S603. If it is a probability variable jackpot result, a stop result setting process for a probability variable jackpot is executed in step S605, and if it is not a probability variable jackpot result, a stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed in step S606. Further, if it is determined in step S602 that it is not a jackpot win, a stop result setting process for a loss is executed in step S607.

In each stop result setting process from step S605 to step S607, information about the mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 87 is obtained by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 603. The identified information is stored in the RAM 604. Further, in steps S605 and S606, information for specifying in the MPU 602 that the success/failure determination result of the current game round is a probability variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, in step S605, the variable probability jackpot flag is stored, and in step S606, the normal jackpot flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes in steps S605 to S607, in step S608, a variable display time setting process is executed. In the variable display time setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 stores either the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag. If the result of the win/fail lottery is a win, it is determined whether or not a reach display will occur on the variable display unit 500W in the current game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that the reach is displayed. When specifying the presence or absence of a reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 603 is referred to.

If it is a jackpot result or if it corresponds to a reach occurrence even if it is a miss result, refer to the variable display time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 and The variable display time information corresponding to the value of the variable type counter CS is acquired, and the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area (variable display time measuring means) provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. After that, this setting process ends.

In other words, in this embodiment, the reach display is executed when the result of the lottery is a big hit, or when the result of the lottery is a loss and the lottery for generating reach is won. ing.

Although the details will be described later, the reach display includes a normal reach display and a super reach display, which have different variable display modes. In the variable display time table for reach occurrence, variable display time information corresponding to normal reach display and super reach display is set, and by referring to the table, variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is set. be obtained. Regarding the determination of the type of reach display, there is a table in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS, and by referring to this table, the value of the current variation type counter CS can be determined. A corresponding reach display is determined.

On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot result and a miss result that does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, the fluctuation display time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 623 is referred to and the current fluctuation The variable display time corresponding to the value of the type counter CS is obtained, and the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area. After that, this setting process ends.

The variable display time information when a reach does not occur is set such that the larger the common reservation number CRN, the shorter the variable display time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted that does not depend on the number of common reservation numbers CRN, and it may be set such that the smaller the number of common reservation numbers CRN, the shorter the variable display time is. . In addition, when the support mode is high-frequency support mode, a shorter variable display time is selected than when the support mode is low-frequency support mode, even when the number of pending information is the same. Although a variable display time table for generation is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variable display times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when a reach occurs, and the variable display time that is likely to be selected and the variable display time that is difficult to be selected are different depending on when a jackpot is won and when it is a miss. It may also be a configuration. Further, a variable display time table for a variable probability jackpot, a variable display time table for a normal jackpot, a variable display time table for a missed reach, and a variable display time table for a complete miss may be set individually.

As described above, the variable display time of each game round is determined using parameters such as whether or not a reach occurs, the type of reach display, the number of pending information, the value of the change type counter, and the like. However, the variable display time of each game is based on the contents of other pending information, specifically, information for jackpot determination, information for type determination, and information for reach determination included in other pending information as parameters. It is decided without doing anything.

Returning to the description of the variation start processing, after the variation display time setting process is executed in step S608, a variation command and a type command are set in step S609. The variation command includes information on whether reach has occurred and information on variation display time. Further, the type command includes information on game results. In other words, the type command includes, as game result information, information on probability-variable jackpot results, information on normal jackpot results, information on missing results, and the like.

The variation command and type command set in step S609 are transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 28). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the light emission pattern of the display lamp section 26 and the sound output pattern from the speaker section 29 for the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls the determined performance. The display lamp unit 26 and speaker unit 29 are controlled so that the content is executed. Further, the notification/performance control device 140 determines a variable display pattern on the variable display unit 500 for the game round based on the received variable command and type command, and causes the determined variable display pattern to be executed. The variable display unit 500 is controlled. Thereafter, in step S610, variable display of the picture pattern is started on the operating port display section of the main display unit 87, and then this variation start process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process (FIG. 29), when the main display unit 87 is in the variable display mode, the game round progression process of steps S506 to S509 is executed. In the game progress processing, first in step S506, it is determined whether or not the variable display time of the current game time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 604 has become "0". As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process. Further, the value of the set variable display time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 25) is activated.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, a variable display process is executed in step S507. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display unit 87 is changed. After that, the main game round control process is ended.

If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S508. In the variation end process, the information stored in the RAM 604 in any one of steps S505 to S507 is specified, and the main display unit 87 is configured to stop displaying the picture corresponding to the information. 87 is controlled.

In the following step S509, a variation end command is set. After that, the main game round control process is ended. The variation end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 28). In the notification/performance control device 140, by receiving the variation end command, the combination of final stop symbols in the game round is displayed as determined (final stop display).

As already explained, in this embodiment, the outline of the variable display mode of the symbols in the variable display unit 500 is specified by the notification/performance control device 140 with reference to the command from the main control device 162, and based on the specified result. The details of the variable display mode are determined by the notification/effect control device 140. Specifically, the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140 executes a fluctuating display control process as part of a regular process that is started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and this fluctuating display control process controls the fluctuating display of symbols. The outline of the aspect etc. is specified. Here, the variable display control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 31.

(Fluctuating display control processing)
In the variable display control process, first in step S701, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress, that is, whether the variable display unit 500 is performing a variable display of symbols for one game. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process advances to step S702, and it is determined whether or not a variation command transmitted from the main controller 162 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S702, the present fluctuation display control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S702, the variation display control process is ended after the variation start process is executed in step S703.

Returning to the explanation of step S701, if an affirmative determination is made in step S701, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress, the process advances to step S704. In step S704, it is determined whether the fluctuation end command transmitted from the main controller 162 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S704, the fluctuating display control process is finished after executing the fluctuating process in step S705. The process for during fluctuation is a process for executing various performances and changing the determined performance in the game round started by the process for starting fluctuation.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S704, the process advances to step S706, and after executing the process for ending the variation in step S706, the present variation display control process is ended. In the variation termination process, the variation display of symbols and the performance being executed are terminated (determined and stopped) in a manner that corresponds to the lottery result related to the game round. Specifically, the variable display unit 500 is controlled to fix and stop the symbols. In this process, the speaker section 29 and the lamp section 26 are driven and controlled to perform an effect corresponding to the confirmed stop. Thereafter, this variation termination process is terminated.

(Processing for starting fluctuation)
Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32, a supplementary explanation will be given of the fluctuation start processing in step S703. The fluctuation start process is a process for starting the performance of the game round based on receiving the fluctuation command transmitted from the main control device 162. In the variation start processing, a variation display mode such as a reach display and a symbol combination to be displayed as a fixed display are determined as effects for the game round.

In the variation start process, first, in step S801, the variation command received this time is read out, and information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the variation display time are specified from the command. Furthermore, as described above, when the main control device 162 transmits the variation command, the type command is also transmitted. In step S1201, the type command received together with the variation command received this time is read out, and from the command, game result information such as probability variable jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, or loss result information is specified. Then, in step S2101, from the above-identified information, information on whether there is a jackpot win, information on the type of jackpot when it is a jackpot win, information on whether reach occurs when the jackpot is not won, and variable display time. The information is stored in the register of the MPU 652.

In the following step S802, based on the information grasped in step S801, it is determined whether the game result of the game round to be started this time is a game result corresponding to a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, that is, if it is a variable probability jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, in the subsequent step S803, a jackpot performance setting process is executed.

In the performance setting process for the jackpot, the stop result of the jackpot symbol is determined (stop result determination process is performed). In the stop result determination process, in the case of a variable jackpot result, the stop result in which the combination of the same specific symbols (odd-numbered main symbols) is established on one active line L1 to L5 is determined for this game round. Determined as a stop result. In addition, in the case of a normal jackpot result, the stop result in which a combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) on one active line L1 to L5 is established as the stop result of this game round. decide.

The type of main symbol and active lines L1 to L5 that are stopped and displayed when a jackpot result is achieved are randomly determined by lottery or the like. The final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 653 stores each effective line L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined by the above processing is the final stop line table stored in the RAM 654. It is stored as address information in the line address storage area. Also, at this time, processing is executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area. In addition, in the following explanation, the address information of the stop result determined in various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 654.

In addition, in the performance setting process for the jackpot, the variable display mode of the jackpot symbol is determined (variable display mode determination process (performance pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, if there is a jackpot result, the result is notified through the reach display. In the process of determining the variable display mode for displaying the reach, the variable display pattern table for displaying the reach stored in the various table areas of the ROM 653 is acquired, and the variable display time and type of command of the variable command received this time are determined. A performance pattern of normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. Further, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654. In addition, in the variable display mode determination process described below, a corresponding variable display pattern table is obtained from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 653, and a performance pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result is determined. Then, the address information of the performance pattern determined in the performance pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654.

If it is determined in step S802 that the result is not a jackpot, the process advances to step S804. In step S804, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. When a reach occurs, the process advances to step S805 and executes an effect setting process for a reach. In the production setting process for generating a reach, the outline of the production and the combination of symbols to be finally stopped are determined. The former is similar to the process in step S803 above, so the explanation will be used here. Since this process corresponds to a missed reach, stop symbols are determined so as not to result in a symbol combination that corresponds to a jackpot result. That is, a stop result in which a combination of off-reach symbols is established on one active line L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the types of combinations of out-of-reach symbols and active lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In addition, when making this decision, make sure that the same combination of symbols does not occur on any of the active lines L1 to L5, and that the symbols in the middle symbol row that are the same as the symbols that form the reach line are placed in front of the reach line. Alternatively, the stopping result on the effective line is determined so that the final stop is made at a later shifted stopping position. Thereafter, a process is executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area.

If it is determined in step S804 that a reach has not occurred, the process advances to step S806. In step S806, the outline of the presentation for normal failure, the combination of symbols to be finally stopped, etc. are determined. Since this process deals with a complete loss, the stopping symbols are determined in such a way that a symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot result is not formed.

After executing any one of steps S803, S805, and S806, the process advances to step S807. In step S807, display control (variable display control) of the variable display unit 500 is performed to execute the performance in the current game round. As a result, each drum unit 523 starts rotating. Furthermore, based on the performance pattern determined in steps S803, S805, and S806, drive control of the speaker section 29 and lamp section 26 is started to start the performance for the game round.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35, a supplementary explanation will be given of the variable display mode of symbols in the variable display unit 500. Figure 33 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between variable display mode and jackpot expectation level, Figure 34 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of normal reach that does not support special changes, which will be described later, and Figure 35 shows the flow of normal reach that supports special changes, which will be described later. It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIG. 33, the variation display mode of symbols in this embodiment is roughly divided into three types: complete miss, normal reach, and super reach. For normal reach and super reach, the symbol fluctuation display mode is the same until the transition to reach display, and at least until the transition to reach display, the previous symbol fluctuation display mode will change to either normal reach or super reach. It is unclear whether it will be migrated.

When comparing normal reach and super reach, there is a difference in the scroll speed of the medium symbol after the reach display transition. Specifically, in the case of normal reach, the scroll speed of the medium symbol is set to be lower than in the case of super reach. Compared to normal reach, there is a higher expectation that super reach will result in a jackpot and shift to a special gaming state. For this reason, it is assumed that players who are looking forward to the transition to the special gaming state will pay attention to the fluctuating display of symbols in anticipation of the transition to the super reach state.

(Normal reach that does not support special changes)
FIG. 34 exemplifies the flow of normal reach in response to a missed result. As shown in FIG. 34(a), when a game round is started based on the ball entering the operating ports 83a and 83b, the symbols are displayed in variable display areas DL, DM, and DR. A scroll display that traverses the display areas DL, DM, and DR from the upper side to the lower side is started.

After that, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol column → the right symbol column, and in the example shown in FIG. Two reach lines are formed by the 6" pattern.

At a predetermined timing immediately after the reach line is formed, as shown in FIG. 34(c), the scroll speed of the middle symbol row becomes the first steady speed (low speed), and the left symbol row and right symbol row change accordingly. Other symbols that do not form a reach line will be hidden. Specifically, by turning off the light-emitting body 572bL for the middle stage of the left variable display area DL and the light-emitting body 572bR for the middle level of the right variable display area DR, the sub-symbols displayed in the middle stage become hidden. .

In the variable display unit 500 shown in this embodiment, the light guide section 532 and the side light 528 are used together to display the pattern, and when the supply of light from the side light 528 is stopped, the pattern is hidden. becomes. Regarding the light emitting part 553 formed in the light guide part 532, if you look carefully, it is not impossible to identify the pattern of the pattern, but when other patterns etc. emit light in the surrounding area, it is difficult to identify the pattern. Become.

After that, as shown in FIG. 34(d)→FIG. 34(e), the scrolling display of the medium symbol row continues in the medium fluctuation display area DM, and finally the "4" symbol appears in the middle row of the medium fluctuation display area DM. is stopped and displayed, clearly indicating to the player that the result is a loss.

In the present embodiment, after the middle symbol row stops in a part of the game round related to normal reach and super reach, the middle symbol row is displayed again in a variable manner, and the middle symbol may be replaced (hereinafter referred to as special change). When such a special change occurs, the expectation of a jackpot increases in both normal reach and super reach. Here, the flow of the special change will be explained with reference to FIG. 35.

(Normal reach with special changes)
When a game round is started based on the ball entering the actuation openings 83a and 83b, symbols are displayed in variable display areas DL, DM, and DR in variable display areas, specifically, each variable display area DL, DM, and DR are displayed from above. A scrolling display that cuts vertically to the bottom starts. After that, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol column → the right symbol column, and in the example shown in FIG. 35(a), one reach line is formed by the "7" symbol stopped and displayed on the active line L2.

At a predetermined timing immediately after the reach line is formed, as shown in FIG. 35(b), the scroll speed of the middle symbol row becomes the first steady speed (low speed), and the left symbol row and right symbol row Other symbols that do not form a reach line will be hidden. Specifically, the upper light emitting body 572aL and the lower light emitting body 572cL of the left variable display area DL and the upper light emitting body 572aR and the lower light emitting body 572cR of the right variable display area DR are turned off. Then, the sub-symbols displayed in the upper and middle rows are hidden.

Thereafter, the middle symbol row continues to be scrolled and displayed as shown in FIG. 35(c), and symbols other than the "7" symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed on the active line L2 as shown in FIG. 35(d). After the middle symbol row is once stopped and displayed, at a timing when a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, the middle symbol row becomes hidden as shown in FIG. 35(e). Specifically, all the light emitters 572 for the medium variable display area DM are turned off, so that the medium symbol row is not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 35(f), when the middle symbol row is redisplayed, the symbol located on the active line L2 is replaced with the "8" symbol from the sub-symbol, and the game result is a loss. It is clearly stated that Thereafter, when the final display period has elapsed, other symbols that had been hidden will be redisplayed, and a total of nine symbols (3×3) will be displayed.

Here, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 36 to 38, the process during fluctuation in the fluctuation display control process (FIG. 31) will be described.

(Processing during fluctuation)
As shown in FIG. 36, in the process during fluctuation, in step S901, it is determined whether the sidelight 528 and the backlight 582 are turned on or off, and in the subsequent step S902, a target for which light emission is to be forcibly regulated is determined. In step S903, the sidelight 528 and backlight 582 are controlled to emit light and the motor 526 is controlled based on the settings in steps S901 and S902.

(Light emission/drive setting processing)
As shown in FIG. 37, in the light emission/drive setting process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not a special variation display transition flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654. This special variation display transition flag is a flag that is stored when the above-mentioned special change of symbols is performed, and is erased when the corresponding game round ends. If a negative determination is made in step S1001, the process advances to step S1002.

In step S1002, it is determined whether the reach display transition flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654. The reach-to-reach display transition flag is a flag that is stored when the reach-to-reach display is parallel, and is erased when the above-mentioned special change is made or when the corresponding game round ends. If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the process advances to step S1003.

In step S1003, it is determined whether it is the timing to stop and display the left symbol row in the left variable display area DL. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1003, the process advances to step S1004, and processing for stopping the left drum (rotating body 525L) is executed. Specifically, a flag is set to stop outputting the drive signal to the left drum motor 526L. In the light emission/drive control process in step S903, based on this flag and the stop symbol determined at the start of the fluctuation, stop control is performed so that the symbol is stopped and displayed in the left fluctuation display area DL. Become.

If a negative determination is made in step S1003, the process advances to step S1005. In step S1005, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the right symbol row in the right variable display area DR. If a negative determination is made in step S1005, the main light emission/drive control process is directly ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1005, the process advances to step S1006, and a process for stopping the right drum (rotating body 525R) is executed. Specifically, a flag is set to stop outputting the drive signal to the right drum motor 526R. In the light emission/drive control process in step S903, based on this flag and the stop symbol determined at the start of the fluctuation, stop control is performed so that the symbol is stopped and displayed in the right fluctuation display area DR. Become.

After executing the stop processing in step S1006, the process advances to step S1007, and it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to the reach display. If a negative determination is made in step S1007, the main light emission/drive setting process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the process advances to step S1008.

In step S1008, a process for partially extinguishing the side lights is executed. In this partial lights-off process, for the left drum sidelight 528L and the right drum sidelight 528R, a part of the light emitting body 572 is turned off in order to hide the symbols that do not form the reach line. Set flag. In the light emission/drive control process in step S903, light emission control is performed to turn off some of the light emitters 572 based on this flag and the stop position (effective line) of the symbol determined at the start of variation. .

In the following step S1009, processing for lighting the backlight 582 of the background display device 529 is performed. Specifically, a flag for turning on the backlight 582 is set. In the light emission/drive control process in step S903, light emission control is performed to turn on the backlight 582 based on this flag.

In the present embodiment, the background is displayed with lighting upon transition to the ready-to-reach display, suggesting that a jackpot may occur. Although details will be described later, by lighting the backlight 582, the light emitting portion 553 corresponding to the hidden pattern is made less noticeable.

Thereafter, in step S1010, a reach display transition flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654, and the main light emission/drive setting process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S1002, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, that is, if the reach display transition flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654, the process advances to step S1011. In step S1101, it is determined whether it is the timing to shift to the special variation display. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to execute a special change as shown in FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S1011, the process advances to step S1012. In step S1012, it is determined whether it is the timing to change the variable display speed (scroll speed) of the middle symbol row. If a negative determination is made in step S1012, the main light emission/drive setting process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1021, the process for changing the variable display speed is executed in step S1013, and then the main light emission/drive setting process is ended.

In the variable display speed change process, a flag is set to change the variable display speed of the medium symbol. In the light emission/drive control process of step S903, the drive control of the motor 526 of the middle drum is performed based on this flag so that the variable display speed of the middle symbol row becomes a predetermined speed. Specifically, when the current reach display is normal reach, the rotational speed of the rotating body 525M is controlled so that the fluctuating display speed of the middle symbol row becomes the first predetermined speed (low speed), and it is super reach. In this case, the rotational speed of the rotating body 525M is controlled so that the variable display speed becomes a second predetermined speed (high speed).

Returning to the explanation of step S1011, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1011, that is, if it is the timing to shift to the special fluctuation display, the process advances to step S1014. In step S1014, a process for temporarily stopping the middle drum (rotating body 525M) is executed. Specifically, a flag is set to temporarily stop the middle drum. In the light emission/drive control process in step S903, the output of the drive signal to the middle drum motor 526M is stopped based on this flag. As a result, the three symbols set at the start of the fluctuation are stopped and displayed in the medium fluctuation display area DM. It should be noted that the middle symbols that are temporarily stopped on the reach line at this point are set so that the symbol combination on the reach line is a symbol combination that corresponds to a miss result.

Subsequently, in step S1015, the reach display transition flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654 is erased, and after the special fluctuation display transition flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654 in step S1016, the main flash End the drive setting process.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if the special fluctuation display transition flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654, special fluctuation display processing is performed in step S1016. After executing this, the main light emission/drive setting process ends. The special variation display processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

(Special fluctuation display processing)
In the special variation display processing, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the above-mentioned special change, that is, symbol replacement display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the process advances to step S1102.

In step S1102, a process for turning off the side light for the middle drum is executed. Specifically, a flag for turning off the side lights is set. In the light emission/drive control process in step S903, the middle drum side light is turned off based on this flag. As a result, each symbol constituting the medium symbol row becomes hidden, and each symbol that was temporarily displayed in the medium fluctuation display area DM becomes non-displayed.

In the following step S1103, processing for driving the middle drum is executed. Specifically, a flag for re-driving the middle drum is set. In the light emission/drive control process in step S903, the middle drum is rotated based on this flag. In other words, the middle drum rotates in a situation where no light is supplied from the side light 528M. Regarding the middle drum, the light emitting part 553 corresponding to the symbol (final stop symbol) constituting the symbol combination (final stop symbol combination) corresponding to the current game result is positioned on the reach line. Rotate.

Regarding the direction of rotation of the middle drum at the time of special change, (1) the number of times the boundary portion BP1 passes through the middle variation display area DM is minimized, and (2) the amount of rotation is minimized. It is stipulated based on two conditions. For example, when the middle drum is rotated in the forward direction, one boundary area BP1 passes through the middle fluctuation display area DM, and when the middle drum is rotated in the opposite direction, two boundary areas BP1 pass through the middle variation display area DM. When passing through the variable display area DM, the forward direction is set as the rotation direction. Regarding each of these conditions (1) to (2), (1) is given priority over (2), and when the medium fluctuation display area DM is in a situation where the symbol is hidden, the boundary part BP1 is By moving, it is difficult for the player to realize that the middle drum is rotating.

Returning to the explanation of step S1101, if a negative determination is made in step S1101, it is determined in step S1104 whether or not it is the end timing of symbol replacement (special change). If a negative determination is made in step S1104, this special fluctuation display processing is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, the process advances to step S1105. In step S1105, a process for partially lighting the side lights for the middle drum is executed. Specifically, a flag for partially lighting is set.

In the light emission/drive control process in step S903, a partial lighting process for the middle drum side lights is executed based on this flag. Specifically, light is started to be supplied to the upper, middle, and lower parts of the medium fluctuation display area DM that are located on the reach line, and the light supply is stopped to other parts. do. For example, if the currently formed reach line straddles the middle stage, the light emitter 572b corresponding to the middle stage is turned on, and the other light emitters 572a, 572c to 572g are left unlit. As a result, the middle symbols are suddenly replaced, and the impact on the display of game results can be strengthened.

Hereinafter, the flow of reach display will be supplementarily explained with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39 is a timing chart showing the flow of ready-to-reach display that does not support special changes, and FIG. 40 is a timing chart showing the flow of ready-to-reach display that does not support special changes.

(Reach display not compatible with special changes)
As shown in FIG. 39, at the timing ta1 when the game round related to the reach display that does not support special changes starts, the side lights 528L, 528M, and 528R of each drum are all lit, and the back of the background display device 529 is lit. Light 582 is off. In this state, a drive signal is output to each of the motors 526L, 526M, and 526R, thereby starting scroll display of the symbol rows in each of the variable display areas DL, DM, and DR.

At timing ta2 after the start of the fluctuation, the output of the drive signal to the left drum motor 526L is stopped, and the left drum stops at a preset rotation position. As a result, three symbols preset in the left variable display area DL are stopped and displayed. At the subsequent timing ta3, the output of the drive signal to the right drum motor 526R is stopped, and the right drum stops at a preset rotation position. As a result, three symbols preset in the right variable display area DR are stopped and displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 39, a reach line is formed by stopping the same symbol on a preset active line, and a transition is made to a reach display. At this timing of ta3, the backlight 582 of the background display device 529 is turned on, emphasizing the transition to the ready-to-reach display. Also, at the timing of ta3, a part of the light emitting body 572L that constitutes the side light 528L is turned off so that among the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the left variable display area DL, those that do not form a reach line are not displayed. The lights are turned off. In addition, a part of the light emitting body 572R constituting the side light 528R is turned off so that among the symbols stopped and displayed in the right variable display area DR, those that do not form a reach line are also hidden. Note that even under this situation, all of the light emitting bodies 572M constituting the sidelight 528M for the middle drum are maintained in a lit state.

At timing ta4 after the ready-to-reach display transition, symbols are stopped and displayed in the medium fluctuation display area DM, and a symbol combination corresponding to the game result is formed. Thereby, the game result is clearly shown to the player. Thereafter, at timing ta5 after the symbol confirmation display period has elapsed, the light emitters 572 constituting each side light 528 are fully lit, and the backlight 582 is turned off.

(Reach display compatible with special changes)
As shown in FIG. 40, at timing tb1 when the game round related to the reach display corresponding to the special change starts, the side lights 528L, 528M, and 528R of each drum are all lit, and the backlight of the background display device 529 is lit. Regarding 582, the light is off. In this state, a drive signal is output to each of the motors 526L, 526M, and 526R, thereby starting scroll display of the symbol rows in each of the variable display areas DL, DM, and DR.

At timing tb2 after the start of the fluctuation, the output of the drive signal to the left drum motor 526L is stopped, and the left drum stops at a preset rotation position. As a result, three symbols preset in the left variable display area DL are stopped and displayed. At the subsequent timing tb3, the output of the drive signal to the right drum motor 526R is stopped, and the right drum stops at a preset rotation position. As a result, three symbols preset in the right variable display area DR are stopped and displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, a reach line is formed by stopping the same symbol on a preset active line, and a transition is made to a reach display. At this timing tb3, the backlight 582 of the background display device 529 is turned on, emphasizing the transition to the reach display. Also, at the timing of tb3, a part of the light emitting body 572L that constitutes the side light 528L is turned off so that among the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the left variable display area DL, those that do not form a reach line are not displayed. The lights are turned off. In addition, a part of the light emitting body 572R constituting the side light 528R is turned off so that among the symbols stopped and displayed in the right variable display area DR, those that do not form a reach line are also not displayed. Note that even under this situation, all of the light emitting bodies 572M constituting the side light 528M for the middle drum are maintained in a lit state.

At timing tb4 after the ready-to-reach display transition, symbols are temporarily displayed in the medium fluctuation display area DM, and a symbol combination corresponding to a miss result is formed. The above-mentioned special change (special variation display) occurs after the timing of tb4. Note that the series of flows up to the timing of tb4 are the same as the flow up to the timing of ta4 in the ready-to-reach display that does not support special changes shown in FIG.

At timing tb5, when a predetermined waiting period (slightly shorter than the final display period) has elapsed from the timing tb4 when the symbol combination corresponding to the missed result is temporarily displayed, the side light 528M for the middle drum is configured. All of the light emitters 572M are turned off, and the symbols that have been stopped and displayed in the medium fluctuation display area DM are temporarily hidden. The replacement of symbols due to special changes may be repeated up to three times, but the example shown in FIG. 40 illustrates a case where this replacement occurs twice.

Immediately after the light emitting body 572M becomes non-display at timing tb5, a drive signal is output to the middle drum motor 526M, and the light emitting part 553M located on the reach line is replaced. At timing tb6 after the replacement is completed, the light emitters 572M that correspond to the reach line are turned on, and the others are kept turned off. This makes it appear as if the middle symbol on the reach line has suddenly been replaced with another symbol.

The symbol combination displayed at the timing tb6 also corresponds to a miss result, and then the second special change is started. Specifically, at timing tb7 after a predetermined waiting period (slightly shorter period than the confirmed display period) has elapsed from timing tb6 when the symbol combination is displayed, the light emitting body constituting the side light 528M for the middle drum is activated. 572M are all turned off, and the symbols that were stopped and displayed in the medium fluctuation display area DM are temporarily hidden.

Immediately after the light emitter 572M goes out of display at timing tb7, a drive signal is output to the middle drum motor 526M, and the light emitting part 553M located on the reach line is replaced. At timing tb8 after the replacement is completed, the one corresponding to the reach line among the light emitters 572M is turned on, and the others are kept turned off. This makes it appear as if the middle symbol on the reach line has suddenly been replaced with another symbol. Since the game round shown in FIG. 40 corresponds to a losing result, the symbol combination that is finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display) also corresponds to a losing result.

While the special change detailed above is being performed, the backlight 582 is maintained in a lit state, and the light from the backlight 582 is irradiated to the front of the gaming machine through each drum (light guide section 532). This is a contrivance to prevent the pattern of the light emitting section 553 from appearing when environmental light from lighting in a game hall or the like enters the light guide section 532.

Each drum (more specifically, the light guide section 532) of the variable display unit 500 described in detail above is made up of a combination of a plurality of light guide panels 555 to 557 divided in the rotational direction, and between the light guide panels 555 to 557. A boundary site BP1 occurs in the area. The increased number of opportunities for these boundary parts BP1 to be located in the variable display area deteriorates the appearance of the variable display unit 500 and becomes an obstacle to improving the degree of attention to the game by performing the various display effects described above. There are concerns that this will happen. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience, the arrangement of the light emitting parts 553 formed in the light guide part 532, the position of the boundary part BP1, and the relationship between the variable display area are devised. One of its characteristics is that it is The invention will be described below with reference to FIGS. 22 and 41. Although the left drum is illustrated in FIG. 41, the relationship between the boundary portion BP1 and the variable display area is the same for the middle drum and the right drum. Note that, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 41 shows a state in which the light emitting section 553 is emitting light.

As shown in FIG. 22, the light guide section 532 of each drum is provided with a plurality of light emitting sections 553 arranged in the rotation direction. These light emitting parts 553 correspond to the main symbols and sub-symbols, and the light supplied from the side light 528 is emitted from the light emitting parts 553, so that each of the main symbols "1" to "9" and " A sub-pattern resembling a seashell is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), the size of the main pattern in the rotating direction is larger than the size of the sub pattern. After arranging a boundary area BP1 between the main pattern and the sub-symbol, a blank area formed between the boundary area BP1 and the main pattern is formed between the boundary area BP1 and the sub-symbol. It is biased towards the main pattern so that it is smaller than the blank area.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, a boundary region BP1 is provided between the "6" symbol (more specifically, the light emitting section 553 for the "6" symbol) and the sub-symbol (more specifically, the light emitting section 553 for the sub-symbol). ing. When the "6" symbol is stopped at the top of the variable display area, the boundary part BP1 is located above the upper limit position of the variable display area, that is, in a range that cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine (Fig. 41(b) )reference). On the other hand, when the "6" symbol stops directly below the variable display area (outside the frame), the boundary part BP1 is below the lower limit position of the variable display area, that is, in a range that cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine. (See FIG. 41(c)).

Generally, in order to facilitate manufacturing, it is assumed that the boundary area is set so that the distance from the light emitting part for the sub-symbol is the same as the distance from the light emitting part for the main pattern. Ru. However, with such a configuration, there is a concern that it will be difficult to increase the chances of stopping the boundary portion at a position outside the variable display area. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this embodiment, even if the symbol closest to the boundary area is stopped at the upper or lower level of the variable display area, the boundary area BP1 is visible to the player. By reducing the number of opportunities, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed. In this way, the position of the boundary part BP1 shown in this embodiment has a clear technical significance of making the boundary part BP1 less noticeable.

Further, one of the features of this embodiment is that it is devised to suppress the boundary portion BP1 from becoming conspicuous while rotating each drum to scroll and display the symbols. The invention will be described below with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the luminescence control process, and FIG. 42(b) is a schematic diagram showing the shift of the regulated object.

As explained with reference to FIG. 36, the process for during fluctuation executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140 includes the above-mentioned light emission/drive setting process, light emission regulation process, and light emission/drive control process. As shown in FIG. 42(a), in the light emission regulation process, first, in step S1201, the position of the boundary portion BP1 is specified. Next, among the light emitting bodies 572 constituting the side light 528, those to be regulated are identified in step S1202. Specifically, a light emitting body located on the side of the boundary region BP1 identified in step S1201 is identified. In the following step S1203, the light emitting body identified in step S1202 is set as a target for light emission regulation. In the light emission/drive control process, the target set in step S1203 is turned off regardless of the content set in the light emission/drive setting process.

As shown in FIG. 42(b), when the boundary part BP1 moves with the rotation of the symbol row, the light emitting body 572 located on the side of the boundary part BP1 switches to the off state to follow it. . In other words, the supply of light to the boundary site BP1 is suppressed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the boundary portion BP1 from emitting light or becoming conspicuous.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In the variable display unit 500, a pattern is displayed by emitting light from a side light 528 from a light emitting section 553 formed in a light guide section 532. The pattern can be switched between display and non-display by turning on/off the side light 528, and the color of the pattern can also be changed by changing the emitted light color. In this way, constructing a variable display unit (corresponding to the "picture display means") by using the light guide section 532 and the side light 528 in combination can diversify the display mode of the symbols and improve the attention to the game. It is preferable.

When the light from the side light 528 is supplied from the supply state to the non-supply state, the pattern becomes invisible or difficult to see (hidden). In this way, by enabling symbols to be switched between display and non-display, the information provided to the player by the variable display unit 500 can be restricted depending on the gaming situation. Further, it can contribute to diversification of display modes when displaying symbols in a variable manner.

By configuring the end face 554 of the light guide portion 532 to be irradiated with light from the side light 528, it is possible to prevent the light source from being noticed when visually confirming the pattern.

When changing the pattern displayed in the variable display area, the rotating body 525 (light guiding section 532) rotates in the above-mentioned supply state so that the pattern appears to be moving in the direction of the movement. Can be done. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the light guide section 532 is moved instead of the light source, it is possible to suitably avoid restrictions on how the pattern can be changed due to the length of the wiring or the like. In addition, since the position of the light source can be fixed, it is possible to replace the symbols displayed at the same position, and even when the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the areas that players should focus on are unified. be able to. This is a preferable configuration in order to suppress overlooking of symbol display and reduce player fatigue.

The operating direction of the light guide section 532 is set to be perpendicular to the direction of light irradiation from the side light 528 (specifically, the light emitter 572). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a change in the distance between the light irradiation target (end surface 554) in the light guide section 532 and the light emitting body 572 as the light guide section 532 operates. This is preferable in order to prevent the amount of light supplied to the light emitting section 553 from becoming insufficient due to the light from the light emitter 572 being diffused before being irradiated onto the end surface 554.

The light emitting parts 553 are arranged in parallel in the operating direction of the light guide part 532, and the light emitters 572 that constitute the side light 528 are also arranged in parallel in the operating direction of the light guide part 532. By individually controlling the light emission of these light emitters 572, the number of pictures displayed in the variable display area can be changed. In this way, the expressiveness of the variable display unit 500 can be improved by using a plurality of light emitting bodies 572 that can be individually controlled to increase or decrease the number of displayed symbols depending on the gaming situation. It can be improved dramatically.

When the light emitting section 553 is formed of minute irregularities, the position and shape of the light emitting section 553 cannot be completely identified by visual inspection because environmental light such as lighting in the game hall is diffused by the light emitting section. It becomes difficult to make it impossible. In other words, there is a possibility that the shape and position of the light emitting section 553 can be grasped by looking closely. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, if a configuration is adopted in which light is irradiated from the backlight 582 to the light guide section 532, the light from the backlight 582 can confuse environmental light, etc., and the shape of the light emitting section 553 can be This can make it difficult to determine the location and position of the vehicle. This is preferable in order to strengthen the impact when the pattern suddenly appears by switching the supply state/non-supply state of the side light 528.

When operating the light guide section 532, it cannot be denied that by looking carefully, it is possible to identify that the light guide section 532 is in operation using the light emitting section 553 as a landmark. This becomes a factor that reduces the impact when the symbols are suddenly replaced by operating the light guide section 532 while the side light 528 is in the non-supply state. Therefore, when replacing the symbols, as shown in the above embodiment, the supply of light to the light guide section 532 by the side light 528 is stopped, and the light is irradiated to the light guide section 532 by the backlight 582. If the light guide unit 532 is configured to operate under such conditions, the light from the backlight 582 can be used to distract from environmental light and the like. This makes it difficult to understand that the light guide section 532 is in operation, and can suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience. Note that since the light from the backlight 582 is irradiated over the entire variable display area, it is possible to suitably exhibit the effect of making it difficult to identify the shape of the light emitting section 553, the operating status of the light guide, etc.

By rotating the substantially annular light guide section 532, the light supply location in the light guide section 532 (end surface 554) is changed. As a result, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the light guide section 532. Since the light guide section 532 has a substantially annular shape, the variable display of the symbols can be continued without reversing the direction of rotation of the light guide section 532. In other words, when performing dynamic display using the light guide section 532 and enhancing expressiveness, it is possible to prevent the light guide section 532 from becoming excessively large. This is a preferable configuration in order to improve the player's attention level.

The distance from the side light 528 to the end surface 554 of the light guide section 532 is constant at any rotational position. Therefore, there is no need to change the position or direction of the sidelight 528 in response to changes in the light supply location (for example, to ensure an operating gap). Therefore, the configuration related to light supply in the variable display unit 500 can be simplified.

The side light 528 is configured such that the light irradiation direction of the light emitter 572 (LED) is the same as the rotation center axis CL, and the light irradiation direction and the arrangement direction of the light emitting parts 553 (rotation direction ) will intersect. In other words, when a plurality of light emitting sections 553 are used together, it is avoided that the light emitting sections 553 are lined up in the light irradiation direction. Therefore, when switching the displayed pattern according to the rotation position, light is suppressed from being supplied to the pattern that is not to be displayed, and the pattern that should not be displayed may emit a faint light. The occurrence of inconvenience can be suitably avoided.

In the configuration in which the light guide section 532 has a substantially annular shape, an insertion section 561 is provided into which the portion (end) of the light guide section 532 extending from the frame 531 (rim 536) is inserted. By arranging the side light 528 in the portion 561, the following effects can be expected. That is, even if the movement of the light guide section 532 becomes unstable, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the light guide section 532 at a location (insertion section) close to the light irradiation position. Thereby, the light supply function can be stably performed.

Further, since the insertion portion 561 is provided on the base body 524 that holds the rotating body 525, the gap between the insertion portion 561 and the light guide portion 532 can be made as small as possible. This is preferable in terms of suppressing strong interference between the insertion section 561 and the light guide section 532 and suppressing light leakage from the insertion section 561.

In a configuration in which the light guide section 532 is movable, if the light guide section 532 and the insertion section 561 come into contact and the light guide section 532 is damaged, light leakage is likely to occur at that part. There are concerns. This becomes a factor that reduces the efficiency of supplying light to the light emitting section 553. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, a gap is formed between the insertion portion 561 and the outer surface portion 551 and the inner surface portion 552 of the light guide portion 532 to avoid contact between the insertion portion 561 and the light guide portion 532. By doing so, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Regarding the above-mentioned light guide section 532, dividing it into a plurality of pieces (light guide panels 555 to 557) in the rotation direction can contribute to facilitation of manufacturing and reduction of manufacturing costs. However, in such a configuration, if the boundary (edge) of each piece is caught in the open part (entrance part) of the insertion part, it is assumed that the behavior of the light guide part 532 will be disturbed. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, the above-mentioned gap is formed so as to become larger toward the open portion, and by suppressing the catching between the edge and the insertion portion 561, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. Note that in a configuration in which the open portion (entrance portion) is expanded, light tends to leak from this portion. Therefore, by directing the open portion toward the rear side of the gaming machine, even if light leaks, it can be made less noticeable.

By configuring the light guide section 532 by a plurality of light guide panels 555 to 557 arranged in parallel in the rotation direction as shown in the above embodiment, the shape of the light guide section 532 can be made into a substantially annular shape. can. Such a configuration can contribute to facilitating the manufacture of the drum unit 523 and reducing manufacturing costs, compared to, for example, a case where one light guide plate is formed in an annular shape. Here, if a plurality of parallel light guide panels 555 to 557 are coupled to each other, distortion may occur due to manufacturing variations or the like. In the configuration in which light is supplied to the end surface 554 of the light guide section 532, there is a concern that the positional relationship between the side light 528 and the end surface 554 will vary due to the influence of such distortion, and that the pattern display function will not be performed effectively. . In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, by mounting the light guide panels 555 to 557 on the frame 531 in a non-fixed state, the above-mentioned problem can be suppressed. This is preferable in order to suppress deterioration in appearance when displaying symbols in a variable manner using the light guide section 532, and to improve player's attention.

As described above, when a plurality of light guide panels 555 to 557 are combined to form one light guide section 532, the boundary portion BP1 between the light guide panels 555 to 557 is conspicuous, which improves the appearance of the light guide section 532. decreases. This is not preferable in terms of increasing player attention. In addition, in a configuration in which the light guide portion 532 is fixed to the frame 531, the portion of the light guide portion 532 that is fixed to the frame 531 may be different in appearance from the portion that is not fixed. In this embodiment, the ends of each of the light guide panels 555 to 557 on both sides in the rotation direction are free ends, and the fixed points are kept away from the boundary region BP1 between the light guide panels 555 to 557. There is. This prevents the player's line of sight from being guided to the boundary portion BP1 when the fixed point enters the player's field of vision, and one light guide section 532 is configured by a combination of a plurality of light guide panels 555 to 557. It is possible to suppress the deterioration in appearance caused by this.

When the light guide section 532 is composed of a plurality of light guide panels 555 to 557, it is preferable to make the boundary portion BP1 between the light guide panels 555 to 557 as inconspicuous as possible. Here, the light emitter 572 (LED) constituting the side light 528 is configured to emit light in a predetermined direction, and the end surfaces on both sides of the rotation direction of the light guide panels 555 to 557 extend in the predetermined direction. By adopting a configuration in which the light irradiation direction and the extending direction of the boundary portion BP1 match, it is possible to suppress the boundary portion BP1 from emitting light. This is preferable in order to improve the appearance. Note that the boundary area BP1 is located in a non-disposed area (blank area) of the pattern, but since this boundary area BP1 extends in the direction of the rotation center axis CL, the pattern has been changed with consideration to the boundary area BP1. It is possible to prevent the non-arrangement area from becoming excessively large.

If the number of light guide panels (the number of divisions) is excessively increased, there will be a greater chance that the boundary between the light guide panels will stop in the variable display area (effective line). There is a concern that this may be a factor in degrading the appearance of the variable display unit. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, the number of divisions is defined so that the number of symbols arranged on each of the light guide panels 555 to 557 is greater than the upper limit number of symbols that can be stopped in the variable display area. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the chance that the boundary portion BP1 stops in the variable display area. Thereby, the adverse effects caused by using a plurality of light guide panels together can be alleviated.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the side light 528 as a "light emitting section" is disposed on the base body 524 rotatably holding the rotating body 525 (drum), but the invention is not limited to this. do not have. It is also possible to mount a configuration corresponding to the side light 528 on the rotating body 525. However, in the case of such a configuration, the weight of the drum will further increase, and it is assumed that the responsiveness during rotation/stopping will decrease. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the side lights 528 on the base body 524 as shown in the first embodiment above to reduce the weight of the rotating body 525.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, by turning off a part of the light emitting body 572 (which serves as a source of light to the boundary part BP1) according to the rotational position of the boundary part BP1, The structure was designed to regulate the supply of light. The specific configuration for regulating the supply of light to the boundary site BP1 is arbitrary, and for example, a shielding means such as a sealing material that covers the boundary site BP1 from the side may be provided.

However, considering that the end of the light guide section 532 is inserted into the insertion section 561, the possibility of the shielding means coming into contact with the wall surface of the insertion section 561 is ruled out due to manufacturing variations and aging deterioration. Can not. If the game machine continues to operate under such conditions where there is a possibility of contact, the shielding means may wear out and the shielding function may deteriorate. As a countermeasure against this problem, for example, by increasing the gap between the light guide section 532 and the insertion section 561, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. This is not preferable in terms of improving the efficiency of light supply. Taking these circumstances into consideration, as shown in the first embodiment, regulating the supply of light to the boundary portion BP1 through light emission control can suitably improve the durability of the gaming machine. There is technical significance in that it is possible.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment, the light guide panels 555 to 557 constituting the light guide section 532 are not coupled to each other, but the invention is not limited to this, and the light guide panels 555 to 557 are coupled to each other. Good too. However, in view of the fact that deformation such as distortion may occur in the light guide panels 555 to 557 during or after manufacture, such deformation is allowed by disabling the light guide panels 555 to 557 (border portion BP1 It is preferable to have a structure in which the material is absorbed by

<Modification 4>
In the first embodiment, a gap is provided at the boundary portion BP1 of the light guide panels 555 to 557, but this does not negate the configuration in which the light guide panels 555 to 557 are brought into contact with each other at the boundary portion BP1.

<Modification 5>
In the first embodiment described above, the inner surface of the insertion section 561 and the light guide section 532 are not in contact with each other, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a guide roller may be provided on the insertion portion 561 side to guide the light guide portion 532. However, if a scratch or the like occurs on the surface of the light guiding section 532, the optical path may change and the efficiency of supplying light to the light emitting section 553 may decrease. In view of such circumstances, it is preferable to provide a protective member or the like in the portion of the light guide portion 532 that comes into contact with the guide roller.

<Modification 6>
In the first embodiment described above, the rotating body 525 is attached to the base body 524 via the motor 526, but considering that the weight of the rotating body 525 increases due to the light guide section 532, the base body It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the rotating body 525 is rotatably held by the rotating body 524 and the rotating body 525 is operated by the motor 526.

<Modification 7>
In the first embodiment, the light guide section 532 is configured by a combination of three light guide panels 555 to 557, but the number of light guide panels that the light guide section 532 is configured with is arbitrary. However, even in such a case, it is preferable that the number of light emitting parts (i.e., the number of patterns) formed on one light guide panel be greater than the upper limit number of patterns that can be stopped in the variable display area. .

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, the light guide section 532 is rotatably held, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It is sufficient that the pattern visible from the central opening 85 can be changed by moving the light guide, and for example, the light guide may be configured to be slidably held.

<Modification 9>
In the first embodiment, the light guide section 532 is formed in a cylindrical shape, but the light guide section 532 is not limited to this. For example, the light guide section 532 may be formed into a disk shape, and the light guide section 532 may be arranged so that its plate surface faces the front of the gaming machine. In this case, it is preferable to change the direction of the rotation center axis of the rotating body in the front-back direction.

<Modification 10>
In the first embodiment described above, the backlight 582 is turned on when transitioning to the ready-to-reach display, but the backlight 582 is turned on at least when a special change (special variation display) is executed. It is sufficient if it is, and whether or not to turn on the backlight 582 during other periods is optional.

<Modification 11>
In the first embodiment, when a special change (special variation) is executed, after the operation of the rotating body 525 is stopped, the side light 528 is turned off, and the re-operation of the rotating body 525 is completed. Although the configuration is such that the side light 528 is turned on later, the specific configuration for operating the rotating body 525 using the off period of the side light 528 is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the above configuration, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the side light 528 is turned off during the operation of the rotating body 525 and then turned on after the operation of the rotating body 525 is completed. be.

In addition, when inserting or displaying a symbol by special change, there is a variable display mode in which the rotation speed of the rotating body 525M of the middle drum is relatively slow (for example, normal reach) and a variable display mode in which the rotation speed is relatively fast (for example, super reach). ), it is also possible to change the timing of supplying/stopping light according to the rotation speed. For example, when the symbols are temporarily stopped on the reach line, by lengthening the pause period, there is more time to check the symbols. However, if the temporary suspension period is simply lengthened, restrictions regarding the number of re-variations at the time of special changes may become stronger. Therefore, by restarting the supply of light immediately before the pause, it is possible to increase the margin for checking the symbols. However, in such a configuration, the above-mentioned margin substantially changes depending on the rotational speed of the rotating body. Therefore, when the rotation speed is relatively fast, the start timing of light supply is set earlier than when the rotation speed is relatively slow, or the light supply range is set to include a part of the upstream side of the reach line. It is a good idea to

<Modification 12>
In the first embodiment, the sidelight 528 as the "light emitting part" is fixed, and the light guide part 532 as the "light guide" is movable, but this relationship can also be reversed. It is. That is, by moving the light emitting part with respect to the fixed light guiding part, it is also possible to display the symbols in a variable manner. Even in this case, it is preferable that the arrangement direction of the light emitting parts formed in the light guide part and the moving direction of the light emitting part are aligned.

<Modification 13>
In the first embodiment, the light guide section 532 is formed in a substantially annular shape, but it is sufficient that the pattern displayed in the variable display area can be changed by movement in one direction. The portion 532 is not limited to an annular shape (for example, it is not denied that a recess or the like may be formed in a portion).

<Modification 14>
In conventional gaming machines, for example, it is possible to make the symbols virtually indistinguishable by displaying the symbols in a variable manner at high speed. However, such movement hinders improvement in the durability of the symbol display means. In particular, as shown in this embodiment mode, in a structure in which the rotating body includes a light guide section, the weight is increased compared to a case in which the rotating body includes a light guide section, for example, so there is a concern that such inconvenience will become noticeable. Ru.

Therefore, by stopping the supply of light from the side light 528 while the rotating body 525 is rotating, the pattern displayed on the light guide section 532 can be suddenly erased. By controlling the light emission of the sidelights 528 in this manner, the appearance can be greatly changed (distinguishability can be changed), and while diversifying the display modes, it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration in durability caused by this.

For example, it is preferable to use a combination of a display mode that clearly shows the process of symbol change and a display mode that does not make the process of symbol change explicit. With such a configuration, the manner of variable display of symbols can be suitably diversified.

<Modification 15>
In order to make it difficult to understand the movement of the light guide section 532 when changing a special symbol, the operation of the light guide section 532 may be started at the same time as the side light 528 is turned off, or the operation of the light guide section 532 may be started after the side light 528 is turned off. The operation may be started. Further, the side light 528 may be turned on after the operation of the light guide section 532 is completed, or the side light 528 may be turned on at the same time as the operation of the light guide section 532 is completed.

<Modification 16>
When making a special change, the stop display period (temporary stop period) of the medium symbol may or may not match the final stop period (final stop period). For example, the pause period may be changed depending on the number of times the symbols are replaced in special changes. Specifically, it is also possible to set a difference so that each suspension period becomes longer in the following order: when replacement occurs 3 times < when replacement occurs 2 times < when replacement occurs once. In this case, if the temporary stop period is short, it is preferable to secure a period during which the pattern can be visually recognized by speeding up the timing of starting the supply of the spectral light. Specifically, the pause period when the symbols are swapped once is the same as the final pause period, and the pause period when the symbols are swapped twice is 0.2 seconds shorter than the final pause period; If the temporary stop period in the case of 3 times is 0.4 sec shorter than the final stop period, the restart of the light supply is preceded by the shortened period (the supply is restarted while the light guide section 532 is in operation) configuration).

<Modification 17>
A configuration in which light is supplied to the light emitting section 553 only during the period when the light emitting section 553 is located on the effective line, and when the light emitting section 553 is located off the effective line, the supply of light is stopped, thereby displaying the picture frame by frame ( (second special modification). In this case, when comparing Normal Reach, which supports slow fluctuation display, and Super Reach, which supports fast fluctuation display, the visibility of the symbol may be lower in the latter than the former, so in the latter case, the It is preferable to ensure visibility by supplying light even if it is slightly out of alignment. For example, the timing at which the light supply is stopped may be delayed from the former, or the timing at which the light supply is restarted may be made earlier than the former.

<Modification 18>
In the first embodiment, when making a special change, the light guide section 532 is configured not to stop (continue its operation) during the process, but the invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the light guide section 532 is temporarily stopped during the special change process.

<Modification 19>
In order to prevent the player from specifying the symbols to be replaced at the time of special change in advance, the former accounts for a larger proportion of the operating period of the light guiding section 532 and the waiting period from stopping the operation to restarting the light supply. , it is preferable to reduce the proportion occupied by the latter.

<Modification 20>
In the first embodiment, the frame 531 is made of synthetic resin, but the frame 531 is not limited to this. It is also possible for the frame 531 to be made of metal.

<Modification 21>
It is also possible to integrally mold the frame 531 and the light guide panels 555 to 557 shown in the first embodiment. With such a configuration, a fixing means for fixing the frame and the light guide panel and an accompanying structure (for example, a portion corresponding to the rim 536) are not required. This is preferable in order to improve the appearance of the variable display unit.

Note that each frame portion formed by dividing the frame 531 into three parts in the rotational direction corresponding to each of the light guide panels 555 to 557 is integrally molded with the corresponding light guide panel 555 to 557, and these three pieces are attached with fixing means, etc. It is also possible to construct a rotating body by using and fixing each other to each other. With such a divided structure, it is possible to prevent molding from becoming difficult.

<Second embodiment>
The variable display unit 500X shown in this embodiment is similar to the variable display unit 500 shown in the first embodiment in terms of the main structure for displaying symbols in a variable manner, but the symbols are displayed by the background display device 529X. The configuration is different from the variable display unit 500 in that the background can be changed depending on the game situation. The variable display unit 500X in this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view of the variable display unit 500X. Note that the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment are used and an "X" is added to the end of the reference numerals. The various configurations are the same as those shown in the embodiments.

As shown in FIG. 43, although there are differences in size etc., the background display device 529X shown in this embodiment has a basic configuration of the drum unit 523 shown in the first embodiment. The body 525, motor 526, position detection sensor 527, and side light 528 are the same. Specifically, the background display device 529X includes a plate-shaped base body 724X that constitutes an attachment portion to the housing 521, and a rotating body 725X held by the base body 724X.

The rotating body 725X is mounted on the base body 724X via a motor 726X. Specifically, a motor 726X is fixed to a base body 724X, and a rotating body 725X is fixed to an output shaft of the motor 726X. The output shaft of the motor 726X extends in the direction in which the drum units 723X are arranged side by side (left-right direction), and the rotating body 725X is configured to rotate around the axis of the output shaft. The rotational center axis of the rotating body 725X shown in this embodiment matches (is coaxial with) the rotational center axis CL of the rotating body 525X. In this way, by aligning the rotation center axes, the operating gap between the rotating bodies 525X and 725X is reduced. In addition, in the following description, the rotation center axis of the rotating body 725X is also described as "rotation center axis CL."

The motor 526 is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, and is configured to be driven and controlled by the notification/performance control device 140. The motor 726X is a stepping motor, and the rotational position of the rotating body 725X can be adjusted by the number of pulses of the output drive signal.

Note that a position detection sensor that detects the rotational position of the rotating body 725X is mounted on the base body 724X. The position detection sensor is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, and the notification/performance control device 140 grasps the rotational position of the rotating body 725X based on detection information (detection signal) from the position detection sensor. If a deviation occurs in the rotational position of the rotary body 725X due to the influence of an external force or the occurrence of a malfunction, the rotational position of the rotary body 725X is corrected (corrected) based on the grasped position information.

The rotating body 725X includes a circular frame 731X that constructs the skeleton of the rotating body 725X, a substantially cylindrical light guide section 732X (light guide panels 755X to 757X) that covers the outer peripheral part of the frame 731X, and a light guide section 732X that covers the outer peripheral part of the frame 731X. It is composed of decorative sheets 781X to 783X attached to the outer surface. The frame 731X includes a hub 735X as a center portion to which the output shaft of the motor 726X is fixed, an annular rim 736X as the outer peripheral portion to which the light guide portion 732X is fixed, and spokes 737X connecting the hub 735X and the rim 736X. It is made up of.

Specifically, the rim 736X has a pair of left and right annular portions centered on the rotation center axis CL, and an elongated connecting portion that connects the annular portions. The light guide portion 732X is superimposed on the connecting portion from the outside of the frame 731X and is fixed to the connecting portion using a fixing means (adhesive).

A contact portion 743X that contacts the light guide portion 532 from the side opposite to the base body 524 is formed on the rim 736X of the frame 731X. The contact portion 743X defines the left and right positions of the light guide portion 732X. An end of the light guide portion 732X on the side opposite to the contact portion 743X (on the base body 724X side) extends laterally from the rim 736X. The base body 724X is formed with an insertion portion 761X into which this extending portion (end portion) is inserted.

The insertion portion 761X has a groove shape open to the light guide portion 732X side, and the end of the light guide portion 732X is inserted into the insertion portion 761X through this open portion. A light emitting board 771X on which a plurality of light emitters 772X (more specifically, LEDs) are mounted is disposed on the opposite side of the light guide portion 732X across the bottom 762X of the insertion portion 761X. The light emitting board 771X is connected to the notification/effect control device 140, and the light emission control of the light emitting substrate 771X is performed by the notification/effect control device 140.

A plurality of through-holes are formed in the bottom of the insertion section 761X to match the respective light-emitting bodies 772X, and the light-emitting bodies 772X mounted on the light-emitting board 771X face the end surface 754X of the light guide section 732X through the through-holes. There is. The optical axis of each light emitting body 772X faces the same direction as the rotation center axis CL of the rotating body 725X, and the light from these light emitters 772X is irradiated onto the end surface 754X of the light guide portion 732X. Note that the base body 724X (including the insertion portion 761X) is made of a colored opaque synthetic resin material, and is provided with a light absorbing function. This suppresses light leakage from the insertion portion 761X.

The light from the light emitting body 772X is repeatedly reflected on the outer surface and the inner surface of the light guide section 732X, and heads toward the opposite end surface of the light guide section 732X. Here, a light emitting section made of fine irregularities is formed over almost the entire outer surface of the light guide section 732X. In the light guide section 532X for displaying a pattern, the formation range of the light emission part was limited to a part, whereas in the light guide part 732X, the formation range of the light emission part was not so limited. . That is, the light guide section 732X in this embodiment has a function as the illumination means (backlight 582) shown in the first embodiment.

The light supplied to the light guide section 732X reaches the light emitting section of the light guide section 732X and is emitted toward the front of the gaming machine, and when the light passes through any of the decorative sheets 781X to 783X, The decorative sheets 781X to 783X will emit bright light.

In this embodiment, the rotating body 525X that constitutes the drum and the rotating body 725X that constitutes the background display device 529 face each other, and the rotating body 725X is placed inside the rotating body 525X, which is one size larger than the rotating body 725X. Most are accommodated. Since both the rotating body 525X and the rotating body 725X are movable, a corresponding operating gap is required between them. However, if such a gap in operation becomes too large, there is a concern that the background display will not be performed well. One of the features of this embodiment is that it takes this situation into consideration and takes measures to reduce the operating gap.

As shown in FIG. 43, the base body 524X is formed with an engagement recess 591X that engages with the hub 535X of the frame 531X, and when the hub 535X engages with the engagement recess 591X, the base body 524X rotates. It is assembled to the frame 531X in a movable state. The motor 526X is disposed on the opposite side of the frame 531X (outside the drum unit) with the base body 524X in between, and is fixed to the frame 531X. With this configuration, the weight burden applied to the output shaft of the motor 526X is reduced, and vibration when rotating the rotating body 525X is suppressed.

On the other hand, the base body 724X is formed with an engagement recess 791X that engages with the hub 735X of the frame 731X, and when the hub 735X engages with the engagement recess 791X, the base body 724X is in a rotatable state. It is assembled into frame 731X. The motor 726X is disposed on the opposite side of the frame 731X (outside the drum unit) with the base body 724X in between, and is fixed to the frame 731X. With this configuration, the weight burden applied to the output shaft of the motor 726X is reduced, and vibration when rotating the rotating body 725X is suppressed.

With such a configuration, if the swinging of the rotating bodies 525X, 725X is suppressed, the operating gap between the rotating bodies 525X, 725X can be reduced when the rotating bodies 525X, 725X are arranged twice inside and outside. .

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 44(a), the rotating body 725X shown in this embodiment also combines a plurality of light guide panels 755X to 757X provided separately in the rotation direction, similarly to the rotating body 525X. As a result, a light guide portion 732X having a substantially cylindrical shape as a whole is constructed. The light guide panels 755X to 757X are made of transparent synthetic resin, and each has a plate shape with a constant thickness and a constant curvature. Further, the length dimension in the rotation direction and the width dimension in the rotation center axis CL direction of the rotating body 725X are also the same, and the rotary bodies 725X are formed to have the same appearance. Although the light guide panels 755X to 757X are each fixed to the rim 736X (specifically, the connecting portion) of the frame 731X using a transparent adhesive as a fixing means, the light guide panels 755X to 757X are not fixed to each other. It becomes.

As described above, in the configuration in which one end of the light guide section 732X is inserted into the insertion section 761X, in order to improve the light supply efficiency, etc., the inner surface of the insertion section 761X and the light guide section 732X are separated as much as possible. It is preferable to make them close together. However, when adopting such a structure, it is necessary to take into consideration the possibility that distortion may occur in the light guide panels 755X to 757X due to manufacturing errors or changes over time, and a certain amount of allowance must be added to the gap between them. Here, in this embodiment, by not fixing the light guide panels 755X to 757X to each other, it is possible to avoid distortion that may occur when the light guide panels 755X to 757X are fixed. This makes it possible to reduce the margin as much as possible.

Note that when the rotating body 725X is constructed using the light guide section 732X, the expressive power of the variable display unit can be improved, but on the other hand, the weight of the rotating body 725X tends to increase. There is a concern that this may be a factor in reducing the responsiveness when rotating/stopping the rotating body 725X. In this regard, in the present embodiment, overlapping in the thickness direction of the light guide panels 755X to 757X is avoided. This suppresses an increase in the weight of the light guide section 732X and suppresses a decrease in responsiveness.

In the boundary region BP2 between the light guide panels 755X to 757X, adjacent light guide panels 755X to 757X face each other with a gap in between. This is a contrivance to avoid strong interference between the light guide panels 755X to 757X at the boundary portion BP2 when the light guide panels 755X to 757X vary in size due to manufacturing errors or the like. By avoiding strong interference between the light guide panels 755X to 757X, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of deformation such as the above distortion in the light guide panels 755X to 757X.

Note that the insertion portion 761X shown in this embodiment also extends along a portion of the light guide portion 732X that projects forward from the opening 522 of the housing 521 (see FIG. 13). The open portions on both the upper and lower sides of the insertion portion 761X are expanded so that the width gradually increases toward the ends. This prevents the boundary portion BP2 from getting caught when passing through the open portion. Incidentally, when the opening is expanded, light leakage from the side light 728X is likely to occur. On the other hand, in this embodiment, both of the open portions are formed to face rearward, specifically, to face diagonally rearward. This is a device to make it difficult for the light to enter the player's eyes when the light leaks from the opening.

Decorative sheets 781X to 783X are attached to light guide panels 755X to 757X, respectively. The decorative sheets 781X to 783X have the same size and light transmittance as the outer surface portions of the light guide panels 755X to 757X, but have different patterns drawn on them. Specifically, the decorative sheet 781X attached to the light guide panel 755X has a pattern imitating a sandy beach in the daytime, and the decorative sheet 782X attached to the light guide panel 756X has a pattern imitating a sandy beach in the evening. A pattern is given to the decorative sheet 783X attached to the light guide panel 757X, and a pattern imitating a sandy beach at night is given.

By rotating the rotating body 725X, the background that is visible from the front of the gaming machine changes. Here, with reference to FIG. 44(b), supplementary explanation will be given regarding the relationship between the gaming state and the background. In the first normal game state where the support mode is the low frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, a sandy beach in the daytime is displayed as the background. In the second normal game state where the support mode is the high frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, and in the third normal game state where the support mode is the high frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the above background is the evening scene. A sandy beach is displayed. In the special game state (opening/closing execution mode) to which the game shifts when a jackpot result is achieved, a sandy beach at night is displayed as the background. In this way, by switching the display of the background according to the gaming status, the gaming status is suggested to the player.

In this embodiment, a background and a pattern are displayed using a rotating body with double inner and outer rotation. In such a configuration, it becomes difficult to incorporate the illumination means into the inner rotating body in order to ensure a power supply path to the illumination means. In this respect, the above problem is suitably solved by constructing the rotating body 725X using the light guide section 732X that functions as an illumination means.

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment, the motor 526X for the rotating body 525X and the motor 726X for the rotating body 725X are configured to protrude to the outside of the drum unit. In the case of such a configuration, the gap between the drum units arranged horizontally on the left and right becomes large, and the distance between each symbol row becomes large. Modifications that take such circumstances into consideration will be described below.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 45, the hubs 535Y, 735Y of the frames 531Y, 731Y are formed to convex inward of the drum unit, and the base body 524Y is , 724Y, the engaging convex portions 591Y, 791Y are configured to engage with each other. By making the engaging projections 591Y, 791Y hollow and arranging (accommodating) the motors 526Y, 726Y in the hollow portions, the protrusion of the motors 526Y, 726Y can be reduced. Thereby, the above-mentioned gap can be made small and separation of each symbol row can be suppressed.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment, the light guide section 732X is used as illumination means for the decorative sheets 781X to 783X, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The light guide portion 732X may also be configured to display a predetermined pattern in the same way as the light guide portion 532X. For example, the light emitting portion of the light guide portion 732X may be formed so as to be able to display a pattern similar to the pattern described on the decorative sheets 781X to 783X. In such a configuration, it is not preferable that the back side becomes visible through the light guide portion 732X. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a plain sheet material or the like on the inner surface of the light guide portion 732X to restrict the inner side from being visible.

<Modification 3>
In the second embodiment, the decorative sheets 781X to 783X are individually attached to each of the light guide panels 755X to 757X, but one decorative sheet is attached so as to straddle the three light guide panels 755X to 757X. It is also possible to configure the device to be attached. With such a configuration, by covering the boundary area BP2 between the light guide panels 755X to 757X, the boundary area BP2 can be made less noticeable.

<Modification 4>
In the second embodiment, the configuration is such that four gaming states are suggested by three backgrounds, but it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of backgrounds and the number of gaming states match.

<Modification 5>
It is also possible to apply the configurations shown in each modification of the first embodiment to the variable display unit shown in this embodiment.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the basic structure of the variable display unit is the same as that in the second embodiment, but the variable display unit is configured to execute different display effects for each game state. The configuration is different from the second embodiment. The variable display unit in this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of the variable display unit.

Each drum unit 723Z constituting the variable display unit includes a first display unit consisting of a base body 524Z, a rotating body 525Z, a motor 526Z, a side light 528Z, etc.; It is broadly divided into a second display unit. The first display unit has a function of notifying the lottery result based on the ball entering the upper operating port 83a (see Fig. 6), and if the lottery results in a jackpot with a probability of winning, the above-mentioned valid line will be displayed. A symbol combination corresponding to a guaranteed variable jackpot result is stopped and displayed on at least one of L1 to L5, and when a normal jackpot result is obtained in the lottery, a symbol combination corresponding to a normal jackpot result is displayed on at least one of active lines L1 to L5. The structure is such that the symbol combinations are stopped and displayed. Note that the base body 524Z, rotary body 525Z, motor 526Z, and side light 528Z are the same as the base body 524Y, rotary body 525Y, motor 526Y, and side light 528Y shown in the second embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. The explanation will be omitted.

The rotating body 725Z has a light guide section 732Z and a frame 731Z on which the light guide section 732Z is mounted, and the light guide section 732Z is a combination of a plurality of light guide panels 755Z to 758Z. The configuration is the same as that of the light guide section 732Y shown in the second embodiment. However, whereas decorative sheets 781Y to 783Y are attached to the outer surface of the light guide section 732Y, in the light guide section 732Z shown in this embodiment, sheet materials 781Z to 783Z are attached to the inner surface of the light guide section 732Z. This embodiment differs from the second embodiment in that a is attached.

Since the sheet materials 781Z to 783Z are not provided with light transmittance, the inner side thereof cannot be viewed through the sheet materials 781Z to 783Z. All of the sheet materials 781Z to 783Z have a plain color and do not have a pattern such as a background, that is, information that can serve as a foothold for specifying the rotational position of the rotating body 725Z. On the other hand, regarding the light emitting part 753Z (see FIG. 47) formed on the outer surface part 751Z of the light guide part 732Z, light is emitted from the light emitting part 753Z similarly to the light guide part 532Z, so that a predetermined amount of light is emitted from the light emitting part 753Z. The configuration is such that the symbols etc. are displayed. That is, while the light guide section 732Y shown in the second embodiment functions as an illumination means, the light guide section 732Z shown in the present embodiment functions as a pattern display means. In addition, in a situation where light is not emitted from the light emitting part 753Z, the above-mentioned pattern etc. are not displayed, and it becomes substantially impossible or difficult to identify the light emitting part 753Z visually.

Here, with reference to FIG. 47, the light emitting part 753Z formed in the light guide part 732Z, that is, the pattern etc. displayed by the light emitting part 753Z will be described. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 47 shows a state in which each light emitting section 753Z emits light and a pattern or the like is displayed.

A picture is written on the light guide panel 755Z constituting the light guide section 732Z so as to span the three left and right light guide panels 755Z. Specifically, a pattern representing a sandy beach is described. By supplying light from the side light 728Z with the light guide panel 755Z facing forward of the game machine, the background of the sandy beach is displayed.

On the light guide panels 756Z to 757Z, a "boy" symbol, a "bell" symbol, a "replay" symbol, a "7" symbol, and a "BAR" symbol are arranged in a predetermined order. Although not shown, a plurality of active lines are set for the second display unit as well as for the first display unit, and in the case of a 16R compatible jackpot result, at least one of the active lines is set. The symbol combination of "7", "7", "7" will be stopped and displayed, and if the result is a regular jackpot corresponding to 4R, the symbol combination of "7", "7", and "BAR" will be stopped and displayed, and if the result is a miss. In this case, symbol combinations other than these symbol combinations are stopped and displayed (see FIG. 48).

In addition, in this embodiment, depending on the game situation, the light guide panel 755Z will switch between displaying the background of the sandy beach and the light guide panels 756Z to 757Z displaying the symbols. The background and the pattern are never stopped and displayed in the variable display area at the same time.

The valid lines in the second display unit are configured to match the valid lines L1 to L5 (valid lines of the first display unit) shown in FIG. 20 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. By overlapping the words before and after the words, we aim to make it easier for players to understand. Hereinafter, the effective lines of the second display unit will also be referred to as effective lines L1 to L5.

In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the game times related to the upper operation port 83a and the game times related to the lower operation port 83b are executed in a predetermined order, and the game times do not overlap. However, this embodiment is different in that the game round related to the upper operating port 83a and the game round related to the lower operating port 83b are played in parallel. Below, various processes executed by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 and the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140 to realize such a flow of the game will be explained, focusing on the differences from the second embodiment. do. First, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53, the game time control process executed by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 in this embodiment will be described.

(Game time control processing)
In the gaming cycle control process in this embodiment, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag (opening/closing execution state information) is stored (stored) in the opening/closing execution mode flag storage area (opening/closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. do. The opening/closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode in a gaming state transition process to be described later, and is cleared when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the same gaming state transition process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the main game round control process is immediately terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1302 to control the game times for the winnings in the upper actuation port 83a (game times control process corresponding to the upper actuation port, control process for the upper actuation port) and after executing the game round control process for the game round related to winning to the lower operating opening 83b (lower operating opening corresponding game round control process, lower operating opening control process) in step S1303, the main game round is executed. Control processing ends. These two control processes have the same basic flow. Hereinafter, the control process for the upper operating port will be explained first with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51, and then, with reference to FIGS. Control processing will be explained.

(Control processing for upper operating port)
As shown in FIG. 50, in the control process for the upper operating port, first in step S1401, it is determined whether or not a game round related to the upper operating port 83a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the upper operation opening display section of the main display unit 87 is in the variable display to fixed display, that is, whether one game of the game is being executed. This determination is made when the game run flag (game run information) for the upper operating opening is stored (stored) in the game run flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether the The game round flag for the upper operating port is stored when variable display is started on the upper operating port display section, and is erased when the symbol is stopped and displayed and the fixed display ends.

If the game is not in progress, a negative determination is made in step S1401, and the process advances to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether or not a game relating to the lower operating port 83b is being played. Specifically, it is determined whether the display section for the lower operation opening of the main display unit 87 is in the variable display to fixed display, that is, whether one game of the game is being executed. This determination is made when the game run flag (variable display information) for the lower operation opening is stored (stored) in the game run flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether the The game round flag for the lower operating port is stored when a variable display is started on the display section for the lower operating port, and the fixed display ends after the symbols, etc. corresponding to the lottery result (game result) are stopped and displayed. will be deleted if

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, the process advances to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether the game round related to the lower operating port 83b corresponds to a jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1403, the main operating port control process is immediately terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1403 or step S1402, the process advances to step S1404.

In step S1404, the total number of reservations storage area of the reservation ball storage area 632 is referred to, and the number of reservations stored for the upper operation port CRN (more specifically, the number of reservations stored for the upper operation port 83a) is the number of reservation information stored on hold. It is determined whether or not the number) is "0". If the upper operation mouth reserved storage number CRN is "0", the game time control process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the upper operating port retention memory number CRN is not "0", the process advances to step S1405. In step S1405, data setting processing is performed.

In the data setting process for the upper operating port 83a, the upper operating port retention memory number CRN is first decremented by 1. After that, the data stored in the first area of the upper operating port holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area AE1, and the processing of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the upper operating port holding area Ra is executed. .

This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, in which the data in the first area is cleared, and the data is shifted from the second area to the first area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. Then, one LED that is lit in the reservation number display section for the upper operation port is turned off. In this light extinguishing process, contrary to the lighting process that is executed when reservation information is added, the LEDs of the reservation number display section for the upper operating port are turned off in order from the right side.

After performing the data setting process detailed above, in step S1406, a variation start process for the upper operating port is performed to start the variable display of the symbol on the upper operating port display section and the variable display of the symbol on the variable display unit. After executing (upper operating mouth variation start process), the present game time control process is ended. Here, with reference to FIG. 51, the upper operating port variation start process of step S1406 will be described.

(Fluctuation start processing for upper operating port)
In the upper operating port variation start process, first, in step S1501, a propriety determination process is executed. In the win/fail determination process, the win/fail table for the upper operating port is referred to, and the information for the win/fail determination among the information stored in the first execution area, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 is determined as the jackpot numerical information described above. Determine whether it matches. If the determination result in step S1501 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1502 and the process proceeds to step S1503.

In step S1503, type determination processing is executed. In the type determination process, information for type determination among the information stored in the first execution area, that is, numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Also, by referring to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, the information for type determination grasped above is determined to be an information group corresponding to the normal jackpot result and an information group corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result. Identify which one is included.

In step S1504, a stop result setting process for jackpot results is executed. Specifically, the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (display section for upper operating port) of the main display unit 87 in the game round is selected from the stop result table for jackpot results stored in advance in the ROM 603. The identified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display section D are set in this stop result table for jackpot results, and in step S1504, information indicating the symbols according to the jackpot results is stored in the RAM 604. Further, in step S1504, information for the MPU 602 to specify whether the current game result is a normal jackpot result or a variable probability jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, if it is a normal jackpot result, a normal jackpot flag is stored, and if it is a probability variable jackpot result, a probability variable jackpot flag is stored.

After executing the setting process in step S1504, the process advances to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether the game round related to the lower operating port 83b is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, the process advances to step S1506. In step S1506, the forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. When the game round (fluctuating display of symbols) related to the lower operating port 83b is being executed, the gaming round (fluctuating display of symbols) related to the lower operating port 83b is forcibly stopped midway based on this forced termination flag. It will be terminated. More specifically, if the game round associated with the upper operating port 83a corresponds to a jackpot result, and the gaming round associated with the lower operating port 83b may be executed beyond the timing at which the confirmation display for that gaming round is performed. In this case, the game times related to the lower operating port 83b are shortened, and the gaming times related to the lower operating port 83b end as well as the end of the gaming times related to the upper operating port 83a. In such a case, the picture that is stopped and displayed in the game round related to the lower operating port 83b corresponds to the winning result.

Returning to the explanation of step S1502, if the determination result in step S1501 is a negative result, a negative determination is made in step S1502, and the process advances to step S1507. In step S1507, a stop result setting process for a deviation result is executed.

Specifically, the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (display section for upper operation opening) of the main display unit 87 in the game round related to the start of the current variation is determined based on the winning result stored in advance in the ROM 603. The specified information is stored in the RAM 604.

After executing the processing in steps S1506 and S1507, or if a negative determination is made in step S1505, the process advances to step S1508. In step S1508, a variable display time (display continuation time) setting process is executed.

After executing the variable display time setting process in step S1508, a variable start command and a type command are set in step S1509. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation display time. Here, as mentioned above, the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence is different from the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for reach occurrence, so Even if the start command does not include information on whether a reach has occurred, the notification/effect control device 140, which is a sub-side control device, can identify the presence or absence of a reach from the information on the variable display time. . In this respect, it can be said that the fluctuation start command includes information indicating whether or not a reach has occurred. Note that the fluctuation start command may include information directly indicating whether or not a reach has occurred.

After executing the setting process in step S1509, the process proceeds to step S1510, and after starting variable display on the upper operating port display section in the main display unit 87, the main operating port variation start process ends. In the process of step S1510, the game round flag for the upper operation opening is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Thereby, in subsequent processing, it becomes possible to specify that the game round (for example, variable display) related to the upper operating port 83a is being executed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 50 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, that is, if it is determined that the game round related to the upper operating port 83a is in progress, the process advances to step S1407. In step S1407, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a game round related to the lower operating port 83b and corresponding to a jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S1407, the process advances to step S1408.

In step S1408, it is determined whether or not the timing has elapsed for the variable display time set in step S1508. If a negative determination is made in step S1408, the process for variable display is executed in step S1409, and then the control process for the main operating port is ended. In the process for variable display in step S1409, the pattern is displayed in a variable manner by performing a process of turning on/off the various LEDs constituting the upper operating port display section.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1408, the process advances to step S1411. In step S1411, variation end processing is executed. In the variation end process, display control is performed on the main display unit 87 so that the pattern is stopped and displayed on the upper operating port display section in a predetermined manner. That is, for example, a final display of a symbol corresponding to a lottery result (game result) is executed. Note that the game round flag for the upper operating port stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 is erased when the confirmation display ends.

After setting the variation end command in the subsequent step S1412, the present game round control process is ended. The variation end command set in step S1412 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 28). The notification/performance control device 140 executes processing for ending the production in that game round based on receiving the variation end command. Specifically, by receiving the variation end command, the symbol combination corresponding to the game result of the game round is displayed as a final display (final stop display) on the first display unit of the variable display unit. It should be noted that a structure may be adopted in which the notification/performance control device 140 independently ends the performance of the game cycle without transmitting the variation end command.

After executing the process of step S1412, the process advances to step S1413, and a process of updating the number of games counter is executed. The number of games counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the high frequency support mode is continued in the second normal game state, and is decremented by "1" each time a game is played. If the number of games counter reaches "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S1414 and the process proceeds to step S1415. In step S1415, the high frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 604 is deleted. After setting a high-frequency support mode termination command in the subsequent step S1416, the main operating port control process is terminated. The high frequency support mode end command is sent to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 28). The notification/effect control device 140 switches the display effect mode based on receiving this command.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1407, a stop pattern rewriting process is executed in step S1410, and after each process in steps S1411 to S1416 described above is executed, the main operating port control process is ended. In the process of rewriting the stop result, the stop result is rewritten so that the picture corresponding to the missed result is stopped and displayed.

Next, the lower operating port control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53.

(Control processing for lower operating port)
As shown in FIG. 19, in the lower operating port control process, first in step S1601, it is determined whether or not a game round related to the lower operating port 83b is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the display section for the lower operation opening of the main display unit 87 is in the variable display to fixed display, that is, whether one game of the game is being executed. This determination is made when the game run flag (variable display information) for the lower operation opening is stored (stored) in the game run flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether the The game round flag for the lower operating port is stored when variable display is started on the lower operating port display section, and is erased when the symbol is stopped and displayed and the fixed display ends.

If the game is not in progress, a negative determination is made in step S1601 and the process advances to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether or not a game relating to the upper operating port 83a is being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the upper operation opening display section of the main display unit 87 is in the variable display to fixed display, that is, whether one game of the game is being executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, the process advances to step S1603. In step S1603, it is determined whether the game round associated with the upper operating port 83a corresponds to a jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, the present lower operating port control process is immediately terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1603, or if a negative determination is made in step S1602, the process advances to step S1604. In step S1604, the total number of reservations storage area of the reservation ball storage area 632 is referred to, and the number of reservations stored for the lower operation port CRN (more specifically, the number of reservations stored for the lower operation port 83b) is the number of reservation information stored on hold. It is determined whether or not the number) is "0". If the number of reserved memories CRN for the lower operation opening is "0", the game round control process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the lower operating port retention memory number CRN is not "0", the process advances to step S1605. In step S1605, data setting processing is performed.

In the data setting process for the lower operating port 83b, first, the lower operating port reserved memory number CRN is decremented by 1. After that, the data stored in the first area of the lower operation opening holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area, and the data stored in the storage area of the lower operation opening holding area Rb is shifted.

This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, in which the data in the first area is cleared, and the data is shifted from the second area to the first area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. Then, one LED that is lit in the reservation number display section for the lower operation port is turned off. In this lights-out process, contrary to the lighting process executed when the hold information is added, the LEDs of the hold lamp section for the lower operation port are turned off in order from the right side.

After performing the data setting process detailed above, in step S1606, the variable display of the symbol on the main display unit 87 (main display section D) and the variable display of the symbol on the variable display unit (more specifically, the second display unit) are performed. After executing the variation start process for the lower operation opening (variation start process for the lower operation opening) for starting, the present game time control process is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 53, the lower operation opening variation start process of step S1606 will be described.

(Fluctuation start processing for lower operating port)
In the lower operating port variation start process, first, in step S1701, a propriety determination process is executed. In the win/fail determination process, the win/fail table for the lower operating port is referred to, and the information for the win/fail determination among the various information stored in the second execution area, that is, the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 is determined as the jackpot numerical information described above. Determine whether it matches. If the determination result in step S1701 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S1702 and the process proceeds to step S1703.

In step S1703, type determination processing is executed. In the type determination process, information for type determination among various information stored in the second execution area, that is, numerical information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2 and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603. With reference to the above, it is specified whether the information for type determination grasped above is included in the information group corresponding to the normal jackpot result or the information group corresponding to the probability variable jackpot result.

In step S1704, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (display section for the lower operation opening) of the main display unit 87 in the game round is selected from the stop result table for jackpot results stored in advance in the ROM 603. The identified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display section D are set in this stop result table for the jackpot result, and in step S1704, information indicating a symbol according to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. Further, in step S1704, information for the MPU 602 to specify whether the current game result is a normal jackpot result or a variable probability jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, if it is a normal jackpot result, a normal jackpot flag is stored, and if it is a probability variable jackpot result, a probability variable jackpot flag is stored.

After executing the setting process in step S1704, the process advances to step S1705. In step S1705, it is determined whether the game round related to the upper operating port 83a is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1705, the process advances to step S1706. In step S1706, the forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. When the game round (fluctuating display of symbols) related to the upper operating port 83a is being executed, the gaming round (fluctuating display of symbols) relating to the upper operating port 83a is forcibly stopped midway based on this forced termination flag. It will be terminated. More specifically, if the game round associated with the lower operating port 83b corresponds to a jackpot result, and the game round associated with the upper operating port 83a (corresponding to a winning result) exceeds the timing at which the confirmation display for that gaming round is performed, ) can be executed, the game cycle related to the upper operating port 83a is shortened, and the gaming cycle related to the upper operating port 83a ends at the same time as the gaming cycle related to the lower operating port 83b ends. In such a case, the picture that is stopped and displayed in the game round related to the upper operating port 83a corresponds to the winning result.

Returning to the explanation of step S1702, if the determination result in step S1701 is a negative result, a negative determination is made in step S702 and the process proceeds to step S1707.

In step S1707, a stop result setting process for a deviation result is executed. Specifically, the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (display section for the lower operation opening) of the main display unit 87 in the game round related to the start of the current variation is determined based on the winning result stored in the ROM 603 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 604.

After executing the process in step S1706 or step S1707, or if a negative determination is made in step S1705, the process advances to step S1708. In step S1708, a variable display time (display continuation time) setting process is executed.

After executing the variable display time setting process in step S1708, a variable start command and a type command are set in step S1709. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation display time. Here, as mentioned above, the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence is different from the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for reach occurrence, so Even if the start command does not include information on whether a reach has occurred, the notification/effect control device 140, which is a sub-side control device, can identify the presence or absence of a reach from the information on the variable display time. . In this respect, it can be said that the fluctuation start command includes information indicating whether or not a reach has occurred. Note that the fluctuation start command may include information directly indicating whether or not a reach has occurred.

After executing the setting process in step S1709, the process proceeds to step S1710, and after starting variable display on the lower operating port display section in the main display unit 87, the present lower operating port variation start process is ended. In the process of step S1710, the game round flag for the lower operation opening is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Thereby, in subsequent processing, it becomes possible to specify that the game round (for example, variable display) related to the lower operating port 83b is being executed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 52 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, that is, if it is determined that the game round related to the lower operating port 83b is in progress, the process advances to step S1608. In step S1608, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a game round related to the upper operating port 83a and corresponding to a jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S1608, the process advances to step S1609.

In step S1609, it is determined whether or not the timing has elapsed for the variable display time. If a negative determination is made in step S1609, the process for variable display is executed in step S1610, and then the control process for the lower operating port ends. In the process for variable display in step S1610, the pattern is displayed in a variable manner by performing a process of turning on/off the various LEDs constituting the lower operating port display section.

If stable is determined in step S1609, the process advances to step S1612. In step S1612, variation end processing is executed. In the variation end process, display control of the main display unit 87 is performed so that the pattern is stopped and displayed on the lower operating port display section in a predetermined manner.

In the following step S1613, a variation end command is set. The variation end command set in step S1613 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 28). The notification/performance control device 140 executes processing for ending the production in that game round based on receiving the variation end command. In addition, by receiving the variation end command, the notification/performance control device 140 displays the symbol combination corresponding to the game result of the game round on the second display unit of the variable display unit 500Z (final stop display). let It should be noted that a structure may be adopted in which the notification/performance control device 140 independently ends the performance of the game cycle without transmitting the variation end command.

After executing the process of step S1613, the process advances to step S1614, and a process of updating the number of games counter is executed. The number of games counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the high frequency support mode is continued in the second normal game state, and is decremented by "1" each time a game is played. If the number of games counter reaches "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S1615 and the process advances to step S1616. In step S1616, the high frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 604 is deleted. After setting a high-frequency support mode end command in the subsequent step S1617, this lower operating port control process ends. The high frequency support mode end command is sent to the notification/effect control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (FIG. 28). The notification/effect control device 140 switches the display effect mode based on receiving this command.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1608, a stop pattern rewriting process is executed in step S1611, and after each process in steps S1612 to S1617 is executed, the main operating port control process is ended. In the process of rewriting the stop result, the stop result is rewritten so that the picture corresponding to the missed result is stopped and displayed.

As described in detail above, in this embodiment, the game round related to the upper operating port 83a and the game round related to the lower operating port 83b are configured to proceed at the same time. However, there is a difference in the variable display time set for each game round depending on the game state, and the main object of the game progress changes depending on the game state. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 54, supplementary explanation will be given regarding the relationship between the gaming state and the variable display time.

In the first normal game state where the support mode is the low frequency support mode and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the variable display time set for the game round executed based on the ball entering the upper operating port 83a is 1 to It will be 20 seconds. In particular, for game rounds corresponding to losing results, a difference is provided so that the larger the number of reservations related to the upper operating port 83a, the shorter the variable display time is, so that the game progresses quickly while the remaining number of changes to the upper operating port 83a becomes shorter. This makes it possible to reduce the chances that pending information is not obtained even though a ball has entered the ball. On the other hand, the variable display time set in each game round executed based on the ball entering the lower operating port 83b is uniformly 600 seconds. In other words, regardless of whether the lottery result is a jackpot result or a miss result, the variable display time is 600 seconds. In this way, in the first normal game state, the game round related to the upper operating port 83a progresses preferentially.

On the other hand, in the second normal game state where the support mode is a high frequency support mode and the lottery mode is a high probability mode, and in the third normal game state where the support mode is a high frequency support mode and the lottery mode is a low probability mode. , the relationship between the set variable display times is opposite to that in the first normal game state. In other words, the variable display time set for each game round executed based on the ball entering the upper operating port 83a is uniformly 600 seconds. In other words, regardless of whether the lottery result is a jackpot result or a miss result, the variable display time is 600 seconds. On the other hand, the variable display time set in the game round executed based on the ball entering the lower operation port 83b is 1 to 10 seconds. In particular, for game rounds corresponding to losing results, a difference is provided so that the larger the number of reservations related to the lower operating port 83b, the shorter the variable display time is, so that while the game progresses quickly, the number of changes to the lower operating port 83b This makes it possible to reduce the chances that pending information is not obtained even though a ball has entered the ball. In this way, in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the game round related to the lower operating port 83b proceeds preferentially.

In this embodiment, the lottery result is notified by the symbol displayed by the first display unit, and the lottery result is notified by the symbol displayed by the second display unit, and the lottery result is notified by the symbol displayed by the second display unit. The configuration is such that the side lights of each display unit are switched on/off in accordance with the switching of the main game progress target. Hereinafter, the relationship between the gaming state and the light emission mode will be explained with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

In the first normal game state in which the game progresses mainly based on the ball entering the upper operating port 83a, the side light 528Z of the first display unit and the side light 728Z of the second display unit are basically maintained in a lit state. (See Figure 55). In the first normal game state, the rotating body 725Z of the second display unit is maintained in a state where the background of the sandy beach mentioned above faces the front of the gaming machine, and the pattern corresponding to the upper operating port 83a is displayed in front of the background of the sandy beach. Displayed variably. That is, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the pattern on the first display unit and the background on the second display unit can be visually recognized.

On the other hand, in the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state in which the game progresses mainly based on the ball entering the lower operating port 83b, the side light 528Z of the first display unit is basically turned off. The side light 728Z of the second display unit is maintained in a lit state (see FIG. 55). In these gaming states, with some exceptions, the symbols on the first display unit are not displayed, so that the symbols displayed on the second display unit are not obstructed from being visible. That is, basically, as shown in FIG. 56(b), only the pattern on the second display unit becomes visible.

In the special gaming state, the symbol combination that triggered the transition to the special gaming state continues to be displayed. In other words, when a symbol combination that corresponds to a jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the first display unit, the background is hidden and the symbol combination continues to be displayed, and the second display unit displays a symbol combination that corresponds to a jackpot result. When a symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the display of the symbol combination is continued.

Here, in the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140, a control process for the game circulation is executed as part of the regular process. The control processing for the game round includes display processing for the upper working opening corresponding to the playing round based on the ball entering the upper working opening 83a, and display processing for the lower working opening corresponding to the playing round based on the ball entering the lower working opening 83b. including display processing. The display process for the upper operating port will be described below with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59.

In addition, in the first normal gaming state, the side light 528Z for the first display unit is basically kept in the lit state and the side light 728Z for the second display unit is kept in the lit state, and in the second normal gaming state and the third normal In the gaming state, the side light 528Z for the first display unit is basically kept in an off state and the side light 728Z for the second display unit is kept in a lighted state.

(Display processing for upper operating port)
As shown in FIG. 57, in the upper operating port control process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the first normal game state is in progress. If a positive determination is made in step S1801, main control processing for the upper operating port is executed in step S1802, and if a negative determination is made in step S1801, special control processing for the upper operating port is executed in step S1803. do.

(Main control processing for upper operating port)
As shown in FIG. 58, in the main control process for the upper operating port, first, in step S1901, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the lower operating port 83b is displayed as determined (final stop display). Determine whether it exists or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the process advances to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether or not a game relating to the upper operating port 83a is being played. If a negative determination is made in step S1902, the process advances to step S1903. In step S1903, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the game round related to the upper operating port 83a. If a negative determination is made in step S1903, the main operation port main processing is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1903, the process advances to step S1904.

In step S1904, drive control start processing for the first display unit is executed. As a result, a drive signal is output to each motor 526Z constituting the first display unit, and each rotating body 525Z starts operating. In the following step S1905, light emission control processing for the side lights 528 of the first display unit is executed. As a result, if power is already being supplied to the sidelights 528, the power supply is continued, and if some or all of the power is not being supplied to the sidelights 528, those sidelights 528 The power supply to will begin.

Returning to the explanation of step S1902, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, that is, if the game relating to the upper operating port 83a is in progress, the process advances to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to confirm and display the symbol combination in the game round related to the upper operating port 83a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1906, the process advances to step S1907.

In step S1907, stop control processing for the first display unit is executed. As a result, all the rotating bodies 525Z constituting the first display unit stop, and the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1906, the process advances to step S1908 and executes light emission/drive control processing for when the first display unit is changing. As a result, the left symbol column and the right symbol column are stopped and displayed, and the display shifts to the ready-to-reach display, or the middle symbol column is specially changed. The specific flow of display effects in this case is the same as in the first embodiment.

Returning to the explanation of step S1901, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, that is, if it is the timing to definitively display the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the lower operating port 83b, the process proceeds to step S1909. move on. In step S1909, a light-off control process is executed to turn off all the side lights 528Z for the first display unit. In other words, when the game round related to the lower operating port 83b progresses during the first normal game state and the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the second display unit, the symbol combination on the first display unit is hidden, so that the symbol combinations displayed by the second display unit behind the player are not obstructed from being visible.

After that, in step S1910, forced stop control processing is executed to stop and display each rotating body 525Z of the first display unit. When each rotating body 525Z is forcibly stopped, the combination of light emitting parts 553Z corresponding to the out-of-position result is stopped in the variable display area, but the supply of light from the side light 528Z is stopped in step S1909. Therefore, these light emitting parts 553Z do not emit light.

(Special control treatment for upper operating port)
Next, a special control process for the upper operating port that is executed when the game is in the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state in which the game progresses based on the ball entering the lower operating opening 83b will be explained. As shown in FIG. 59, in the special control process for the upper operating port, first, in step S2001, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the lower operating port 83b is displayed as confirmed (final stop display). Determine whether it exists or not. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the process advances to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether or not a game relating to the upper operating port 83a is being played. If a negative determination is made in step S2002, the process advances to step S2003. In step S2003, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the game round related to the upper operating port 83a. If a negative determination is made in step S2003, the special control process for the main operating port is immediately terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, a drive control start process for the first display unit is executed in step S2004, and then the special control process for the main operating port is ended. Through the first display unit drive control start process, output of drive signals to each motor 526Z for the first display unit is started, and each rotating body 525Z starts operating. However, since the side light 528 for the first display unit is maintained in an off state, the symbols on the first display unit remain hidden. In other words, each rotating body 525Z idles.

Returning to the explanation of step S2002, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2002, the process advances to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination is being confirmed and displayed in the game round related to the upper operating port 83a. If a negative determination is made in step S2005, the process advances to step S2006.

In step S2006, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to display the symbol combination as confirmed (final stop display) in the game round related to the upper operating port 83a. If a negative determination is made in step S2006, a drive control process for the first display unit during fluctuation is executed in step S2010. As a result, rotation/stopping of each rotating body 525 is controlled. However, also in this case, since the side light 528 for the first display unit is off, the symbol remains not displayed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2006, the process advances to step S2007. In step S2007, a stop control process for the first display unit is executed. If the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the light emitting part 553Z for the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped on any of the valid lines L1 to L5, and the current game round is a miss result. If they match, the light emitting part 553Z for the symbol combination corresponding to the missed result is stopped at the valid lines L1 to L5.

In the following step S2008, it is determined whether or not the current game result corresponds to the jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S2008, the special control process for the main operating port is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2008, the process advances to step S2009, and a light emission control process for the side light 528Z for the first display unit is executed. As a result, light is supplied from the side light 528Z only to the light emitting part 553Z on the line where the jackpot symbol combination is formed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result suddenly appears on the first display unit.

Returning to the explanation of step S2005, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, that is, if the final display is in progress, the process advances to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether the fixed display period has elapsed and it is time to end the fixed display. If a negative determination is made in step S2011, the special control process for the main operating port is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2011, the process advances to step S2012. In step S2012, it is determined whether or not the current game result is a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, the process advances to step S2013 and a light emission extension control process is executed to extend the light emission of the side light 528 of the first display unit until the special game state ends.

As detailed above, if a jackpot result is achieved in the game round related to the upper operating port 83a during the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state, only that result is displayed on the first display unit. This display will continue until the end of the special gaming state. On the other hand, if a game round related to the upper operating port 83a results in a failure during the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the rotating body 525Z is stopped according to the result as well. However, the symbol combination corresponding to the missed result remains hidden.

(Display processing for lower operating port)
Next, the control process for the lower operating port will be explained with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. As shown in FIG. 60, in the lower operating port control process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether the second normal gaming state or the third normal gaming state is in progress. If a positive determination is made in step S2101, main control processing for the lower operating port is executed in step S2102, and if a negative determination is made in step S2101, special control processing for the lower operating port is executed in step S2103. do.

(Main control processing for lower operating port)
As shown in FIG. 61, in the main control process for the lower operating port, first, in step S2201, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the upper operating port 83a is displayed as determined (final stop display). Determine whether it exists or not. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process advances to step S2202.

In step S2202, it is determined whether or not a game relating to the lower operating port 83b is being played. If a negative determination is made in step S2202, the process advances to step S2203. In step S2203, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the game round related to the lower operating port 83b. If a negative determination is made in step S2203, the main processing for the lower operating port is directly terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process advances to step S2204.

In step S2204, drive control start processing for the second display unit is executed. As a result, a drive signal is output to each motor 726Z constituting the second display unit, and each rotating body 725Z starts operating. As mentioned above, in the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state, the side light 728Z of the second display unit is basically maintained in the lit state, so when the rotating body 725Z starts operating, the Variable display of symbols will begin on the second display unit.

Returning to the explanation of step S2202, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, that is, if the game regarding the lower operating port 83b is in progress, the process advances to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to display the symbol combination as confirmed (final stop display) in the game round related to the lower operating port 83b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process advances to step S2206.

In step S2206, stop control processing for the second display unit is executed. As a result, all the rotating bodies 725Z constituting the second display unit stop, and the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2205, the process advances to step S2207 and executes light emission/drive control processing for when the second display unit is changing. As a result, the left symbol column and the right symbol column are stopped and displayed, and the display shifts to the ready-to-reach display, or the middle symbol column is specially changed. The specific flow of display effects in this case is the same as in the first embodiment.

Returning to the explanation of step S2201, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, that is, if it is the timing to display the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the upper operating port 83a, the process proceeds to step S2208. move on. In step S2208, a light-off control process is executed to turn off all the side lights 728Z for the second display unit. In other words, when the game round related to the upper operating port 83a progresses during the second normal gaming state or the third normal gaming state, and the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the first display unit, The symbols on the second display unit are hidden, thereby preventing the player from being confused by too much information.

Thereafter, in step S2209, forced stop control processing is executed to stop and display each rotating body 725Z of the second display unit. When each rotating body 725Z is forcibly stopped, the combination of light emitting parts 753Z corresponding to the out-of-position result is stopped in the variable display area, but the supply of light from the side light 728Z is stopped in step S2208. Therefore, these light emitting parts 753Z do not emit light.

(Special control treatment for lower operating port)
Next, a special control process for the lower operating port that is executed when the game is in the first normal game state in which the game progresses based on the ball entering the upper operating port 83a will be explained. As shown in FIG. 62, in the special control process for the lower operating port, first, in step S2301, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the upper operating port 83a is displayed as confirmed (final stop display). Determine whether it exists or not. If a negative determination is made in step S2301, the process advances to step S2302.

In step S2302, it is determined whether or not a game relating to the lower operating port 83b is being played. If a negative determination is made in step S2302, the process advances to step S2303. In step S2303, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the game round related to the lower operating port 83b. If a negative determination is made in step S2303, the special control process for the lower operating port is directly terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, the process advances to step S2304. In step S2304, special control processing for the side lights of the second display unit is executed, and in subsequent step S2305, drive control processing for the second display unit is executed. As a result, the output of the drive signal to each motor 726Z for the second display unit is started, and each rotating body 725Z starts operating. In this case, the background light emitting section 753Z and the pattern light emitting section 753Z pass through the variable display area at a predetermined period, but the period during which the pattern light emitting section 753Z passes through the variable display area The supply of light from the side light 728Z is temporarily stopped. This makes it appear as if the background is blinking from the player's perspective.

Returning to the explanation of step S2302, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2302, the process advances to step S2306. In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the final display of the symbol combination is being performed in the game round related to the lower operating port 83b. If a negative determination is made in step S2306, the process advances to step S2307.

In step S2307, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to display the symbol combination as confirmed (final stop display) in the game round related to the lower operating port 83b. If a negative determination is made in step S2307, a light emission/drive control process for the second display unit during fluctuation is executed in step S2311. As a result, the side lights 728Z are switched on/off in accordance with the rotational position of each rotating body 725Z, and the background is displayed blinking, while the symbols on the second display unit are not displayed. In addition, when the game round related to the lower operating port 83b is executed in the first normal game state, each rotating body 725Z stops when the timing of the final display comes without passing through the above-mentioned reach display. That will happen.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2307, the process advances to step S2308. In step S2308, a stop control process for the second display unit is executed. If the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the light emitting part 753Z for the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped on any of the valid lines L1 to L5, and the current game round is a miss result. If it corresponds, the light emitting part 753Z for the symbol combination corresponding to the miss result is stopped at the valid lines L1 to L5.

In the following step S2309, it is determined whether or not the current game result corresponds to the jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S2309, the special control process for the lower operating port is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2309, the process advances to step S2310, and a light emission control process for the side light 728Z for the second display unit is executed. As a result, light is supplied from the side light 728Z only to the light emitting part 753Z on the line where the jackpot symbol combination is formed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result suddenly appears on the second display unit.

Returning to the explanation of step S2306, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2306, that is, if the final display is in progress, the process advances to step S2312. In step S2312, it is determined whether the fixed display period has elapsed and it is time to end the fixed display. If a negative determination is made in step S2312, the special control process for the main operating port is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2011, the process advances to step S2313. In step S2313, it is determined whether or not the current game result is a jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, the process advances to step S2313 and a light emission extension control process is executed to extend the light emission of the side light 728Z of the second display unit until the special game state ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S2301, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, the process advances to step S2315. In step S2315, forced stop control processing for the second display unit is executed. In other words, in the first normal game state, when a symbol combination that results in a jackpot is stopped and displayed in the game round related to the upper operating port 83a, each rotary body 725Z is forcibly stopped in the second display unit as well. . In this case, the second display unit is adjusted so that the combination of light emitting parts 753Z corresponding to the jackpot result does not stop on any of the active lines L1 to L5.

As detailed above, if a jackpot result is achieved in the game round related to the lower operating port 83b during the first normal gaming state, only that result will be displayed on the second display unit, and the display will be special. This will continue until the end of the gaming state. On the other hand, if a game round related to the lower operating port 83b results in a miss during the first normal gaming state, the rotary body 525Z is also stopped according to the result, but the rotation body 525Z is stopped in response to the result. The selected symbol combination remains hidden.

When comparing the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode with the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, the ball enters the operating port more frequently in the latter than in the former. becomes higher. In consideration of such circumstances, the variable display time set in the second normal game state and the third normal game state is shortened in order to smooth the progress of the game. When comparing the arrangement of the light emitting parts 553Z (symbols) in the first display unit and the arrangement of the light emitting parts 753Z (symbols) in the second display unit, in the former, each pattern is arranged one by one in one pattern row. In contrast, in the latter, a plurality of each symbol is arranged in one symbol row. This is a contrivance to shorten the period required until the set symbols are stopped and displayed as much as possible, thereby increasing the responsiveness of symbol display during game progress.

The result of the lottery based on the ball entering the upper operating port 83a is displayed on the first display unit, and the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the lower operating port 83b is displayed on the second display unit. In this way, by separately providing the display section for the upper operating port 83a and the display section for the lower operating port 83b, the player can know whether the game is progressing based on which operating port the ball enters. It can be quickly grasped. However, if a display section is provided for each actuating port in this way, there is a concern that the burden on the player will increase and the number of missed lottery results will increase due to the scattered locations that require attention. In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, since one display part is configured to be visible through the other display part, the amount of movement of the line of sight between the display parts can be reduced. . Therefore, while the uniqueness is strengthened by providing a separate display section for each operating port, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the various inconveniences caused by this. Thereby, the effect of increasing attention to the game can be suitably strengthened.

The display section related to the first display unit and the display section related to the second display unit are parallel to each other. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a large difference in visibility between the symbol display on the first display section and the symbol display on the second display section.

The variable display area of the symbols on the first display section and the variable display area of the symbols on the second display section overlap one another. With this configuration, when a player is paying attention to one display section and the other display section displays changing symbols, the effect is not made flashy or unnecessary accents are added. It is possible to suitably reduce the chance that the fluctuation display will be overlooked without causing any problems. In addition, by overlapping the positions (valid lines) at which the symbol combinations corresponding to the lottery results are stopped and displayed in the first display section and the second display section, it is possible to It is possible to easily identify whether the symbol combination corresponds to the current lottery result.

As mentioned above, in a configuration in which the stop display position (effective line) or the variable display area overlaps one another, by making the symbol groups displayed on each display section different in appearance, it is possible to determine which display section the symbol is displayed on. It is possible to improve the ability to discern what is displayed. In particular, in a configuration in which the active lines are aligned front and back, the symbols on the first display section and the symbols on the second display section coexist, so that, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to the miss result is stopped and displayed on each display section. This can be advantageously avoided from making it appear as if the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is being stopped and displayed, even though the symbol combination is still displayed.

In the variable display mode in the first normal gaming state, the symbols on the second display section are basically not displayed, and in the variable display mode in the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state, the symbols on the first display section are basically hidden. The pattern will be hidden. With such a configuration, confusion between the display on the first display section and the display on the second display section can be suitably suppressed.

In a configuration in which the drawings by each drawing means are conducted in parallel, a jackpot result may be obtained in the drawing based on the winning in the lower operating port 83b during the first normal gaming state, or a jackpot result may be obtained during the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state. There is also a possibility that a jackpot result will be achieved in the lottery based on winnings in the upper operation opening 83a. In such a case, it is possible to use a display section other than the display section on the winning side to notify the winning result, but this may confuse the player. On the other hand, if the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the process up to displaying the lottery results, the variable symbols will be displayed overlappingly on both display sections, resulting in too much information being provided to the player. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if a jackpot result is obtained in the lottery based on winning in the upper operation opening 83a during the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state, the first display The symbol corresponding to the winning result is displayed in a stopped state in the second display part, and if a jackpot result is obtained in the lottery based on the winning result in the lower operating port 83b during the first normal gaming state, the second display part By displaying the symbols corresponding to the winning results in a stopped state, the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above can be suitably suppressed.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment, the background display function is provided to the second display unit, but it is sufficient that the second display unit has at least the function of displaying the symbols for the game round related to the lower operating port 83b. It is also possible to omit the display function.

<Modification 2>
In the third embodiment, the side light 728 of the second display unit is turned on during the first normal game state, but the side light 728 is turned off during the first normal game state. You can also use it as

<Modification 3>
In the third embodiment, when one of the first display unit and the second display unit is displaying a symbol in a variable manner, the other is not displaying a symbol in a variable manner (in detail, the rotating body However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which variable display of symbols on each display unit is performed in parallel.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the configuration is such that whether or not to shift to the high probability mode is determined by a lottery based on the balls entering the operating ports 83a and 83b, but in this embodiment, the operating A configuration that shifts to a high probability mode when a ball enters an advantageous entry section provided in the variable prize winning device 82 during a special game state that is triggered by a lottery based on balls entering the openings 83a and 83b. The configuration is different from the first embodiment in that the configuration is different from the first embodiment, and the configuration of the right route of the gaming area PE has been partially devised to match this difference in playability. There is only one. Specifically, a distribution unit 810 built in the variable winning device 82 disposed on the right route, and a stage unit 830 disposed at an upstream position (diagonally above) of the variable winning device 82 on the right route. The configuration differs from the first embodiment in that it includes a gaming mechanism 800 consisting of. The gaming mechanism 800 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66. 63 is a schematic diagram showing the gaming mechanism 800, FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram of the stage section of the distribution unit 810 seen from above, FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram showing various states of the distribution unit, and FIG. 66 is a diagram showing the stage unit 830. It is a schematic diagram. Note that in FIG. 63, for convenience of explanation, the distribution unit 810 and the stage unit 830 are shown side by side.

(Distribution unit 810)
First, the distribution unit 810 shown on the right side of FIG. 63 will be explained. The sorting unit has a stage portion 811 on which game balls are formed to be rollable. A first ball entrance 812, a second ball entrance 813, and a third ball entrance 814 are formed in the stage portion 811 as ball entrances through which game balls can pass (see FIG. 64). Each of these ball entry ports 812 to 814 is open upward and is slightly larger than the game ball. The first ball entrance port 812 is connected to a first branch passage section 818 which is a disadvantageous passage through a first communication passage 815, and the second ball entrance opening 813 is connected to the first branch passage section 818 through a second communication passage 816. is connected to. On the other hand, the third ball entry port 814 is connected to a second branch passage section 819 (the above-mentioned advantageous ball entry section) which is an advantageous passage through a third communication passage 817.

When a game ball enters the first branch passage section 818 during the special game state, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. On the other hand, if a ball enters the second branch passage section 819 during the special game state, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player, and the state shifts to the normal game state after the special game state ends. The lottery mode becomes high probability mode. In this way, since the second branching passage section 819 is more advantageous to the player than the first branching passage section 818, the player can see that the game balls that have flowed into the variable prize winning device 82 are It is assumed that the player plays the game with the expectation that the ball will enter the ball entrance 814.

The stage part 811 is sloped downward toward each of the ball entry ports 812 to 814, and the ball enters any of the ball entry ports 812 to 814 while rolling on the stage part 811 along the slope. . Note that the stage portion 811 is surrounded by the wall surface of the housing of the variable prize winning device 82. This prevents the game balls that have reached the stage section 811 from leaving the stage section 811 through any route other than the ball entrances 812 to 814.

The sorting unit 810 is provided with a movable body 821 as a regulating means for regulating the entry of balls into the first ball entry port 812 and the second ball entry port 813. The movable body 821 has a base portion 822 located below the stage portion 811, and a first columnar portion 823 and a second columnar portion 824 that stand upward from the base portion 822.

The tip of the first columnar section 823 is inserted into the first communication passage 815 from below, and the upper surface 823a of the first columnar section 823 forms a part of the bottom surface of the first communication passage 815. Also, the tip of the second columnar portion 824 is inserted into the second communication passage 816 from below, and the upper surface 824a of the second columnar portion 824 forms a part of the bottom surface of the second communication passage 816. ing.

The movable body 821 is held by the housing of the variable prize winning device 82 so as to be movable up and down. When the movable body 821 is waiting at the lower limit position shown in FIG. The probability that the game ball that has reached 811 will enter the third ball entry port 814 on the advantageous side is approximately 1/3.

On the other hand, when the movable body 821 is waiting at the upper limit position shown in FIG. 65(b), entry of the ball into the first ball entry port 812 and the second ball entry port 813 is restricted. Specifically, the rolling surface of the stage part 811 is complemented by the upper surfaces 823a, 824a of the columnar parts 823, 824, and the game balls rolling toward the first ball entry port 812 and the second ball entry port 813, The ball passes through the first ball entrance 812 and the second ball entrance 813 without any trouble. As a result, the probability that the game ball that has reached the stage section 811 will enter the third ball entry port 814 on the advantageous side is approximately 1/1.

One of the features of this embodiment is that when the movable body 821 moves to the upper limit position, the standby period during which it waits at the upper limit position is varied by using the stage unit 830. The stage unit 830 will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 63, the stage unit 830 has a stage part 831 on which game balls roll, similar to the distribution unit 810, and a part of the game balls flowing down the right route, more specifically, a part of the game balls flowing down the right route. It is configured such that game balls flowing into the special ball entrance 88 provided are guided to the stage section 831.

The stage part 831 has a mortar shape that slopes gently downward toward its center, and a central opening 832 that is open upward is formed in the center (see FIG. 56(b)). . The game ball guided to the stage part 831 approaches the central opening 832 while rotating around the central opening 832, and flows into the central opening 832.

The central opening 832 constitutes an entrance portion of a game ball discharge passage 833 in the stage section 831. The discharge passage 833 extends in the vertical direction, and the game balls that have passed through the discharge passage 833 flow into a guide passage 836 provided below the discharge passage 833, and pass through the guide passage 836 to the variable winning device. 82. In other words, among the game balls fired to the right route, there is also room for the balls that have passed through the stage unit 830 to enter the variable prize winning device 82.

Like the movable body 821, the stage unit 830 is held movable up and down in the vertical direction, and an upper limit position and a lower limit position are defined by a stopper 834 attached to the stage unit 830. Although not shown, the stage unit 830 is biased toward the upper limit position by a biasing means (specifically, a spring member), and waits at the upper limit position when no game ball is placed on the stage portion 831. The structure is as follows. However, when at least one game ball is placed on the stage portion 831, the stage unit 830 descends against the urging force of the urging means due to the weight of the game ball. Note that movement beyond the lower limit position will be prevented by the stopper 834.

The movable body 821 of the distribution unit 810 and the stage unit 830 shown in this embodiment are connected via a link member 840. The link member 840 is pivotably supported at an intermediate position between the movable body 821 and the stage unit 830, and rotates around this pivot point (center axis CL2). Note that the pivot point is set to be biased toward the movable body 821 side. This is an idea to reduce the force required to move the movable body 821 up and down.

When the stage unit 830 located at one end of the link member 840 descends, the movable body 821 located at the other end of the link member 840 rises in conjunction with this. On the other hand, when the stage unit 830 rises, the movable body 821 descends in conjunction with the rise. Here, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, the flow of the game in the special game state will be illustrated.

When shifting to the special game state, the variable winning device 82 is opened, and the game balls flowing down the right route flow into the big winning opening. The game balls flowing into the grand prize opening are guided to the stage part 811 of the distribution unit 810.

As shown in FIG. 67, in a situation where no game ball is placed on the stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830 (a situation where the game ball is not stopped), the first ball entry port 812 and the second ball entry port 813 of the distribution unit 810 is open, and the probability of the ball entering the third ball entry port 814 on the advantageous side is approximately 1/3.

When a game ball is placed on the stage part 831 of the stage unit 830, the stage unit 830 is pushed by the game ball and descends to the lower limit position, and in conjunction with this, the movable body 821 of the distribution unit 810 moves to the upper limit position. Moving. In this state, as shown in FIG. 68, the ball cannot enter the first ball entry port 812 or the second ball entry port 813, and the ball enters the third ball entry port 814. Become. In other words, the probability of the ball entering the third ball entry port 814, which is the advantageous side, is temporarily 1/1.

As shown in FIG. 68→FIG. 67, when the game ball positioned on the stage portion 831 leaves the stage unit 830 through the central opening 832, the stage unit 830 returns to the upper limit position by the biasing force. In conjunction with this, the movable body 821 returns to the lower limit position, and the support for the ball entering the third ball entrance opening 814 by the movable body 821 ends.

Here, although the game balls rolling onto the stage section 831 of the stage unit 830 are finally discharged from the stage section 831 through the central opening 832, the length of stay in the stage section 831 varies. In other words, the length of stay will vary depending on subtle differences in the moving speed and landing position upon reaching the stage section 831. For this reason, the period during which the movable body 821 supports the ball entering the third ball entry port 814 will vary in length.

The stage part 831 of the stage unit 830 shown in this embodiment is configured so that a plurality of game balls can roll (stay) at the same time, and the central opening 832 is configured so that a plurality of game balls can pass through at the same time. The size makes it impossible. As a result, a plurality of game balls are placed on the stage section 831, thereby lengthening the period of the ball hitting support. Therefore, in the special game state, the game is played in the hope that as many game balls as possible will be guided to the stage section 831.

In addition, in the distribution unit 810 shown in this embodiment, when a game ball is placed on the upper surfaces 823a and 824a, the movable body 821 tries to descend due to the weight of the game ball, so the support period is shortened. It may be shortened. However, the area of the stage section 831 is larger than the total area of the upper surfaces 823a, 824a of the columnar sections 823, 824 of the movable body 821. This suppresses the occurrence of the above-mentioned events frequently.

When a game ball is placed on the stage part 831 of the stage unit 830, the movable body 821 of the distribution unit 810 is displaced from the lower limit position to the upper limit position, and when the game ball is detached from the stage part 831, the movable body 821 is moved from the upper limit position. Return to the lower limit position. Here, a difference occurs in the staying period in the stage part 831 depending on the rolling manner of the game ball in the stage part 831 (for example, the rolling direction and rolling speed of the game ball). In other words, the period during which the movable body 821 is located at the upper limit position depends on the stay period. By suppressing the movement of the gaming mechanism 800 from becoming monotonous in this manner, it is possible to contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

The movable body 821 is displaced to the lower limit position/upper limit position in conjunction with the vertical movement of the stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830. Here, by setting the operating direction of the stage section 831 to be up and down, it is possible to suppress the behavior of the game ball from changing due to the movement of the stage section 831. This is preferable in order to alleviate the imbalance in the waiting period during which game balls wait on the stage section 831.

In the configuration in which the stage unit 830 is moved up and down using the weight of the game ball, the driving force depends on the weight of the game ball. As shown in this embodiment, the stage unit 830 is disposed at one end of a link member 840 that is rotatably held, and the movable body 821 is disposed at the other end. By forming the body 821 to alternate vertically, transmission loss of output can be reduced. This is preferable in order to increase the reliability of the operation of the gaming mechanism 800 on the premise that the driving force is small.

The stage portion 831 is formed so that a plurality of game balls can roll at the same time. As described above, in the configuration in which the weight of the game balls is used as the power to displace the movable body 821, the displacement speed (responsiveness) can be changed depending on the number of game balls that can be positioned on the stage section 831. If the configuration is such that the responsiveness changes depending on the number of game balls, it is possible to contribute to further diversification of the period during which the movable body 821 is maintained at the upper limit position.

A discharge passage 833 formed in the stage unit 830 extends vertically from the central opening 832 and serves as a vertical passage. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid delays in returning the stage unit 830 to the standby position due to being pushed by game balls passing through the discharge passage 833, etc. This can contribute to improving responsiveness when moving the movable body 821 to the lower limit position/upper limit position.

The central opening 832 has a size that prevents a plurality of game balls from passing through at the same time. For this reason, when a plurality of game balls roll on the stage section 831, the game balls will leave the stage section 831 one after another, and it is avoided that they leave the stage section 831 all at once. Therefore, the period during which the movable body 821 waits at the upper limit position (for example, the action period) can be varied according to the number of game balls located on the stage section 831.

<Modification 1>
In the fourth embodiment, when the movable body 821 is placed at the upper limit position, the upper surfaces 823a and 824a of the columnar parts 823 and 824 complement the rolling surface of the game ball on the stage part 811. , but is not limited to this. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 69, when the movable body 821A is placed at the upper limit position, the columnar parts 823A and 824A are configured to protrude above the rolling surface of the game ball in the stage part 811. It is also possible. Thereby, while regulating the entry of balls into the ball entrances 812A, 813A, it is possible to reduce the chances of game balls landing on the upper surfaces 823aA, 824aA of the columnar parts 823A, 824A.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth embodiment, the moving direction (vertical direction) of the movable body 821 of the sorting unit 810 is aligned with the moving direction (vertical direction) of the stage unit 830, but the present invention is not limited to this. isn't it. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 70, a shutter 825B that opens and closes the ball entrance 812B and a biasing means that biases the shutter 825B to the closed position are added, and the shutter 825B raises the movable body 821B. Accordingly, it is also possible to adopt a structure in which the opening member slides from the closed position to the open position against the urging force of the urging means. With such a configuration, even if a game ball is placed on the shutter 825B, the movable body 821B can be prevented from being pushed down by its weight.

<Modification 3>
In the fourth embodiment, the game ball entering the special ball entry port 88 disposed on the right route is guided to the stage unit 830 (stage section 831). In order to increase the variation in the moving speed of the game balls guided to the stage section 831, it is preferable to make the communication passage 88bC that connects the special ball entrance 88C and the stage section 831 slope, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 71. . A difference in behavior occurs between when a game ball flows into the opening 88aC of the special entrance ball opening 88C from the same side as the direction of inclination, and when a game ball flows into the opening 88aC from the side opposite to the direction of inclination. Since the momentum of the inflow of game balls is less likely to be lost in the former case than in the latter case, the difference in movement speed when reaching the stage section 831 can be made remarkable. This is preferable in order to increase the width of the support period by the movable body 821.

Further, in order to provide a difference in moving speed, it is also possible to change the communication passage 88bC as follows. That is, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 72(a), the communication passage 88bD is branched into a first branch passage 88cD and a second branch passage 88dD at an intermediate position, and the game ball is placed in the first branch passage at the branch position. Distributing means 88gD for distributing to 88cD and second branch passage 88dD is provided. Decelerators 88eD and 88fD are provided in the first branch passage 88cD and the second branch passage 88dD to reduce the speed of the game ball, respectively, to create a difference in the moving speed of the game ball at the time of passing through each branch passage 88cD and 88dD. It is good to let it happen.

Note that this concept may be applied to the stage section 831 to cause a difference in the staying period of the game ball in the stage section 831 depending on the flow path.

<Modification 4>
In the fourth embodiment, the stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830 is shaped like a mortar to diversify the staying period of the game balls, but the specific structure for providing a difference in the staying period is arbitrary. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 72(b1), the stage unit 830E is provided with a first flow path 88cE whose passage time is relatively short and a second flow path 88dE whose passage time is relatively long. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the length of stay varies depending on the route. In this case, by allowing the game ball to move from one of the first flow path 88cE/second flow path 88dE to the other, it is possible to contribute to further diversification of the stay period. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 72(b2), the first flow path 88cE is offset above the second flow path 88dE, and the rolling surface of the game ball in the first flow path 88cE is It is preferable to slope downward toward the flow path 88dE side.

<Modification 5>
In the fourth embodiment, when one game ball is placed on the stage portion 831 of the stage unit 830, the stage unit 830 starts descending. The number is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to start descending when two game balls are placed on it, or may be configured to start descending when three or more game balls are placed on it.

<Modification 6>
In the fourth embodiment described above, a configuration is exemplified in which the mode is shifted to the high probability mode based on the ball entering the third ball entry port 814, but at least the ball entry ports 812 to 814 are provided with different advantages. It is sufficient if the ball enters the third ball entrance 814, and the round game in the special game state can be continued. Further, it is not necessary to apply the distribution unit to the variable winning device 82, and it may be provided separately from the variable winning device 82. In this case, if the ball enters the first ball entry port 812 or the second ball entry port 813, a jackpot lottery is executed, and if the ball enters the third ball entry port 814, the jackpot is confirmed. It is also possible.

<Modification 7>
In the fourth embodiment, a difference in the degree of advantage is provided so that the third ball entry port 814 is more advantageous to the player than the first ball entry port 812 and the second ball entry port 813. It is also possible to reverse. That is, a difference in advantage may be provided so that the third ball entrance port 814 is more disadvantageous to the player than the first ball entrance port 812 and the second ball entrance port 813.

<Modification 8>
It is sufficient that the movable body is configured to be in an operating state during the period when the game balls stay on the stage unit 830, and the action does not necessarily need to be "distribution of game balls". There isn't. For example, a configuration corresponding to the stage unit 830 may be applied to the movable decorative body for performance.

<Fifth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration related to the game board unit. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74, the game board unit 80F in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. FIG. 73 is a front view of the game board unit 80F, and FIG. 74 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80F seen from the front side.

(Game board unit 80F)
The game area PE provided in the game board unit 80F is roughly divided into a left route and a right route by a center frame 95, similar to the game board unit 80 shown in the first embodiment. The left route and the right route merge below the game area PE (symbol display device 500F, which will be described later), and a ball entry unit 850F equipped with a lower operating port 859F is disposed at this merged portion. . Although the game ball fired to the left route and the game ball fired to the right route are both configured to be able to enter the lower operating port 859F, the probability of ball entry is higher for the left route than the right route. are given preferential treatment. Thereby, at least in the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the game can proceed more advantageously by firing the game ball to the left route than by firing the game ball to the right route.

Note that the lower operating port 859F in this embodiment corresponds to the upper operating port 83a shown in the first embodiment, but is disposed closer to the bottom and on the back side of the gaming area PE compared to the upper operating port 83a. As a result, visibility when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is reduced. This makes the effect gate 855F stand out in relation to the effect gate 855F, which will be described later, and the function and appearance of the effect gate 855F make it appear as if the effect gate 855F is an "operating opening" in this embodiment. This is a trick to make it look like this.

A right operating port 883F, which corresponds to the lower operating port 83b shown in the first embodiment, is provided on the right route. An electric accessory 891F is attached to the right operating port 883F, and when a game ball passes through the through gate 884F, which is also placed on the right route, and wins the support lottery, the electric accessory 891F opens from the closed state. By switching to the state, the ball can enter the right operating port 883F.

In addition, in the right route, when the lottery results based on the balls entering the lower operating port 859F and the right operating port 883F and the transition to the special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) occurs, the state changes from the non-accepting state to the accepting state. Variable winning devices 881F and 882F are provided. This embodiment is similar to the first embodiment in that a prize ball is awarded to the player when the ball enters these variable winning devices 881F and 882F.

Here, the ball entering unit 850F will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77. FIG. 75 is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit 80F showing the ball entry unit 850F and its surroundings, FIG. 76 is a perspective view of the ball entry unit seen from the front, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the ball entry unit.

As shown in FIG. 75, the right route is divided into an upper route and a lower route with the windmill 94 disposed on the side of the center frame 95 (specifically, the stage 96F) as the starting point. Regarding the lower route, it branches into a route toward the ball entry unit 850F and a route toward the general prize opening 81 at an intermediate position, and some game balls flowing down the upper route and some game balls flowing down the lower route. (Specifically, the game balls that did not go to the general winning hole 81) will be discharged from the game area PE via the ball entry unit 850F.

As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the ball entry unit 850F includes a base body 851F on which various game parts are mounted, front covers 852F and 853F that cover the base body 851F from the front of the gaming machine, and base bodies 851F that cover the gaming machine. By combining the back cover 854F that covers from the rear back and forth, a plurality of flowing paths for the game balls are formed, and by fixing the base body 851F to the game area forming body 310F, the game area forming body 310F is formed. It is integrated into the gaming area forming body 310F in a state of protruding forward from the gaming machine through the opening.

The lower operating port 859F is arranged at the bottom of the ball entry unit 850F, and the ball entering unit 850F has a center route (first route) that continues to the lower operating port 859F and an out port 89 as the downstream route. A subsequent side route (second route) is provided. The front covers 852F and 853F are transparent, and the game balls passing through the inside of the ball entry unit 850F (for example, the center route and the side route) and the various built-in game parts can be viewed through these front covers 852F and 853F. It becomes.

A production gate 855F is provided at the top of the ball entry unit 850F as an entrance portion of the center route. In this embodiment, only game balls distributed to the upper route (stage 96F) can pass through the production gate 855F. As shown in FIG. 77, an upper croon 856F is disposed below the performance gate 855F as a distribution means for distributing game balls.

The upper croon 856F has a disk shape, and its upper surface serves as a rolling surface 871F on which the game ball rolls. A first opening 873F and a second opening 874F are formed in the center portion of the upper croon 856F, and the rolling surface 871F is slightly downward toward the first opening 873F and the second opening 874F. It is sloping. A peripheral wall portion 872F that stands upward from the rolling surface 871F is provided on the outer peripheral portion of the upper croon 856F, and the game ball that has reached the rolling surface 871F does not flow out from other than the first opening 873F and the second opening 874F. has been avoided. In other words, the game ball that has reached the rolling surface 871F is configured to flow into either the first opening 873F or the second opening 874F.

The base body 851 is provided with a first branch passage section 864F through which game balls that have flowed into the first opening 873F pass, and a second branch passage section 865F through which game balls that have flowed into the second opening 874F pass. The first branch passage section 864F constitutes a part of the center route, whereas the second branch passage part 865F constitutes a part of the side route. In other words, a portion of the game balls that have passed through the production gate 855F are configured to move from the center route to the side route by passing through the second branch passage section 865F. Note that the number of second openings 874F is greater than the number of first openings 873F, and more than half of the game balls that pass through the production gate 855F will move to the side route.

The exit portion of the first branch passage section 864F and the exit section of the second branch passage section 865F are arranged side by side, with the former at the center and the latter on both left and right sides. An inlet 878F into the lower croon 857F is formed below. The lower croon 857F is disk-shaped like the upper croon 856F, and its upper surface is a rolling surface 875F on which a game ball can roll. A central opening 876F passing vertically is formed in the central portion of the lower croon 857F, and the rolling surface 875F is inclined slightly downward toward the central opening 876F. The rolling surface 875F has an annular shape, and the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 875F through the inlet 878F head toward the central opening 876F while rolling around the central opening 876F. Note that the rolling surface 875F is formed so that the number of game balls that can stay on the rolling surface 875F at the same time is greater than the number of reservations related to the lower operating port 859F.

A peripheral wall portion 877F that stands upward from the rolling surface 875F is provided on the outer peripheral portion of the lower croon 857F, and the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 875F are prevented from flowing out from other than the central opening 876F. The lower operating port 859F is provided directly below the central opening 876F, and the game ball that has passed through the central opening 876F enters the lower operating port 859F. In other words, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 878F (the game ball that has reached the rolling surface 875F) is configured to win a prize into the lower operating port 859F.

Here, a non-electric accessory 858F is disposed between the inlet 878F and the exit area of the branch passages 864F and 865F as a guide means (ball entrance assisting means) to the inlet 878F. . The non-electric accessory 858F includes a pair of left and right movable pieces that face each other across a flow path connecting the first branch passage portion 864F and the inlet 878F. Each movable piece is held so as to be rotatable around the lower end of the movable piece, and the rotation changes the guiding state of the non-electric accessory 858F between a first guiding state and a second guiding state. The structure is as follows.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 78, a supplementary explanation will be given of the non-motorized accessory 858F and the configuration related to the movement of the non-motorized accessory 858F. FIG. 78(a) is a schematic diagram when the non-electric accessory 858F is in the first guidance state, and FIG. 78(b) is a schematic diagram when the non-electric accessory 858F is in the second guidance state. be.

The non-electric accessory 858F is connected to the lower croon 857F via a link mechanism 879F. The lower croon 857F is held movable up and down, and the base body 851F is provided with a stopper that defines the upper and lower limit positions of the lower croon 857F. The base body 851F is equipped with a spring that urges the lower croon 857F to the upper limit position, and the lower croon 857F is configured to wait at the upper limit position (hereinafter referred to as the standby position) due to the biasing force of this spring. .

When a game ball is placed on the lower croon 857F (rolling surface 875F), the lower croon 857F descends from the standby position to the lower limit position (hereinafter referred to as the lowering position) against the biasing force of the spring. Note that since the attitude of the lower croon 857F is maintained constant at any position in the ascending/descending section, the movement of the game ball toward the central opening 876F will not be hindered due to a change in attitude during descent.

In a state where the lower croon 857F is arranged at the standby position, that is, in a state where no game ball is placed on the rolling surface 875F, the non-electric accessory 858F is maintained in the first guiding state. In the first guiding state, the game balls that flowed out from the exit part of the first branch passage section 864F are allowed to flow into the inflow port 878F, whereas the game balls that flowed out from the exit part of the second branch passage part 865F. will be obstructed from flowing into the inlet 878F.

When a game ball is placed on the lower croon 857F and the lower croon 857F moves from the standby position to the lowering position, the non-electric accessory 858F switches from the first guidance state to the second guidance state in conjunction with the movement of the lower croon 857F. . In the second guiding state, both the game balls flowing out from the exit part of the first branch passage section 864F and the game balls flowing out from the exit part of the second branch passage part 865F are allowed to flow into the inflow port 878F. becomes. In other words, the channel that flows into the inflow port 878F is expanded, albeit temporarily, and the game ball that passes through the above-mentioned production gate 855F will be able to pass through either the first opening 873F or the second opening 874F. Even if there is, it can flow into the inlet 878F.

Here, when the non-electric accessory 858F is in the second guiding state, game balls flowing down other downstream paths formed in the ball entry unit 850F may also be guided to the inflow port 878F. . Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 75 again, other flow paths formed in the ball entrance unit 850F will be supplementarily explained, and then other objects guided to the inflow port 878F in the second guide state will be explained.

First guide passage portions 861F are formed at positions on both the left and right sides of the upper croon 856F in the ball entry unit 850F. The first guide passage portion 861F constitutes a part of the above-mentioned side route. Further, a second guide passage portion 862F, which constitutes a part of the lower route mentioned above, is formed in the ball entry unit 850F. The second guide passage portion 862F also constitutes a part of the side route, and merges with the first guide passage portion 861F on the upstream side of the exit portion of the second branch passage portion 865F. Among the game balls distributed to the upper route, those that did not pass through the production gate 855F and the game balls distributed to the lower route are guided to the vicinity of the exit part of the second branch passage section 865F via the side route. be done.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 79(a), when the non-motorized accessory 858F is in the first guidance state, the movable piece of the non-motorized accessory 858F serves as a partition separating the side route and the center route. functions as Therefore, none of the game balls that have passed through the first guide passage section 861F and the second guide passage section 862F will flow into the inflow port 878F.

On the other hand, when the non-motorized accessory 858F is in the second guiding state, the movable piece of the non-motorized accessory 858F protrudes toward the side route, as shown in FIG. The route and the center route will be in communication. In this state, the game balls that have passed through the first guide passage section 861F and the second guide passage section 862F can also be guided to the inlet 878F by the non-electric accessory 858F. However, compared to the game balls flowing out from the exit portion of the second branch passage section 865F, the probability of guiding them to the inflow port 878F is differentiated to be lower.

In addition, regarding the game balls flowing down the side route via the merging portion 863F, the progress until reaching the merging portion 863F, in detail, depends on which of the first guide passage portion 861F and the second guide passage portion 862F they have passed through. The configuration is such that a difference occurs in the probability of guiding to the inlet 878F. Specifically, the communication point where the above-mentioned communication occurs when the non-electric accessory 858F enters the second guide state is located on the extension of the merging portion 863F, and the rolling surface of the game ball at the merging portion 863F. The slope forming the connection point is formed to slope downward toward the communication location. However, a gap large enough for a game ball to pass through is ensured between the slope and the communication point, and whether or not the game ball flowing down the slope can reach the communication point depends on the game. The structure depends on the moving speed of the ball.

Specifically, since the first guide passage section 861F extends in the vertical direction, the game balls flowing down along the first guide passage section 861F are decelerated when reaching the slope. Even if the vehicle is re-accelerated on a slope, the rate at which it can reach a speed that jumps over the gap is relatively low. On the other hand, since the second guide passage section 862F extends in the same direction (horizontal direction) as the slope, the game balls flowing down along the second guide passage section 862F can move to the slope without reducing their momentum. and is re-accelerated. Therefore, the rate at which the vehicle can reach a speed that jumps over the gap becomes relatively high. In this way, by providing a difference in the probability of inflow to the inlet 878F depending on the flow path, it is possible to contribute to increasing the attention to the behavior of the game ball.

Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 80, the flow of winning a prize to the lower operating port 859F will be explained.

The game balls launched to the left route are sorted into the upper route and the lower route by the windmill 94. When the game balls sorted to the upper route pass through the performance gate 855F and reach the upper croon 856F, it becomes a chance to win a prize at the lower operation opening 859F. As shown in FIG. 80(a)→FIG. 80(b), regarding the game ball placed on the upper crown 856F, the first branch passage portion 864F (first opening 873F) and the second branch passage portion 865F (second opening 874F).

As shown in FIG. 80(b) → FIG. 80(c), even if the guiding state of the non-motorized accessory 858F is the first guiding state, the game balls distributed to the first branch passage section 864F are not connected to the inlet 878F. It will flow into the lower croon 857F. When the lower croon 857F moves from the standby position to the lowered position due to the weight of the game ball, the non-electric accessory 858F switches from the first guide state to the second guide state in conjunction with the movement. In other words, before the preceding game ball B1 enters the lower operating port 859F, the ball enters a high ball entry probability state where the probability of the ball entering the inflow port 878F is temporarily increased.

As shown in FIG. 80(d), while the game ball is placed on the lower croon 857F, the non-electric accessory 858F is maintained in the second guiding state, and the subsequent game distributed to the second branch passage section 865F The ball B3 and the subsequent game ball B4 distributed to the second guide passage section 862F also have a chance to flow into the inflow port 878F.

Here, in the present embodiment, when comparing the game ball going to the non-motorized accessory 858F via the lower route and the game ball heading to the non-motorized accessory 858F via the upper route, the latter is more A difference is made so that the former takes less time than the former. For this reason, when the preceding game ball reaches the lower croon 857F and the non-electric accessory 858F switches to the second guidance state, the game ball passing through the lower route will be more likely to pass through the upper route than the game ball passing through the upper route. will immediately head to the non-electric accessory 858F, raising expectations for consecutive wins. To generate a time advantage in generating/continuing consecutive winnings for game balls distributed to the lower route among the subsequent game balls (However, in terms of winning probability, there is an advantage for those that go through the upper route 856F) This has the technical significance of being able to draw more attention to the game ball passing through the lower route on the disadvantageous side.

If the following game ball B3 or game ball B4 lands on the lower croon 857F, the lower croon 857F will descend even if the preceding game ball B1 leaves the lower croon 857F and enters the lower operating port 859F. The non-electric accessory 858F is also maintained in the second guiding state. As a result, the number of reservations related to the lower operation port 859F increases at once. Furthermore, after the number of reservations reaches the upper limit, even if winnings continue to be made to the lower operation port 859F, the acquisition of new reservation information is restricted, so that the player's advantage is prevented from becoming excessively high. Ru.

After that, when all the game balls leave the lower croon 857F, the lower croon 857F returns to the standby position, and in conjunction with this, the non-electric accessory 858F switches from the first guidance state to the second guidance state. . As a result, the temporary high ball entry probability state related to the lower operating port 859F is released.

In this way, according to the ball entry unit 850F shown in this embodiment, it is possible to cause a bias in winnings to the lower operating port 859F. Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 81, the transition of the number of reservations over time will be described. In FIG. 81, the transition of the number of reservations in this embodiment is illustrated by a solid line, and the transition of the number of reservations in the first embodiment is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

In this embodiment, when a game ball reaches the lower croon 857F and the winning of the game ball into the lower operating port 859F is confirmed, subsequent game balls can easily flow into the inflow port 878F. be converted into In other words, as long as you continue to shoot the game ball toward the left route, when one game ball enters the lower operating port 859F, the probability of the subsequent game ball entering the lower operating port 859F will dramatically increase. As a result, consecutive winnings to the lower operating port 859F (winnings in which subsequent pending information is acquired before the stored pending information becomes 0) occur. Thereby, the number of reservations related to the lower operation port 859F tends to reach the upper limit.

Regarding the winning probability for the lower actuation opening 859F when the non-motorized accessory 858F is in the first guidance state, the winning probability for the lower action opening 859F when the non-motorized accessory 858F is in the first guidance state is as follows: This is lower than the winning probability for the upper operating port 83a in a configuration in which a configuration corresponding to the object 858F is not installed. In other words, the winning probability becomes lower when the above-mentioned function that induces continuous winning is excluded. With such a configuration, winnings to the lower operating port 859F are unevenly distributed.

In a configuration in which a display effect is performed on the symbol display device 500F based on a prize entered into the lower operation port 859F, the period in which the number of reservations becomes 0 becomes longer, and the period in which the display effect is not executed (the non-effect period) becomes longer. . It is feared that if the non-presentation period becomes conspicuous in this way, and it becomes clear that no winnings have been made to the lower operating port 859F, this will become a factor that reduces the player's desire to play. One of the features of this embodiment is that it uses the above-mentioned performance gate 855F to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. Hereinafter, a supplementary explanation will be given of the electrical configuration in this embodiment, and then the above-mentioned devices will be explained.

As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 82, in this embodiment, a symbol display device 500F is provided in place of the variable display unit 500 shown in the first embodiment, and the display of this symbol display device 500F is A display control device 910F for controlling the content is added.

The display control device 910F includes a display control board 911F on which an MPU 912F, which is an element in which a program ROM 913F and a work RAM 914F are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 915F, a character ROM 916F, and a video RAM 917F are mounted. It is equipped with Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 913F and work RAM 914F are integrated into one chip for the MPU 912F, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 912F of the display control device 910F analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/effect control device 140, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 915F (specifically (generation of internal commands for the VDP915F). More specifically, the MPU 912F executes a process for specifying a variable display pattern for each game round on the symbol display device 500F based on a command sent from the notification/performance control device 140, and also executes a process related to a pending display. Then, in response to the processing result, drawing processing for the VDP 915F is executed. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 500aF of the symbol display device 500F.

The program ROM 913F is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 912F, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image. The work RAM 914F is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 912F executes various programs. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 914F.

The VDP915F is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 500F. Since the VDP915F is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and in reality, it can be said to be a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 915F adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 912F, the video RAM 917F, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 917F from the character ROM 916 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 500F.

The character ROM 916F plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 500F. The character ROM 916F stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 916F and store image data and the like in each character ROM 916F. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 913F to be stored in the character ROM 916F.

The video RAM 917F is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 500F, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 917F, the display contents of the symbol display device 500F are changed.

The main display unit (main display section) under the direct control of the main control device 162 includes a display section for the lower operating port that displays lottery results based on winnings at the lower operating port 859F, and a display section for displaying lottery results based on winnings at the right operating port 883F. A display section for the right operating port is provided for displaying the lottery results based on the lottery result. In the display section for the lower operating port, a variable display of symbols is performed using a win to the lower operating port 859F as a trigger, and as a result of the stoppage of the variable display, an internal lottery held based on a winning to the lower operating port 859F is displayed. Results are made clear. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry to the lower operating port 859F is a winning result that corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the variable display will be stopped on the lower operating port display section, and a predetermined stop result will be displayed. After the picture is displayed, the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode. In the display section for the right operating port, a variable display of symbols is performed using a win to the right operating port 883F as a trigger, and as a result of the stop of the variable display, an internal lottery that was held based on a winning to the right operating port 883F is displayed. Results are made clear. If the result of the internal lottery based on the prize entered into the right operating port 883F is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the variable display will be stopped on the right operating port display section, and a predetermined picture will be displayed as the stop result. After that, the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode according to the result.

Incidentally, based on winning to either of the operating ports 859F, 883F, a variable display is started on the corresponding operating port display section, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the period from when the above variable display is stopped is the game cycle. This corresponds to one time. However, one game round is not limited to the above content, for example, a single display area is provided, and even if a winning occurs in either of the operating ports 859F and 883F, that single display area is displayed. In a configuration in which a variable display is performed in a display area, one gaming session is the time from when the variable display starts in the single display area until the variable display is stopped while displaying a predetermined stop result. It is also possible to do this.

Here, the structure related to the fluctuating display of symbols in each game round and the contents of the fluctuating display will be explained. Note that FIG. 83 will be referred to as appropriate in the following description. FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen 500aF of the symbol display device 500F.

The character ROM 916F of the display control device 910F contains data for 9 types of main symbols, which are composed of numbers "1" to "9" and decorations such as characters imitating fish, etc., and data on which no numbers are attached. Sub-symbol data and nine types of simple pattern data consisting of numbers "1" to "9" are stored in advance.

As shown in FIG. 83, the display screen 500aF of the symbol display device 500F is provided with a variable display area for displaying the various symbols described above in a variable manner. This variable display area is roughly divided into three areas: a first variable display area ME1, a second variable display area ME2, and a third variable display area ME3. The first variable display area ME1 is arranged at the upper left of the display screen 500aF, the second variable display area ME2 is arranged at the upper right of the display screen 500aF, and the third variable display area ME3 is arranged at the center of the display screen 500aF.

Three symbol rows on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the first variable display area ME1. Each symbol row is made up of the above-mentioned simple symbols arranged in a predetermined order, and the symbols in each symbol row are periodically displayed in a manner that scrolls in a predetermined direction (specifically, from top to bottom). The first variable display area ME1 is linked to the pattern display in the lower operating port display section of the main display section, and the pattern is displayed at the timing when the variable display of the pattern starts in the lower operating port display section. The structure is such that the variable display of the symbols is started and the variable display of the symbols ends (the fixed display is started) at the timing when the variable display of the symbols ends (the timing at which the fixed display is started). Then, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot lottery result related to the lower operation opening display section is stopped and displayed, thereby informing the player of the game result. In this embodiment, when a jackpot result is obtained, a combination of simple symbols with the same numbers is stopped and displayed, and when a miss result, at least one number among the three symbol rows is displayed in a different symbol row. A combination of numbers and different simple symbols will be stopped and displayed.

Three symbol rows on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the second variable display area ME2. Each symbol row is made up of the above-mentioned simple symbols arranged in a predetermined order, and the symbols in each symbol row are periodically displayed in a manner that scrolls in a predetermined direction (specifically, from top to bottom). The second variable display area ME2 is linked to the pattern display on the right operating port display section of the main display section, and the pattern is displayed at the timing when the variable display of the pattern starts on the right operating port display section. The structure is such that the variable display of the symbols is started and the variable display of the symbols ends (the fixed display is started) at the timing when the variable display of the symbols ends (the timing at which the fixed display is started). Then, the player is informed of the game result by stop displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the result of the winning lottery regarding the right operating port 883F. In this embodiment, for example, in the case of a jackpot result, a combination of simple symbols with the same number is stopped and displayed, and in the case of a miss result, at least one number out of the three symbol rows is displayed as a combination of other symbols. Combinations of simple symbols that differ from the numbers in the column are displayed in a static manner.

The display contents in the third variable display area ME3 vary depending on the gaming state. FIG. 83(a) shows an example of display contents in a normal gaming state (hereinafter referred to as the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the low frequency support mode and low probability mode, and FIG. 83(b) shows the display contents in the high frequency support mode and the high probability mode. The display contents in the normal game state (hereinafter referred to as the second normal game state) corresponding to the probability mode are illustrated.

Although details will be described later, in the first normal game state, a girl character is displayed in the third variable display area ME3, and the lottery result is clearly indicated by the movement of this character. In the first normal game state, the lottery result based on the prize entered into the lower operating port 859F is announced using the symbol row in the first variable display area ME1 and the character in the third variable display area ME3. .

In the second normal game state, three symbol rows of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set in the third variable display area ME3. Each symbol row is composed of main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. In the third variable display area ME3, the symbols of each of these symbol columns are displayed in a variable manner so as to periodically scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left).

In the upper symbol row, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, the upper symbol row and the lower symbol row are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle pattern row, nine types of main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main pattern of "9" and the main pattern of "1". The main symbols "4" are additionally arranged, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row, 10 main symbols are arranged and it is composed of 20 symbols.

In addition, in the third variable display area ME3, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. There is. Furthermore, five effective lines are set in the third variable display area ME3, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol row → lower symbol row → middle symbol row, and a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) is formed on any active line. When the fluctuating display of all symbol rows ends, it becomes clear that the result is a jackpot.

In the second normal game state, the result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning to the right operating port 883F is announced using the symbol arrays in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3.

Note that in the third variable display area ME3, a display effect such as a reach display is performed. On the other hand, in the first variable display area ME1 and the second variable display area ME2, all symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time when changing from variable display to fixed display, and the above-mentioned reach display etc. The configuration is such that no display effects are performed. In other words, the first variable display area ME1 and the second variable display area ME2 are similar to the third variable display area ME3 in that they have the function of notifying game results, but until the game results are reported, This differs from the third variable display area ME3 in that the process is simplified.

Incidentally, the mode of fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol display device 500F is not limited to the above, but may be arbitrary, and may include the number of symbol rows, the direction of fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set to be arranged vertically, and the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row may be set to be horizontal.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the display mode on the display screen 500aF is specified by the notification/effect control device 140 with reference to the command from the main control device 162, and the details of the display mode are specified based on the specified result. The configuration is determined by the display control device 910F. Here, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 84 to 86, the variable display control process executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140 as part of the regular process will be described. The variable display control process includes a variable display control process for the first/second variable display area and a variable display control process for the third variable display area.

(Variable display control process for first/second variable display area)
In the first/second variable display area variable display control process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress, that is, whether the first variable display area ME1 or the second variable display area ME2 of the symbol display device 500F is It is determined whether or not the variable display of symbols for one game is being executed. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process advances to step S2402, and it is determined whether or not a variation command transmitted from the main controller 162 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S2402, the present variable display control process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, the variation display control process is ended after the variation start process is executed in step S2403. In the process for starting variation, the variation display mode of symbols and the symbol combination to be displayed definitively are determined.

Returning to the explanation of step S2401, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress, the process advances to step S2404. In step S2404, it is determined whether the fluctuation end command transmitted from the main controller 162 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S2404, the fluctuating display control process is finished after executing the fluctuating process in step S2405. The process for during fluctuation is a process for changing the symbol corresponding to the current game round among the symbols currently displayed in the first fluctuation display area ME1 or the second fluctuation display area ME2 in the game round started by the fluctuation start process. be.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2404, the process advances to step S2406, and after executing the process for ending the variation in step S2406, the present variation display control process is ended. In the variation termination process, the variation display of symbols is terminated (determined and stopped) in a manner corresponding to the lottery result related to the game round. Thereafter, this variation termination process is terminated.

(Variable display control process for third variable display area)
In the variable display control process for the third variable display area, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the first normal gaming state. If it is the first normal gaming state, an affirmative determination is made in step S2501 and the process proceeds to step S2502 to execute the first normal gaming state processing. If it is the second normal gaming state, a negative determination is made in step S2501, and the process proceeds to step S2503, where processing for the second normal gaming state is executed.

(Second normal game state processing)
In the process for the second normal game state, first, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress, that is, whether or not the variable display of symbols for one game is being executed in the third variable display area ME3 of the symbol display device 500F. judge. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, it is determined whether or not a variation command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received. If the fluctuation command has not been received, the fluctuation display control process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if a fluctuation command has been received, the fluctuation display control processing is ended after the fluctuation start processing is executed.

If the game is in progress, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation end command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received. If the fluctuation end command has not been received, the second normal game state processing is ended after the fluctuation processing is executed. The process for during fluctuation is a process for executing various performances and changing the determined performance in the game round started by the process for starting fluctuation.

If the fluctuation end command has been received, the second normal game state processing is ended after the fluctuation end processing is executed. In the variation termination process, the variation display of symbols and the performance being executed are terminated (determined and stopped) in a manner that corresponds to the lottery result related to the game round. Specifically, the control is performed so that the symbols are fixed and stopped in the third variable display area ME3. In this process, the speaker section 29 and the lamp section 26 are driven and controlled to perform an effect corresponding to the confirmed stop. Thereafter, this variation termination process is terminated.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the fluctuation start processing in the second normal game state processing. In the fluctuation start process, first, the fluctuation command received this time is read out, and from the command, information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time are specified. Furthermore, as described above, when the main control device 162 transmits the variation command, the type command is also transmitted. The type command received together with the variation command received this time is read out, and from the command, game result information such as probability variable jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, or loss result information is specified. Then, from the information specified above, information on whether there is a jackpot win, information on the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot win, information on whether reach occurs or not when there is no jackpot win, and information on the variable display time. Then, the obtained information is stored in the register of the MPU 652. Next, based on the grasped information, it is determined whether the game result of the game round to be started this time is the game result corresponding to the jackpot result. If it is a jackpot result, that is, if it is a variable probability jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a jackpot performance setting process is executed.

In the performance setting process for the jackpot, the stop result of the jackpot symbol is determined (stop result determination process is performed). In the stop result determination process, in the case of a variable jackpot result, the stop result in which the combination of the same specific symbols (odd-numbered main symbols) on one active line is established as the stop result for this game round. decide. In addition, in the case of a normal jackpot result, a stop result in which a combination of the same non-specific symbols (even numbered main symbols) is established on one active line is determined as the stop result of this game round.

The type of main symbol and active line that will be stopped and displayed in the event of a jackpot result are randomly determined by lottery or the like. The final stop line table stored in various table areas of the ROM 653 stores each valid line and address information, and the final stop line determined by the above processing is stored in the final stop line address memory provided in the RAM 654. It is stored in the area as address information. Also, at this time, processing is executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area. In addition, in the following explanation, the address information of the stop result determined in various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 654.

In addition, in the performance setting process for the jackpot, a variable display mode of the jackpot symbol is determined (variable display mode determination process (performance pattern determination process) is performed). In the case of a jackpot result, the result is notified through a reach display. In the process of determining the variable display mode for displaying the reach, the variable display pattern table for displaying the reach stored in the various table areas of the ROM 653 is acquired, and the variable display time and type of command of the variable command received this time are determined. A performance pattern of normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. Further, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654. In addition, in the variable display mode determination process described below, a corresponding variable display pattern table is obtained from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 653, and a performance pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result is determined. Then, the address information of the performance pattern determined in the performance pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654.

If it is determined that the result is not a jackpot, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. When a reach occurs, a performance setting process for the reach is executed. In the production setting process for generating a reach, the outline of the production and the combination of symbols to be finally stopped are determined. The former process is similar to the above process, so the explanation will be used here. Since this process corresponds to a missed reach, stop symbols are determined so as not to result in a symbol combination that corresponds to a jackpot result. That is, a stop result in which a combination of off-reach symbols is established on one active line is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the types of combinations of out-of-reach symbols and active lines are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In addition, when making this decision, make sure that the same combination of symbols does not occur on any active line, and that the symbols in the middle symbol row that are the same as the symbols that form the reach line are shifted before or after the reach line. The stop result on the effective line is determined so that the final stop is made at the stop position set. Thereafter, a process is executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area.

If it is determined that a reach has not occurred, the outline of the effect for normal failure and the combination of symbols for the final stop are determined. Since this process deals with a complete loss, the stopping symbols are determined in such a way that a symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot result is not formed.

Thereafter, display control (variable display control) of the symbol display device 500F (third variable display area ME3) is performed to execute the performance in the current game round. As a result, the variable display of symbols is started in the third variable display area ME3, and the drive control of the speaker section 29 and lamp section 26 is started based on the effect pattern determined in each of the above processes, and the game cycle is changed. Start the performance.

Next, the first normal game state processing in step S2502 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

(First normal game state processing)
In the first normal game state processing, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not a special performance is being performed. The details will be described later, but the special performance is a performance that is executed based on passing through the performance gate 855F or winning a prize in the lower operation port 859F in the first normal game state. If a negative determination is made in step S2601, the process advances to step S2602.

In step S2602, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the lower operating port 859F. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, special performance start processing is executed in step S2606, and then the first normal game state processing is ended. In the special performance start process, in order to start the special performance, a special performance start command is output to the display control device 910F, BGM corresponding to the special performance is output from the speaker section 29, and the lamp section 26 is made to correspond to the special performance. The light is emitted in such a manner.

Returning to the explanation of step S2602, if it is determined that no winning has occurred in the lower operating port 859F, the process advances to step S2603. In step S2603, it is determined whether or not special effects are currently being restricted. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, after the end of the special performance, the special performance triggered by passing through the performance gate 855F is regulated until a certain period of time has elapsed.

If the special performance is being regulated, the process for the first normal game state is immediately terminated, and if the special performance is not being regulated, it is determined in step S2604 whether or not the game ball has passed through the performance gate 855F. In this embodiment, a ball detection sensor 866F that can detect a game ball passing through the performance gate 855F is provided at the performance gate 855F (see FIG. 82). This ball detection sensor 866F is connected to the notification/performance control device 140, and the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140 detects whether the game ball is at the production gate 855F based on the detection signal (detection information) from the ball detection sensor 866F. Determine whether or not it has passed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2604, the first normal game state processing is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, the process advances to step S2605. In step S2605, special effect timer setting processing is executed. Specifically, the execution time of the special performance is set in the special performance timer counter provided in the various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654. The value of the special effect timer counter is decremented by "1" each time the variable display control process (specifically, the variable display control process for the third variable display area) is executed.

After executing the setting process in step S2605, a special performance start process is executed in step S2606, and then the process for the first normal game state is ended. As described above, in the special performance start process, a special performance start command is output to the display control device 910F, BGM corresponding to the special performance is output from the speaker section 29, and the lamp section 26 is set in a mode corresponding to the special performance. to emit light. The special performance start command output to the display control device 910F includes information indicating whether the current special performance is triggered by passing through the performance gate 855F or winning a prize at the lower operating port 859F. The display control device 910F starts a display corresponding to the special performance based on the special performance start command.

Regarding the special performance that is started upon passing through the performance gate 855F, the execution time of the special performance is determined based on the time required for the game ball that has passed through the performance gate 855F to enter the lower operation opening 859F. There is. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 87, supplementary explanation will be given regarding the required time. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram showing the center route.

The center route is formed so that the time required for the game ball passing through the production gate 855F to enter the lower operation port 859F via the upper croon 856F → lower croon 857F is 3 to 6 seconds. In other words, the required time is configured to be 6 seconds at maximum, although there is some variation depending on the residence time of the game ball in the upper croon 856F and the residence time of the game ball in the lower croon 857F. When a special performance is started upon passing through the performance gate 855F, the execution time of the special performance is set to be longer than the maximum time of 6 seconds (more specifically, 7 seconds). In other words, when a game ball that has passed through the performance gate 855F enters the lower operating port 859F, the special performance that is started upon passing through the relevant performance gate 855F will continue until a winning occurs at the lower operating port 859F. The configuration is such that it is possible to do so.

Returning to the description of the first normal game state process in FIG. 86, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, that is, if the special performance is in progress, the process advances to step S2607. In step S2607, it is determined whether the special performance is in the first phase. The special performance shown in this embodiment is composed of three phases at most, and shifts in the order of the first phase, second phase, and third phase as the performance progresses. The details will be described later, but the special performance that starts when passing through the performance gate 855F basically consists of the first phase, and the special performance that starts when the prize is won at the lower operation gate 859F. Basically consists of the first phase and the second phase. Regardless of the trigger, the image data etc. used for the performance used in the first phase are common, and the starting trigger from the relevant performance is the passage of the performance gate 855F and the winning of the lower operation gate 859F. It is difficult to specify (distinguish) which one it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2607, the process advances to step S2608. In step S2608, it is determined whether it is time to shift to the second phase. Specifically, the transition timing to the second phase is set based on the prize winning at the lower operating port 859F during the special performance, and the timing of the transition to the second phase is set based on the winning at the lower operating port 859F during the special performance. It is determined whether one of the transition timings to the second phase set at the start has arrived. If a negative determination is made in step S2608, the process advances to step S2609. In step S2609, it is determined whether the value of the special performance timer counter has returned to the initial value "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2609, that is, if the special performance (first phase) triggered by passing through the performance gate 855F is in progress, the process advances to step S2610. In step S2610, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the lower operating port 859F. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2610, the process advances to step S2611.

In step S2611, preparation processing for transition to the second phase is executed. If a prize is won at the lower operating port 859F during the special performance (first phase) that is started by passing through the performance gate 855F, the special performance will shift from the first phase to the second phase based on the winning. The transition will take place. In the preparation process for transition to the second phase, the game result and variable display time of the game session to be started this time are specified from the variation command sent from the main control device 162. Then, based on the identified information, the timing of transition to the second phase is determined, and the value of the special effect timer counter is updated so that it becomes the same time as the variable display time. Here, regarding the timing of transition to the second phase, the position of the girl's character image etc. is shifted between the two phases so that the player recognizes that the first phase and the second phase are a series. The timing is adjusted so that it does not occur.

If a negative determination is made in step S2610, that is, if there is no winning in the lower operation opening 859F during the special performance (first phase) that is started upon passing through the performance gate 855F, the process proceeds to step S2612. move on. In step S2612, it is determined whether or not the game ball has reached the lower croon 857F, that is, whether or not the winning into the lower operating port 859F immediately after is determined. Specifically, the ball entry unit 850F is provided with a position detection sensor 868F (see FIG. 82) that detects the position (standby position/descent position) of the lower croon 857F, and this position detection sensor 868F is used for notification and production. It is connected to the control device 140. The MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140 specifies the position of the lower croon 857F based on the detection signal (detection information) from the position detection sensor 868F. As described above, when the game ball reaches the lower croon 857F, the lower croon 857F moves (descends) from the standby position to the lowering position due to the weight of the game ball. In this embodiment, when the lower croon 857F moves to the lowered position, it is determined that the game ball has reached the lower croon 857F.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2612, the process advances to step S2613. In step S2613, a special effect timer counter extension process is executed. As shown in FIG. 87, the time required for the game ball that has reached the lower croon 857F to enter the lower operation port 859F is 0.5 to 2.5 seconds. In other words, although there is some variation in the residence time of the game balls in the lower croon 857F, the required time is configured to be 2.5 seconds at the maximum. In this extension process, the special performance corresponding to the first phase is extended for a time longer than the maximum time of 2.5 seconds (specifically, 3 seconds). This prevents the special performance corresponding to the first phase from ending just before the winning at the lower operating port 859F.

In the following step S2614, background change processing for the display screen 500aF is executed. This changes the background from "day" to "night". In this embodiment, the "daytime" background is normally used, and the "daytime" background may or may not shift to the second phase. On the other hand, when the background is "night", the transition to the second phase is determined. In other words, the "night" background is differentiated to be more advantageous to the player than the "daytime" background.

After executing the background change process in step S2614, or after executing the first phase progression process in step S2615 if a negative determination is made in step S2612, the first normal game state process ends. By executing the first phase progression process, the display contents on the display screen 500aF, the BGM and sound effects output from the speaker section 29, and the light emission mode of the lamp section 26 change as the game progresses. Although the details will be described later, if the special performance is started based on winning the lower operating port 859F, the above background changes from the "day" background to the "night" background at a predetermined timing in the first phase. may be changed.

Returning to the explanation of step S2609, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2609, that is, if the value of the special performance timer counter becomes "0", special performance end processing is executed in step S2616. In the special performance end process, a special performance end command is output to the display control device 910F, the BGM corresponding to the special performance being outputted from the speaker section 29 is stopped, and the light emitting display corresponding to the special performance on the lamp section 26 is ended. . The display control device 910F ends the special performance being executed on the display screen 500aF based on the special performance end command.

Returning to the explanation of step S2608, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2608, that is, if it is time to shift to the second phase, second phase shift processing is executed in step S2617. In the second phase transition process, a second phase transition command is output to the display control device 910F, the BGM and sound effects output from the speaker unit 29 are switched to those corresponding to the second phase, and the lamp unit 26 is activated to emit light. The mode is switched to one corresponding to the second phase. The second phase shift command output to the display control device 910F includes information indicating the game result and information indicating the execution time of the second phase. When the display control device 910F receives the second phase shift command, the display control device 910F identifies the flow of the performance in the second phase from the information indicating the game result in the second phase and the information indicating the execution time of the second phase, and displays the symbols. The display in the device 500F (third variable display area ME3) is switched to one corresponding to the second phase.

Returning to the explanation of step S2607, if a negative determination is made in step S2607, that is, if the special performance corresponding to the second phase or the special performance corresponding to the third phase is in progress, the second/third After executing the phase process, the first normal game state process ends. Here, the second/third phase processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 88.

(2nd/3rd phase processing)
In the second/third phase processing, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not it is the special performance end timing. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the value of the special performance timer counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S2710, the process advances to step S2702. As already explained, the special presentation corresponding to the second/third phase is performed on the assumption that a prize is won at the lower operation port 859F. In step S2702, it is determined whether the result of the lottery based on the winning that triggered the special performance is a losing result. If it is a jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S2702, and special performance end processing is executed in step S2707.

In the special performance end process, a special performance end command is output to the display control device 910F, the BGM corresponding to the special performance being outputted from the speaker section 29 is stopped, and the light emitting display corresponding to the special performance on the lamp section 26 is ended. . The display control device 910F ends the special performance being executed on the display screen 500aF based on the special performance end command.

Thereafter, after executing special performance regulation processing in step S2708, the second/third phase processing ends. By executing the special performance regulation process, passing through the performance gate 855F is disabled until a predetermined time period (in this embodiment, the same length of time as the final display time: 1 sec) has elapsed, and the performance gate 855F is temporarily disabled. Even if the game ball passes through 855F, the special performance is not started using this passage as an opportunity. Note that the restriction is limited to the performance gate 855F, and does not apply to winnings to the lower operating port 859F. If a winning occurs at the lower operation port 859F during regulation, a special performance will be started based on the winning.

Returning to the explanation of step S2702, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, the process advances to step S2703. In step S2703, it is determined whether the transition to the third phase has been completed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2703, the process for the second/third phase is ended after executing the special effect end process in step S2707 and the special effect regulation process in step S2708. If a negative determination is made in step S2703, the process advances to step S2704. In step S2704, it is determined whether a plurality of subsequent holds are stored. If a negative determination is made in step S2704, the process for the second/third phase is ended after executing the special performance end process in step S2707 and the special performance regulation process in step S2708. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2704, the process advances to step S2705. In step S2705, the variable display time and the result of the winning lottery are confirmed for the subsequent hold. After executing the transition process to the third phase in the subsequent step S2706, the second/third phase transition process ends.

If subsequent hold information is stored at the end of the second phase, the system moves to the third phase based on the fact that multiple subsequent holds are stored, and the special effect is essentially extended. ing. At this time, if the number of subsequent holds is 2 and the number of subsequent holds is 3, the special performance corresponding to the 3rd phase will continue until the end of the game round related to 1 hold excluding the final hold, and the number of subsequent holds will be 3. In this case, the special effect corresponding to the third phase will continue until the end of the game round related to the two holds excluding the final hold, and if the number of subsequent holds is four, the three holds excluding the final hold will continue. The extension time of the special performance is determined so that the special performance corresponding to the third phase is continued until the end of the game round. In addition, if the hold that is subject to extension includes one that corresponds to a jackpot result, the special performance corresponding to the third phase will continue until the end of the game round related to the hold that corresponds to the jackpot result. .

Here, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 91, regarding the variable display time table corresponding to the losing result, which is referred to when determining the variable display time in the first normal gaming state, when the number of reservations is "0", , the variable display time is 10 to 20 seconds and the fixed display time is 1 sec, if the number of pending is 1, the variable display time is 0.5 sec and the fixed display time is 1 sec, and if the number of pending is 2, the variable display time is is 0.5 sec and the fixed display time is 1 sec, and when the number of reservations is "3", the variable display time is 0.5 sec and the fixed display time is 1 sec. Even if the third phase is executed over three game times, it will be shorter than the first phase and the second phase.

Returning to the explanation of step S2701 of the second/third phase processing shown in FIG. 88, if a negative determination is made in step S2701, that is, if it is not the end timing of the special performance, the process advances to step S2709. If the second phase is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S2709, and the process advances to step S2710, where a process for proceeding to the second phase is executed. By executing the second phase progression process, the display contents on the display screen 500aF, the BGM and sound effects output from the speaker section 29, and the light emission mode of the lamp section 26 will change in accordance with the progress of the game. If the third phase is in progress, a negative determination is made in step S2709, and the process advances to step S2711, where the third phase proceeding process is executed. By executing the third phase progression process, the display contents on the display screen 500aF, the BGM and sound effects output from the speaker section 29, and the light emission mode of the lamp section 26 will change in accordance with the progress of the game.

Here, the flow of the special performance will be explained with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 89 and 90.

(Flow of special performance)
In the situation where the special performance is not executed in the first normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. A girl character standing with a broom is displayed in the side corner (hereinafter referred to as the standby display).

When the game ball launched to the right route passes through the performance gate 855F or enters the lower operation opening 859F while the special performance is not being executed, the special performance is started with the passing or winning as a trigger. As shown in FIGS. 89(b) and 89(c), in the special effect (first phase), a moving image of a girl character flying astride a broom is displayed. The girl character moves left and right on the display screen 500aF (third variable display area ME3) until the first phase ends.

Here, if the game ball reaches the lower croon 857F during the special performance (first phase) triggered by passing through the performance gate 855F, this will trigger the background displayed on the display screen 500aF to change to " The background changes from "day" to "night" (see FIG. 89(d)). On the other hand, when the chance up timing is reached as part of the special performance (first phase) triggered by a prize win at the lower operation port 859F, the background displayed on the display screen 500aF changes to "Daytime". ” background changes to the “night” background (see FIG. 89(d)). The "night" background is the background that determines the transition to the second phase, and since the transition to the special game state is configured to go through at least the second/third phase, the "night" background This change increases expectations for the transition to a special gaming state.

At the transition timing from the first phase to the second phase, as shown in FIG. 89(e), a fairy character is added to the display screen 500aF (third variable display area ME3), and a message that the girl has encountered a fairy is added. is displayed. From then on, a chase scene will be performed in which the girl chases the fairy. If a relatively short time of 10 seconds is set as the variable display time of the game time that triggered the transition to the second phase, as shown in FIG. 89(f), when the fairy capture fails. is displayed. If a plurality of subsequent holds are not secured by the end of the special performance (corresponding game round), the special performance is ended and the standby display shown in FIG. 89(a) is returned to.

On the other hand, if a relatively long time of 20 seconds is set as the variable display time of the game time that triggered the transition to the second phase, the fairy A message will be displayed indicating that the capture was successful. In this embodiment, capturing the fairy functions as a precursor to the transformation performance, and after the fairy is successfully captured, the girl's transformation challenge performance is started (see FIG. 89(h)). If the current game round corresponds to the jackpot result, a transition is made to the special game state after a display indicating that the transformation challenge performance was successful (see FIG. 89(i)) is made.

If the current game round corresponds to a losing result, a message indicating that the transformation challenge performance has failed is displayed as shown in FIG. 89(j). If a plurality of subsequent holds are not secured by the end of the special performance (corresponding game round), the special performance is ended and the display returns to the standby display shown in FIG. 89(a). On the other hand, if multiple subsequent holds are secured by the end of the special effect (corresponding game round), the special effect will move from the second phase to the third phase, and those subsequent holds will be The special performance will continue throughout the game. Note that since the example of the special effect spans over FIGS. 89 and 90, some descriptions (FIGS. 89(j) and 90(j)) are duplicated for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 90(l), upon transition to the third phase, the girl's transformation challenge performance is restarted. In addition, if multiple subsequent holds are stored in FIG. 89(f) above, the transformation challenge effect is displayed after the display indicating that the fairy has been successfully captured is shown in FIG. 90(q). will be started.

If the subsequent pending game round corresponds to a winning result, a message indicating that the transformation challenge performance has failed is displayed at the end of the last game round corresponding to the third phase (see FIG. 90(n)). ) is completed, the display returns to the standby display shown in FIG. 89(a). On the other hand, if the game round related to the subsequent suspension corresponds to the jackpot result, a message indicating that the transformation challenge performance was successful is displayed at the end of the game round related to the jackpot result (Fig. 90(m)) (see) is completed, the game shifts to a special gaming state.

Here, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 92, a supplementary explanation will be given of the movement of the game ball and the flow of the special performance.

When launching the game ball toward the left route at timing tc0, the launched game ball flows down toward the ball entry unit 850F. As already explained, in order to generate a winning at the lower operating port 859F, it is necessary to flow down the center route. Therefore, basically, the game ball passes through the performance gate 855F before winning the prize at the lower operating port 859F. When the game ball passes through the presentation gate 855F at the timing of tc1, variable display of the symbol starts on the lower operation opening display section of the main display unit 87, and the symbol is displayed in the first variable display area ME1 of the symbol display device 500F. The variable display of will start. In conjunction with this, a special performance (first phase) is started in the third variable display area ME3 of the symbol display device 500F. Note that from then on, the function of the performance gate 855F as a trigger for starting the special performance is disabled until the special performance ends and the above-mentioned restrictions are lifted.

A prize is won to the lower operating port 859F at the timing of tc2 during the execution of the special performance. Regarding the ball entry unit 850F shown in this embodiment, when one game ball enters the lower operating port 859F, there is a chance that the subsequent game ball enters the lower operating port 859F in succession. In the example shown in FIG. 92 as well, winnings to the lower operating port 859F occur continuously at each timing from tc3 to tc6, and the number of reservations increases at once from "0" to the upper limit "4".

Regarding the special performance, instead of immediately transitioning to the second phase at the timing of tc2 when the first prize to the lower operation port 859F occurs, the special performance will be performed at the timing of tc7, when the transition preparation time has passed from the timing of tc2. The production is transitioning from the first phase to the second phase.

In this embodiment, the special performance can be started based on the winning of the lower operating port 859F, and this special performance shifts from the first phase to the second phase. Instead of immediately transitioning to the second phase based on the winning of the lower operation port 859F during the special performance, the above-mentioned interval is provided, so that if the first phase becomes long, the transition to the second phase will occur. This is a device that makes it difficult for players to get the impression that they cannot expect the same.

At timing tc8, after a preset variable display time has elapsed from timing tc2, the confirmation display for the first prize has been completed on the lower operation opening display section of the main display unit 87. This game round corresponds to a losing result, and a plurality of subsequent holds are stored. Therefore, at the timing of tc8, the special performance that was being executed in the third variable display area ME3 of the symbol display device 500F shifts from the second phase to the third phase, and the special performance ( The third phase) continues. In the third phase, the game results of three games are announced by one transformation challenge performance, so the expectation level of a jackpot result is higher than in the second phase.

According to the fifth embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

When the non-electric accessory 858F of the ball entry unit 850F is in the first guiding state, the upper croon 856F (corresponding to the "distributing means") moves the non-electric accessory 858F to the first branch passage section 865F (the "first special channel"). The game balls sorted to the players (equivalent) are guided to the lower operating port 859F by the non-electric accessory 858F. That is, in the first guide state, the winning route to the lower operating port 859F is limited to the first branch passage portion 865F. On the other hand, when the non-electric accessory 858F is in the second guiding state, not only the game balls distributed to the first branch passage section 864F by the upper clone 856F but also the second branch passage section 865F (" 2 special flow path), and even game balls that flow down the side route without passing through the production gate 855F, are guided to the lower operating port 859F by the non-electric accessory 858F. becomes. In this way, game balls that are likely to miss through the production gate 855F without reaching the upper croon 856F, or game balls that are on the out-shot side after being sorted by the upper croon 856F, will also be given the chance to win at the lower operation opening 859F. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's attention level even for game balls flowing down other than the center route, and contribute to an increase in the attention level to the game.

When one game ball enters the lower operating port 859F, it becomes easier for subsequent game balls to enter the lower operating port 859F, and the winnings to the lower operating port 859F continue. In this way, if the system is configured such that winnings occur continuously using the winning of 1 as a trigger, it is possible to create a bias in the frequency of winnings to the lower operating port 859F, so that game rounds are executed in quick succession or game rounds are not executed at all. By doing this, you can enhance the variety of the game progress. This can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

For the game balls separated into the upper route and the lower route by the windmill 94, there is a difference in the time required for movement by the non-electric accessory 858F to reach the acceptable position. Thereby, when both the preceding game ball and the following game ball head toward the lower operating port 859F, it is possible to easily cause a change in the density of winning frequency (span) of the game ball. In particular, when the game ball goes through the side route (lower route → non-motorized accessory 858F), the time required is longer than when the game ball goes through the center route (upper route → upper croon 856F → non-motorized accessory 858F). The time required will be shorter. As a result, when the preceding game ball passes through the center route and the subsequent game ball passes through the side route, the subsequent game ball approaches the preceding game ball, making it easier for consecutive wins to occur. In particular, increasing the time required to travel down the relatively advantageous center route and shorten the time required to travel down the relatively less advantageous side route will increase player attention. preferred above.

When the game ball flowing down toward the lower operating port 859F lands on the rolling surface 875F of the lower croon 857F, the lower croon 857F is displaced from the standby position to the lowered position. As the non-electric accessory 858F switches from the first guide state to the second guide state as it moves to the lowered position, it becomes easier to flow into the lower operating port 859F, and winnings to the lower operating port 859F continue. Become. If the game balls placed on the rolling surface 875F are configured to move from the standby position to the lowered position depending on their weight, the winning frequency can be biased with a simple configuration, and the control load related to game progress can be reduced. It becomes possible to suppress the increase.

While the preceding game ball is rolling on the rolling surface 875F of the lower croon 857F, the non-electric accessory 858F is maintained in the second guiding state. In this way, by delaying the timing at which the preceding game ball enters the lower operation port 859F and waiting for the arrival of the subsequent game ball, it is possible to visually check the successive winnings, increasing player satisfaction. can be suitably increased.

The lower croon 857F is configured such that the orientation of the rolling surface 875F when it is placed in the standby position is the same as the orientation of the rolling surface 875F when it is placed in the lowered position. According to this configuration, when the lower croon 857F descends due to the game ball being placed on the lower croon 857F, disturbances in the behavior of the game ball can be suppressed by avoiding changes in the posture of the lower croon 857F. Suppressing the disturbance in the behavior of the game ball in this way is preferable in order to increase the degree of attention to the game ball on the lower croon 857F.

The storage upper limit of the reservation information related to the lower operating port 859F is smaller than the maximum number of game balls that can be positioned on the rolling surface 875F of the lower croon 857F. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the number of consecutive winnings to the lower operating port 859F and to suppress an excessive number of winnings in which a jackpot lottery is not performed. This is preferable in order to suppress the feeling of exhilaration caused by consecutive winnings from decreasing.

Note that the lower croon 857F is configured such that the game ball cannot reach the lower croon 857F without passing through the non-electric accessory 858F. In this way, by narrowing down the opportunity to start continuous winnings to the lower operating port 859F, it is possible to suppress starting continuous winnings at unintended timing. In this way, by reducing the chance of missing the start of consecutive winnings, it is possible to suitably bring out the effect of increasing the attention level due to consecutive winnings.

By executing an effect linked to the fluctuating display of the symbols on the actuating opening display section on the display screen 500aF of the symbol display device 500F, the process (display mode) up to the notification of the jackpot lottery result can be diversified, thereby improving the game. Monotony can be suppressed. Although it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game with such a configuration, the following inconvenience may occur because the presence or absence of performance depends on the winning of the lower operating port 859F. That is, as the period during which no performance is performed becomes longer, it becomes noticeable that no winnings have been made to the lower operation opening 859F, which may become a factor that reduces the player's desire to play. Here, in the present embodiment, the production gate 855F (corresponding to the "passing section") is arranged at a position where the frequency of passage of the game ball is higher than the frequency of winning to the lower operation opening 859F, and the game ball is A special performance is started (advance start) on the display screen 500aF upon passing through the gate 855F, and the special performance can be ended based on winning at the lower operation port 859F. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an excessively long non-performance period in which no performance is executed on the display screen 500aF, and to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game. This is preferable in order to suppress a decrease in the desire to play.

The performance gate 855F, which is the trigger for starting the special performance, is arranged on the upstream side of the lower operation opening 859F, which is the trigger for ending the special performance. With this arrangement, the effect of suppressing the extension of the non-performance period can be suitably exerted. In addition, by arranging the production gate 855F on the flow path toward the lower operation port 859F and making it possible for the game ball that passed through the production gate 855F to enter the lower operation port 859F, one game ball can be special. There may be cases where it serves as the start and end opportunity for the performance. This makes it possible to provide a relationship between the special performance and the movement of the game ball.

When a special performance is started based on the game ball passing through the performance gate 855F, the execution time of the special performance is set. If the execution time has elapsed without any winnings being entered into the lower actuation port 859F, the special performance is ended. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get the impression that the special performance is completely unrelated to winning at the lower operation port 859F.

The transition of the special performance from the first phase to the second phase increases expectations for the transition to the special gaming state. If the above-mentioned execution time elapses without any winnings occurring at the lower operation gate 859F during the special performance triggered by passing through the performance gate 855F, the transition to the second phase will be avoided and the jackpot lottery will not be held. This avoids displaying a display with a high level of expectation even though there is no display. In this way, by suppressing the player's sense of expectation from being implicitly aroused, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of the player's attention being reduced even though the situation is worthy of attention. This is preferable in order to suitably exhibit the attention-grabbing effect of the special performance.

In this embodiment, not only is a special effect executed on the display screen 500aF (more specifically, the third variable display area ME3) based on winnings to the lower operating port 859F, but also the flow toward the lower operating port 859F is A special performance may be executed on the display screen 500aF (third variable display area ME3) based on the game ball passing through the performance gate 855F arranged on the road. These special performances are configured so that at least a part of each special performance, including the beginning part, is recognized by the player as being the same. Therefore, when a special performance is executed, there remains a possibility of winning a prize through the lower operation port 859F, and the degree of attention to the special performance can be suitably improved.

A special performance based on winning the lower operating port 859F is executed with priority over a special performance based on passing through the performance gate 855F. In this way, the special performance based on passing through the performance gate 855F is positioned as an auxiliary, so that the special performance based on winning at the lower operation gate 859F is the main part, and the game progress is facilitated, and the special performance is This is preferable in order to increase attention.

The execution time of the special performance based on passing through the performance gate 855F is set to be shorter than the execution time of the special performance based on winning at the lower operation port 859F. In order to achieve the above-mentioned auxiliary function, it is preferable to suppress the prolongation of the special performance, which is not substantially related to whether or not the transition to the special gaming state is possible.

If a prize is won at the lower operating port 859F during the special performance that is started upon passing through the performance gate 855F, the special performance will be continued. Here, the execution time of the special performance triggered by passing through the performance gate 855F is longer than the time required for the game ball flowing down the center route to reach the lower operation port 859F from the performance gate 855F. ing. Therefore, the special performance started by passing through the performance gate 855F ends immediately before the prize is entered into the lower operation port 859F, thereby reducing the chance that the start/end of the special performance will be repeated, that is, there will be a blank between special performances. be able to.

In the ball entry unit 850F shown in this embodiment, the visibility of the production gate 855F is higher (more conspicuous) than the visibility of the lower operation opening 859F. Then, since a special performance is started on the display screen 500aF based on passing through the performance gate 855F, it is shown as if the performance gate 855F is an "operating opening". Comparing the number of prizes entered through the lower operating port 859F per unit time and the number of passes through the presentation gate 855F, the latter is higher than the former, so compared to conventional gaming machines, the It is possible to give the player the impression that winnings are occurring frequently. In this way, it is possible to improve the player's satisfaction level while suppressing changes in the advantage of the game by making it appear as if winnings are occurring frequently in the "operating opening".

<Modification 1>
In the fifth embodiment, when the lower croon 857F is pushed down by the game ball and moves to the lowering position, the non-electric accessory 858F that guides the game ball to the lower croon 857F changes from the first guiding state to the first guiding state. It switches to the second guide state in which the flow into the inlet 878F is more likely to occur than in the guide state, and the non-electric accessory 858F is maintained in the second guide state until the game ball leaves the lower croon 857, thereby causing the lower operation. The configuration is such that the frequency of winnings to the mouth 859F is biased (continuous winnings occur). As long as it is possible to create a bias in the frequency of winnings to the lower operating port 859F, the specific configuration and operation mode of the non-electric accessory 858F may be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the non-motorized accessory 858F switches to the second guidance state, the non-motorized accessory 858F will switch to the second guidance state if a predetermined period of time has passed since the switching, regardless of whether or not a game ball is placed on the lower croon 857F. It is also possible to configure the system to return to the 1 guidance state. By performing such forced switching, it is possible to suppress excessive successive winnings to the lower operating port 859F.

<Modification 2>
In the fifth embodiment, the special performance (first phase) is newly started based on passing through the performance gate 855F, and the special performance (first phase) is newly started based on winning at the lower operation port 859F. At least the opening part (first phase) is the same for both performances (phase), and it is possible to identify by looking at the performance which one is triggered by passing through the performance gate 855F or winning a prize at the lower operation port 859F. Although the configuration is made such that it is difficult, the present invention is not limited to this. The special effects may be different depending on the starting opportunity.

In addition, when a winning occurs at the lower operation port 859F during a special performance that is started based on passing through the performance gate 855F and the first phase shifts to the second phase, if both phases are continuous, the player Although the display has been given a relationship so that it can be recognized in the first phase, it is not necessarily necessary to give a relationship between the first phase and the second phase.

Note that both the execution area of the effect executed based on winning to the lower operation opening 859F and the execution area of the effect executed based on passage of the effect gate 855F are the third variable display area ME3 of the display screen 500aF. Although it is configured so that the execution area for each effect is individually provided.

<Modification 3>
In the fifth embodiment, the initial execution time of the special performance that is started based on passing through the performance gate 855F is set to be uniform (7 seconds in detail), but the invention is not limited to this. . It is sufficient if the initial execution time is longer than the time required for the game ball to move from the production gate 855F to the lower operation port 859F. For example, this does not negate a configuration in which a plurality of initial execution time candidates are provided (for example, 7 sec, 8 sec, 9 sec) and one is selected from these candidates.

<Modification 4>
In the fifth embodiment, the initial execution time of the special performance that is started based on passing through the performance gate 855F is longer than the time required for the game ball to move from the performance gate 855F to the lower operation opening 859F. However, the settings are not limited to this. For example, it is possible to set the time to be shorter than the time required for the game ball to move from the production gate 855F to the lower operating port 859F. As shown in the fifth embodiment, in the configuration in which any game ball that reaches the lower croon 857F enters the lower operating port 859F, the execution time is such that the game ball moves from the presentation gate 855F to the lower croon 857F. It is sufficient if the setting is longer than the time required to do so. It is also possible to set the initial execution time independently of the above various required times, but in such a configuration, the performance related to passing through the performance gate 855F and the performance related to winning the lower operation gate 859F. become more easily separated in time. Therefore, in order to strengthen the sense of unity of each performance and improve the degree of attention to the game, it is preferable to have the relationship between the execution time and the required time as shown in the fifth embodiment and the like.

<Modification 5>
In the fifth embodiment, when the non-electric accessory 858F is in the second guide state (open state), the game that passes through the first branch passage section 864F, which is the winning route in the upper croon 856F, It is configured so that not only balls, but also game balls that have passed through the second branch passage section 865F, which is the outgoing route in the upper croon 856F, and even game balls that have not passed through the upper croon 856F, can be guided to the lower croon 857F. , but is not limited to this. When the non-electric accessory 858F is in the second guidance state (open state), the guidance target is the game ball that has passed the winning route in the upper croon 856F and the game ball that has passed the losing route in the upper croon 856F. It may be limited, or it may be limited to game balls that have passed the winning route in the upper croon 856F and game balls that have not passed through the upper croon 856F.

<Modification 6>
In the fifth embodiment, the start of the special performance based on passing through the performance gate 855F is regulated for a certain period (regulation period) after the end of the special performance, but the conditions for performing the regulation are You may change it as follows. In other words, the above regulation may be performed only when the special performance ends without transitioning from the first phase to the second phase (when no winning occurs at the operating port during the first phase). In other words, when the special performance shifts from the first phase to the second phase (when a winning occurs in the lower operating port 859F during the first phase), the above-mentioned regulation may not be performed.

Although the regulation period is set to have the same length as the final display period of the picture on the actuating port display section of the main display unit 87, the length of the regulation period may be changed arbitrarily.

<Modification 7>
In the fifth embodiment described above, when it is detected that the lower croon 857F has moved to the lowering position during the execution of the special effect (first phase), that is, when it is determined that a game ball is placed on the lower croon 857F. In this case, the execution time of the first phase was extended so that the time required for the game ball to move from the lower croon 857F to the lower operating port 859F was extended, but in reality It is also possible to configure the first phase to be extended until a winning occurs.

<Modification 8>
In the fifth embodiment described above, when a winning occurs in the lower operation port 859F during the special performance, the transition to the second phase is delayed instead of immediately transitioning to the second phase. It may be configured to immediately shift to the second phase when a winning occurs in the lower operating port 859F during the performance.

<Modification 9>
A configuration may also be adopted in which a prize ball is awarded to the player based on the game ball passing through the performance gate 855F.

<Modification 10>
In the fifth embodiment, the production gate 855F is arranged on the flow path where the game ball goes to the lower operating port 859F, but it is not possible to arrange the production gate 855F at a position away from the flow path. isn't it. That is, it is also possible to configure such a configuration that the game balls that have passed through the performance gate 855F are excluded from the winning target for the lower operating port 859F.

<Modification 11>
In the fifth embodiment, the lower croon 857F is formed so that the upper limit number of game balls that can be positioned on the lower croon 857F is greater than the number of reserved balls that can be stored, but the invention is not limited to this. . The lower croon may be formed such that the upper limit number of game balls that can be positioned on the lower croon is smaller than the memorizable number of reservations, or the upper limit number of game balls that can be positioned on the lower croon can be stored. The lower croon may be formed to match the number of reservations.

<Modification 12>
It may be configured such that as the number of game balls located on the lower croon 857F increases, the staying time of the game balls on the lower croon 857F becomes shorter. For example, if the exit part of the lower croon is arranged near the outer periphery of the lower croon instead of the center, and the number of game balls located on the lower croon reaches a certain number, the rolling surface will be at the exit of the lower croon. An attitude variable mechanism may be provided that changes the attitude of the lower croon (rolling surface) so that it slopes downward toward the lower part.

<Modification 13>
In the fifth embodiment, the ball detection sensor 866F for the performance gate 855F is connected to the notification/performance control device, but if the notification/performance control device 140 can determine whether or not the performance gate 855F has passed. Alternatively, the connection destination of the ball detection sensor 866F may be changed to another control device such as a main control device or a display control device.

<Sixth embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment, the performance gate 855F is used as the trigger for starting the special performance. On the other hand, the performance gate 855F shown in this embodiment has a function as a trigger for starting a special performance, and also functions as a symbol display device 500F ( This embodiment differs from the fifth embodiment in that it has a function as a trigger for changing part of the display (specifically, the pending display) on the display screen 500aF). The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the fifth embodiment.

First, with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94, the configuration related to the hold display in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram showing the display screen 500aF of the symbol display device 500F, FIG. 94(a) is a flowchart showing processing corresponding to commands for pending display control by the MPU 912F of the display control device 910F, and FIG. 94(b) is an overview of pending display FIG.

A hold display area NE is provided at the bottom of the display screen 500aF, specifically, below the third variable display area ME3. In the holding display area NE, unit holding display areas Da1 to Da4 of the same number as the maximum holding number when a game ball enters the lower operating opening 859F are divided so as to be lined up in the left and right direction. A holding number display area Da and a unit holding display area Db1 to Db4 of the same number as the maximum holding number when a game ball enters the right actuation port 883F are partitioned so that they are lined up in the left and right direction. A pending number display area Db is provided. A hold icon MP (pending display image) is displayed according to the number of hold information stored in these unit hold display areas Da1 to Da4, Db1 to Db4.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the lower operation port 859F, the maximum number of balls to be held is 4, and correspondingly, the number-of-retention display area Da for the lower operation port includes a first unit hold display area. Da1, a second unit pending display area Da2, a third unit pending display area Da3, and a fourth unit pending display area Da4 are set. In addition, when a game ball enters the right operating port 883F, the maximum number of reserved balls is 4, and correspondingly, the reserved number display area Db for the lower operating port includes the first unit pending display area Db1, the A 2 unit pending display area Db2, a 3rd unit pending display area Db3, and a 4th unit pending display area Db4 are set. For example, when the number of reservations related to the lower operation port 859F is "1", the reservation icon MP is displayed in the first unit reservation display area Da1, and when the number of reservations related to the lower operation port 859F is "4", the reservation icon MP is displayed in the first unit reservation display area Da1. A hold icon MP is displayed in each of the 1st unit hold display area Da1 to the 4th unit hold display area Da4. In addition, in FIG. 93, a case is illustrated in which the number of particles held at the lower operating port 859F is three, and the number of particles held at the right operating port 883F is zero.

In addition, in the hold display area NE, hold icons MP corresponding to the game rounds to be executed (currently being executed) are displayed side by side with the hold number display area Da (more specifically, the first unit hold display area Da1). An execution target display area Dc to be displayed is provided. In this embodiment, the execution target display area Dc is arranged on the left side of the pending number display area Da, but the positional relationship between these areas is arbitrary. For example, the execution target display area Dc may be arranged on the right side of the pending number display area Da.

When a game round ends and you move on to the next game round, the hold icon MP displayed in the hold count display areas Da, Db (more specifically, the first unit hold display areas Da1, Db1) is the execution target display area. It will be shifted (moved) to Dc. If there are other pending icons MP being displayed in the pending number display areas Da and Db, those pending icons MP will be placed on the (adjacent) side of the execution target display area Dc in conjunction with the shift in question. Shift to display area. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the side closer to the execution target display area Dc will be referred to as the "downstream side", and the side opposite to the execution target display area Dc will be referred to as the "upstream side".

In the present embodiment, the performance related to the reservation notice that suggests the contents of the reservation information stored in the reservation ball storage area 632 of the RAM 606 is performed at a predetermined probability before the game round related to the reservation information is started. It is configured to be executed. Since the performance corresponding to the pending information that has not yet been selected for the lottery is executed at a timing before the game session related to the pending information, it is convenient for the player to perform the performance corresponding to the game session currently in progress. In addition to the game of checking the lottery result of pending information, a game of confirming or predicting the result when the pending information that will later become a lottery target has been added according to the content of the above-mentioned production. Diversification will be achieved. Thereby, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Regarding this pending notice, one is executed in conjunction with the above-mentioned fluctuating display of symbols in the variable display area ME of the display screen 500aF, and the other is executed in conjunction with a change in the mode of pending display in the pending display area NE of the display screen 500aF. It is broadly divided into things that are executed. Among these, for the pending notice executed in the pending display area NE, the pending display on the display screen 500aF is used. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 94(a) and the schematic diagram in FIG. Display control command corresponding processing) will be explained. The hold display control command corresponding process is a process executed as part of a regular process that is started at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment).

(Command compatible processing for hold display control)
As shown in FIG. 94(a), in the hold display control command corresponding process, first in step S2801, it is determined whether a hold command is received from the main control device 162 via the notification/effect control device 140. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, one is added to the value of the pending number counter (the pending memory number SN) provided in the various counter areas of the work RAM 914F in step S2802.

After executing the update process in step S2802, the process advances to step S2803, executes pending display addition processing, and ends this pending display control command corresponding process. The number of pending memories SN mentioned above corresponds to the pending display area of the video RAM 917F. When setting the display of the hold icon MP in the hold display addition process, hold display information (for details, the hold display information stored in the hold image data storage area) is displayed in a unit area corresponding to the hold storage number SN in the hold display area 281 address of the pending image) is set. In each of the unit pending display areas Da1 to Da4 and Db1 to Db4 of the pending number display areas Da and Db on the display screen 500aF, the pending icon MP is additionally displayed in accordance with the data written in each unit area.

For example, as shown in FIG. 94(b1), in a situation where the hold icon MP is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 and the second unit hold display area Da2, that is, the hold memory number SN=“2”. When a hold command is received under the above situation, the hold storage number SN changes from "2" to "3", and hold display information is set in the third unit area of the hold display area. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 94(b2), the hold icon MP is displayed in the third unit hold display area Da3.

Returning to the explanation of step S2801, if a negative determination is made in step S2801, the process advances to step S2804. In step S2804, it is determined whether a shift command is received from the main control device 162 via the notification/effect control device 140. If a negative determination is made in step S2804, this pending display control command corresponding processing is immediately terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2804, the process advances to step S2805. In step S2805, the value of the pending number counter (the pending memory number SN) provided in the pending counter area of the work RAM 914F is subtracted by 1.

In the following step S2806, a shift process is executed, and this pending display control command corresponding process is ended. In the shift process, the hold display information set in the first unit area of the hold display area is moved to the execution display area, and the hold display information set in the first unit area of the hold display area is moved to the execution display area, and the hold display information set in the first unit area of the hold display area is moved to the execution display area. The pending display information set in the unit area to the fourth unit area is sequentially shifted to the lower area side.

Specifically, the pending display information in the first unit area is moved to the execution display area, and the information is transferred from the second unit area to the first unit area, from the third unit area to the second unit area, and from the fourth unit area to the third unit. The pending display information within each unit area is shifted in the following manner.

For example, as shown in FIG. 94(b1), in a situation where the hold icon MP is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 and the second unit hold display area Da2, that is, the hold memory number SN=“2”. If a shift command is received under such a situation, the number of pending memories SN changes from "2" to "1". Along with this, the pending display information in the execution display area 282 is erased, the pending display information in the first unit area is in the execution display area 282, the pending display information in the second unit area is in the first unit area, and the pending display information in the third unit area is in the first unit area. The pending display information in the unit area is shifted to the second unit area. As a result, as shown in FIG. 94(b3), the pending icon MP is displayed in the execution target display area Dc and the first unit pending display area Da1.

Here, in the hold image data storage area, hold icons MP of a plurality of different colors (more specifically, 4 types, white, blue, yellow, and red) are stored as a hold image group, and each color corresponds to the above-mentioned address. are different. When setting the hold display information, the notification/effect control device 140 determines which color to display depending on the presence/absence of the above-mentioned hold notice, etc. 140, it is incorporated into the suspension command by the notification/effect control device 140. In other words, the display control device 910F reads information regarding the color from the received hold command to determine which color the address corresponds to is to be set as the hold display information.

Next, a description will be given of processing related to a pending notice executed by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162. Processes related to pending notices include confirmation processing for pending notices and processing for setting pending commands, and each of these processes is performed by the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 (for details, see FIG. 95). This constitutes a part of the information acquisition process shown in (1). In other words, the confirmation process for the pending notice and the setting process for the pending command are executed based on winnings to the operating ports 859F and 883F. The confirmation process for pending notice and the setting process for a pending command will be described below with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 96 and 97. Note that the information acquisition process shown in this embodiment is the same as the information acquisition process shown in the first embodiment except for the confirmation process for pending notice and the setting process for the pending command. The explanation will be omitted.

(Confirmation process for pending notice)
In the confirmation process for reservation notice, in step S3001, the starting reservation memory number N and the common reservation number CRN stored in the reservation number storage area FE of the reservation ball storage area 632 are read, and the information on the reservation number is sent to the MPU 602. Store in register. Thereafter, in steps S3002 to S3006, it is checked whether the pending information acquired by the current prize winning includes information about the jackpot winning.

Specifically, first, in step S3002, information for jackpot determination among the pending information obtained in step S2904 based on the current winning to the operating ports 859F and 883F, that is, the value of the obtained jackpot random number counter C1 is determined. grasp.

In the following step S3003, it is determined whether the mode is low probability mode. Specifically, by determining whether a high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, it is determined whether the current win/fail lottery mode is a low probability mode. If it is the low probability mode, the process advances to step S3004, and the information for jackpot determination (value of jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S3002 by referring to the low probability mode win/fail table is information corresponding to jackpot winning. Identify whether it is included in a group. If the mode is high probability mode, the process advances to step S3005, and the jackpot determination information (value of jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S2902 is determined to be a jackpot win by referring to the high probability mode win/fail table. Identify what is included in the set information.

After step S3004 or step S3005, the process advances to step S3006, and it is determined whether the information for jackpot determination (value of jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S3002 corresponds to jackpot winning. If it corresponds to a jackpot win, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S3007, and the confirmation process for the reservation notice is ended.

In addition, in the process of step S3007, the information for jackpot type determination among the pending information acquired in step S2904 based on the current winning is grasped, that is, the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2, and the distribution table is referred to. to determine the type of jackpot. The information stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S3007 includes information regarding the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3006, the process advances to step S3008. In step S3008, information for out-of-reach determination among the pending information acquired in step S2904 based on the current winnings to the operating ports 859F and 883F, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

In the subsequent step S3009, the reach determined in step S3008 is determined by referring to the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 603. It is determined whether the information for determination (the value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as a reach win.

After executing the process in step S3009, the process advances to step S3010, and it is determined whether the reach determination information (value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S3008 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach, in step S3011, the information on the occurrence of a reach is stored in the register of the MPU 602, and then this confirmation process is ended. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, this confirmation process is ended as is.

(Pending command setting process)
Next, the pending command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 97.

In the pending command setting process, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 602. It is determined whether the information is identified as corresponding to a jackpot win. If the jackpot information is stored, the process advances to step S3102, and a jackpot response pending command is set. Note that setting of the above commands and setting of various commands to be described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 604. The jackpot response pending command includes information regarding the type of jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3101, that is, if it is determined that jackpot information is not stored in the register of the MPU 602, the process advances to step S3103, and a check is made as to whether or not reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 602. By determining , it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination was identified as corresponding to the occurrence of reach in the immediately preceding confirmation process for pending notice (FIG. 96). If the reach occurrence information is stored, an out-of-reach response suspension command is set in step S3104, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, a complete out-of-reach response retention command is set in step S3105.

When setting a pending command in steps S3102, S3104, and S3105, the variable display time is determined by referring to the value of the variable type counter CS, and information related to the variable display time is stored in the pending command. . When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referred to in the same way as in the variable display time setting process described above. The hold command set in this way is sent to the display control device 910F via the notification/performance control device 140, and the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 910F display the symbols based on the hold command. It becomes possible to understand the fluctuation display mode, etc. Note that, as already explained, in the case of a complete loss, the variable display time may change depending on the number of pending information stored when starting the game round related to the pending information. Therefore, when setting a complete failure handling hold command, a temporary setting of the variable display time is performed.

After executing the command setting process in step S3102, step S3104, or step S3105, in step S3106, a process of setting information on the number of pending items for the above-mentioned pending command is executed. Specifically, the information of the suspended command set above is configured as multiple bytes of information, and some of the bits are filled with information indicating that the command itself is a suspended command, or information indicating that the command itself is a suspended command. Information on the type of items is included, and information on the number of items on hold can be set.

In step S3106, first, the information on the number of pending items stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S3001 in the confirmation process for the immediately preceding pending notice (FIG. 96) is read, and then the information on the number of pending items in the pending command that has already been set is read out. The information on the number of reservations read out above is stored in the information bits by arithmetic processing such as logical sum. As a result, information for specifying the number of pending information corresponding to the pending command set in step S3102, step S3104, or step S3105 is provided. will be included. After executing the process of step S3106 detailed above, this pending command setting process ends.

The hold command in which the information on the number of hold items is included in step S3106 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 140 by external output processing in the next normal process. The notification/effect control device 140 specifies that the amount of pending information has increased by receiving such a pending command. In addition, the notification/effect control device 140 adds information for a pending preview, which will be described later, to the pending command and transmits it to the display control device 910F. The display control device 910F executes processing for displaying a hold, a hold notice, etc. based on the received hold command.

In addition, how to set the hold command is to use the hold command in the display control device 910F to determine whether or not there is a jackpot win, if it is a jackpot win, the type of jackpot at that time, and if it is not a jackpot win, whether or not a reach has occurred, etc. It is arbitrary as long as the variation display mode of the symbol can be specified. For example, combinations of a hold command for jackpot, a hold command for out-of-reach, and a hold command for complete loss are set individually corresponding to each hold number, and in the hold command setting process, the hold notice confirmation process ( It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one pending command is selected depending on the confirmation result in FIG. 96).

Next, a description will be given of the processing related to the pending notice executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140. The processing related to the pending notice is roughly divided into a command corresponding process that determines the command from the main control device 162 and a pending notice performance setting process that determines the mode of the pending notice.

(Pending command handling process)
In the pending command processing, when a pending command transmitted by the main control device 162 is received, processing corresponding to information included in the received pending command is executed. Note that the pending command handling process is executed as part of a regular process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

In the pending command handling process, first, it is determined whether or not a pending command has been received. The command received by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140 is temporarily stored in the command storage area 672 of the RA 654. The command storage area 672 is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out the previously stored commands, so even if multiple commands are received at the same time, they are Processes corresponding to each command can be executed well. In determining whether or not a corresponding pending command has been received, it is determined whether or not a jackpot corresponding pending command has been received in the area to be read this time in the command storage area 672. Note that the configuration for reading out such a command is the same for reading out other commands such as the fluctuation start command.

When a hold command is received, various information included in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area. The pending information storage area has first area Rc1 to fourth area Rc4 for the lower operating port 859F and first area Rd1 to fourth area Rd4 for the right operating port 883F, and one pending information storage area for each area. It has a configuration that allows it to store. The pending information stored in each area Rc1 to Rc4 and Rd1 to Rd4 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side by receiving a shift command from the main controller 162, that is, when a game round is started. Become. Specifically, while clearing the data of the first areas Rc1, Rd1, the data of the second areas Rc2, Rd2 → first areas Rc1, Rd1, third areas Rc3, Rd3 → second areas Rc2, Rd2, fourth area Rc4 , Rd4→third area Rc3, Rd3, and so on. Data in each area is shifted in this manner. Also in the hold information storage area of the notification/performance control device 140, hold information is stored in chronological order according to the destination of the ball, similar to the hold ball storage area 632 (specifically, hold area RE) of the main control device 162. The structure is as follows. In detail, the information indicating the winning destination and the number of reservations included in the command received this time is specified, and the information of the specified winning destination and the number of reservations among the first area Rc1, Rd1 to fourth area Rc4, Rd4 is specified. The various types of information mentioned above are stored in areas corresponding to the information.

Note that when the above-mentioned pending command is received, a pending command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654, and when a shift command is received, a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 676. . Each of these flags serves as a trigger for a setting process for a pending preview performance to be described below, and is erased when the setting process for a pending preview performance is completed.

The MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140 performs a setting process for a pending notice performance based on the information stored in the pending information storage area. Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 98, the setting process for pending notice effect will be explained. Note that the pending notice performance setting process is a process that is executed as part of a regular process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

(Setting process for pending notice performance)
In the pending notice performance setting process, first, it is determined whether the pending notice performance is regulated. Specifically, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not a pending preview production regulation flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, the main suspension notice performance setting process is immediately terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S3201, the process advances to step S3202.

In step S3202, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main controller 162. Specifically, it is determined whether a pending command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, a lottery process upon reception of a hold command is executed in step S3203.

In the lottery process when a hold command is received, the lottery target for the hold notice is limited to the hold information newly added this time. That is, based on the information stored in the area corresponding to the currently received pending command among the first area Rc1 to fourth area Rc4 and the first area Rd1 to fourth area Rd4 provided in the pending information storage area of the RAM 654. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to receive a notice of suspension. In this lottery, it is determined from the stored information whether or not the game round related to the pending information is a jackpot, whether or not a reach display is performed, and if a reach display is performed, the pattern is grasped, and the results are determined accordingly. The lottery is held based on the lottery table and the value of a lottery counter for pending notice provided in the lottery counter area 674.

In this embodiment, special performances A to C are provided as the special performances, and differences are provided so that the expectation level of jackpot increases in the order of special performance A < special performance B < special performance C. In the lottery table storage area of the ROM 653, there are a lottery table for jackpots, a lottery table for special performance A that loses, a lottery table for special performance B that loses, and a lottery table for special performance C that loses as lottery tables for when a pending command is received. A lottery table and a complete loss lottery table are stored. Regarding these various tables, there will be a lottery table for jackpot > a lottery table for special performance C that won't win > a lottery table for special performance B that won > a lottery table for special performance A that won > a lottery table for a complete loss. It is designed to increase the probability of winning. More specifically, for the game round that is the trigger for starting the special performance or transitioning to the second phase, there will be a lottery table for jackpots, a lottery table for special performance A that loses, a lottery table for special performance B that loses, and a special performance that loses. Either the lottery table for C or the lottery table for complete losers is referred to, and for the game round in which the special effect corresponding to the third phase is executed, either the lottery table for jackpots or the lottery table for complete losers is referred to. Distinguished as referenced.

In addition, in the first normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode and low probability mode, the former of the suspension information related to the lower operation port 859F and the suspension information related to the right operation port 883F is subject to suspension notice, and the high frequency support mode and in the second normal game state compatible with high probability mode, the latter of the pending information related to the lower operating port 859F and the pending information related to the right operating port 883F is subject to pending notice (target of lottery processing when receiving a pending command) It is limited to.

Returning to the explanation of step S3202, if a negative determination is made in step S3202, that is, if it is determined that no pending command has been received, the process advances to step S3204. In step S3204, it is determined whether a shift command has been received from main controller 162. Specifically, it is determined whether a shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3204, a lottery process upon reception of the shift command is executed in step S3205.

In the lottery process upon reception of the shift command, all pending information that remains after the shift is selected for lottery for pending notices. In other words, a lottery to determine whether or not a pending notice is available is performed based on all the information stored in the first area Rc1 to fourth area Rc4 and the first area Rd1 to fourth area Rd4 provided in the pending information storage area 667 of the RAM 654. be exposed. This lottery is performed individually for each piece of stored information. The lottery order (priority order) is defined as the newest order (fourth area Rc4, Rd4 → third area Rc3, Rd3 → second area Rc2, Rd2 → first area Rc1, Rd1). For example, when the common reservation number CRN is "2", a lottery is first held based on the information stored in the second area Rc2, Rd2, and if you do not win this lottery, you will be transferred to the first area Rc1, Rd1. A lottery will be held based on the stored information.

As for the lottery method, in the same way as when receiving a hold command, the stored information will be used to determine whether the game round related to the hold information is a jackpot, whether or not a reach display will be performed, and if a reach display will be performed. The pattern is grasped and the lottery is held based on the lottery table corresponding to the pattern and the value of the lottery counter for pending notice provided in the lottery counter area 674.

In the lottery table storage area of the ROM 653, there are a lottery table for jackpots, a lottery table for special performance A that loses, a lottery table for special performance B that loses, and a lottery table for special performance C that loses as lottery tables for when a shift command is received. A lottery table and a complete loss lottery table are stored. Regarding these various tables, there will be a lottery table for jackpot > a lottery table for special performance C that won't win > a lottery table for special performance B that won > a lottery table for special performance A that won > a lottery table for a complete loss. It is designed to increase the probability of winning. More specifically, for the game round that is the trigger for starting the special performance or transitioning to the second phase, there will be a lottery table for jackpots, a lottery table for special performance A that loses, a lottery table for special performance B that loses, and a special performance that loses. Either the lottery table for C or the lottery table for complete losers is referred to, and for the game round in which the special effect corresponding to the third phase is executed, either the lottery table for jackpots or the lottery table for complete losers is referred to. Distinguished as referenced.

However, these lottery table groups for when a shift command is received are set so that the probability of winning a pending preview is lower when compared with the lottery table group for receiving a pending command. For example, when comparing lottery tables for jackpots, the probability of winning when referring to the lottery table for receiving a shift command is set lower than the probability of winning when referring to the lottery table for receiving a hold command.

However, if the value of the common reservation number CRN (the number of reservations) is less than a predetermined number (“4” in this embodiment), the overall winning expectation is lower than when the reservation command was received, but the common reservation When the value of the number CRN (the number of reservations) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the overall winning expectation is set to exceed that at the time of reception of the reservation command.

In addition, in the first normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode and low probability mode, the former of the suspension information related to the lower operation port 859F and the suspension information related to the right operation port 883F is subject to suspension notice, and the high frequency support mode and in the second normal game state compatible with high probability mode, the latter of the pending information related to the lower operating port 859F and the pending information related to the right operating port 883F is subject to pending notice (subject to lottery processing when shift command is received) It is limited to.

After executing the lottery process in step S3203 or step S3205, the process advances to step S3206. In step S3206, it is determined whether or not the execution conditions for the pending notice performance are satisfied in these lottery processes. If a negative determination is made in step S3206, that is, if the winning result is not determined in steps S3203 and S3205, the present reservation notice effect setting process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3206, a pending notice performance pattern determination process is executed in subsequent step S3207, and after the current pending notice performance pattern is stored in subsequent step S3208, the present pending notice performance pattern is end the configuration process.

If it is determined that a pending preview performance will be performed, based on the information stored in step S3208, the pending information will be excluded from the lottery for the pending preview performance until the game round related to the relevant pending information is executed. It comes off. Then, the stored information is deleted when the corresponding pending information is moved to the execution area.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 99 and 100, types of pending preview effects (specifically, preview effects executed in the pending display area NE) will be described.

(Type of pending notice performance)
All of the pending preview presentations have a common feature in that they are configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot result by changing the display mode of the pending icon MP displayed in the pending display area NE. Regarding the display mode (color) of the hold icon MP, four colors are set: white, blue, yellow, and red. Among these colors, white is the basic color, and when the hold preview effect is executed, the hold icon MP takes on other colors (blue, yellow, red).

The colors of the pending icon MP are set in the order of white < blue < yellow < red so that the expectation of a jackpot result increases. Specifically, when a pending notice is executed with the pending icon MP corresponding to the game round that results in a jackpot, the probability of selection is high in the order of white < blue < yellow < red. On the other hand, when a reservation notice is executed using a reservation icon MP corresponding to a game round that results in a losing result, the probability of selection increases in the order of red < yellow < blue < white.

This suspension notice performance is roughly divided into a notice performance A that does not support step-up and a notice performance B that supports step-up, depending on the display mode of the reservation icon MP (step-up presence or absence) (see FIG. 99(b)).

As shown in FIG. 100(a), in the preview performance A, after the color of the pending icon MP changes, the color of the pending icon is maintained until the corresponding game time (until it moves to the execution target display area Dc). . On the other hand, in the preview effect B, as shown in FIG. 100(b), the color of the hold icon MP changes multiple times as the game progresses. For example, even if the color that will eventually change is red, first change it to a lower color (blue or yellow) with lower expectations, and then change it to a lower color (blue or yellow) that has lower expectations, and when the pending icon MP shifts, it will be more Step up (promote) to a higher rank color. By using these two types of pending notice performances in combination, even if the color is a color with a low level of expectation, there is a possibility that the color will change to a color with a higher level of expectation by the time the corresponding game round is reached. This suppresses an early drop in the degree of attention to the pending preview performance.

Note that the color of the pending icon MP does not change only in the pending number display areas Da and Db, but may be changed when moving to the execution target display area Dc. For example, when the pending icon MP that was yellow in the pending number display areas Da, Db moves to the execution target display area Dc, the pending icon MP is changed to red, or the pending icon MP is changed to red in the pending number display areas Da, Db. When the pending icon MP, which has been white, moves to the execution target display area Dc, it is also possible to change the pending icon MP to another color (blue, yellow, red).

Here, in the first normal game state, the above-mentioned pending notice may be executed not only when winning or shifting to the lower operating port 859F, but also when a game ball passes through the performance gate 855F during a special performance. be. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 98, a description will be given of the suspension notice triggered by passing through the presentation gate 855F.

Returning to the explanation of step S3204, if a negative determination is made in step S3204, that is, if neither the hold command nor the shift command is received from the main controller 162, the process advances to step S3209. In step S3209, it is determined whether or not a special effect corresponding to the second phase is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S3209, the main suspension notice performance setting process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3209, the process advances to step S3210.

In step S3210, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the performance gate 855F based on the detection signal (detection information) from the ball detection sensor 866F attached to the performance gate 855F. If a negative determination is made in step S3210, this advance notice effect setting process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3210, the process advances to step S3211. In step S3211, a primary lottery process is executed when passing through the performance gate.

In the primary lottery process when passing through the performance gate, the values of the primary lottery table provided in the lottery table storage area 661 of the ROM 653 and the lottery counter for pending notice provided in the lottery counter area 674 of the RAM 654 are used. With reference to this, a primary lottery is conducted based on passing through the performance gate 855F. If the player does not win the first lottery, the setting process for the reservation notice effect is immediately terminated, and if the player wins, the lottery process upon reception of the reservation command in step S3203 is executed. In other words, the same lottery (secondary lottery) as in the case where a prize is won through the lower operation port 859F is performed.

The pending information that is selected as a candidate for the pending notice in this lottery is the pending information that triggered the start of the special performance corresponding to the second phase that is currently in progress. It should be noted that since the project is currently in progress, there is no time left to perform the step-up described above. Therefore, when determining the pending preview performance pattern in step S3207, the step-up compatible preview performance B is excluded from the candidates.

When a winning occurs in the lower operating port 859F, a pending icon MP is additionally displayed based on the winning. If the game ball passes through the performance gate 855F located on the flow path (center route) toward the lower operating port 859F while the hold icon MP is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon MP may be changed ( Preview performance above). In such a configuration, by continuing to fire the game ball toward the left route even during the execution of the special performance, the display mode of the hold icon MP may change from passing through the performance gate 855F. In other words, it is possible to encourage players who are looking forward to a change in the display mode of the pending icon MP to continue firing game balls even during the special performance. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the game during the special performance.

As shown in the fifth embodiment, in the configuration in which the special performance started upon passing through the performance gate 855F is continued by winning the lower operation port 859F, a special performance is required to perform the performance continuation function. It is important to encourage the firing of game balls during the performance. In this regard, if it becomes possible to urge the player to continue firing the game balls during the special performance as shown in the present embodiment, the above-described performance continuation function can be suitably demonstrated.

A common display mode (color and By using the step-up pattern), it is possible to suppress the change in the display mode from becoming excessively complicated, and to exert the function of suppressing the monotony described above.

When changing the display mode of the hold icon MP based on passing through the production gate 855F, the display mode is changed by referring to the hold information related to the corresponding hold icon MP and determining whether or not to change the display mode. It is possible to provide a correlation between the change and the special information (result of migration determination). This is preferable in order to suppress obsolescence of pending changes.

<Modification 1>
In the sixth embodiment, when a game ball passes through the performance gate 855F during the special performance (second phase), a lottery table for pending changes and a random number ( The system was configured to draw a lottery for pending changes by referring to the value of the lottery counter for pending notice (the value of the lottery counter for pending notice), but this was changed so that when a game ball passes through the performance gate 855F during the special performance (second phase), It is also possible to perform a lottery for reservation changes by referring to a lottery table for reservation changes and a random number (value of a lottery counter for reservation notice) that is referred to during a shift.

Further, when performing a lottery for pending changes based on passing through the performance gate 855F, it is not necessarily necessary to use an existing lottery table or random numbers. The lottery table and random numbers for pending changes that are executed based on passing through the production gate 855F may be provided separately from the lottery table for pending changes that are referred to when winning or shifting to the lower operation port 859F.

<Modification 2>
In the sixth embodiment described above, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute a pending notice based on the game ball passing through the performance gate 855F during the special game state corresponding to the second phase. It is not limited to. Alternatively or in addition to this, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to execute the pending notice based on the game ball passing through the performance gate 855F during the special performance corresponding to the third phase. Similarly, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the pending notice based on the game ball passing through the performance gate 855F during the special performance corresponding to the first phase.

<Modification 3>
In the sixth embodiment, a holding change lottery is performed each time a game ball passes through the performance gate 855F during the special performance (second phase), but the number of game balls that pass through the performance gate 855F is It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a lottery for pending changes is performed when the number reaches a predetermined number (a number of 2 or more). In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to inform the player of information indicating the number of passes remaining until the lottery is executed (the relationship between the number of passes through the production gate 855F and the predetermined number).

<Modification 4>
In the sixth embodiment described above, when a game ball passes through the performance gate 855F and a holding change lottery is held, the holding change is executed immediately after winning in this lottery. A grace period may be provided before a pending change is made later. For example, during this grace period, it is also possible to perform a precursor effect that suggests whether or not a pending change will occur, as a step before notifying the player of the lottery result of a pending change based on passing through the presentation gate 855F. In other words, the configuration is such that the predictive performance is started based on the passing of the game ball through the performance gate 855F, and when the predictive performance ends, the pending change is executed if the predictive performance corresponds to the pending change. It is also possible.

If such a configuration is adopted, there is a possibility that the subsequent game balls will pass through the performance gate 855F during the predictive performance, but the subsequent game balls that have passed through the performance gate 855F during the predictive performance will be subject to the pending change lottery. It may be configured to be excluded from the list, or may be included in the lottery target. For example, if a subsequent game ball passing through the performance gate 855F wins a pending change during a predictive performance corresponding to a loss, the result of the predictive performance may be rewritten to one corresponding to the pending change.

<Modification 5>
Under the situation where the non-electric accessory 858F is in the second guidance state, the player's attention is drawn to the non-electric accessory 858F and its surroundings (e.g. It will be easier to face the Upper Croon 856F and Lower Croon 857F). Therefore, under the situation where the special performance is being executed and the non-electric accessory 858F is in the second guidance state (i.e., under the situation where the game ball is on the lower croon 857F or under the situation where consecutive winnings are likely to occur), it will be put on hold. If a change lottery is won, the pending change may be suspended (delayed) until the second guidance state is switched to the first guidance state, instead of immediately executing the pending change. Thereby, it is possible to suitably prevent a pending change from being overlooked due to passing through the production gate 855F.

<Modification 6>
If the game ball passes through the performance gate 855F under a situation where the preview performance B has been set and the color of the pending icon MP has not yet stepped up to the final display mode (waiting for the step-up timing), the passing It is also possible to use this as an opportunity to step up the display mode of the pending icon MP. In this way, by changing the display mode within a range that takes into consideration the predetermined pattern, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that changing the display mode is bothersome.

<Modification 7>
When it is decided to change the display mode of the pending icon MP during a game round, the display mode is not necessarily changed at that timing, but the change is deferred until the start of the next game round. It is also possible to do this. According to such a configuration, even if the display mode does not change immediately after passing through the production gate 855F, the possibility that the display mode will be changed remains until the start of the next game round.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the sixth embodiment, a suspension notice is given when a game ball passes through the performance gate 855F during a special performance. This embodiment is also different from the sixth embodiment in that it aims to improve the attention to the game by executing display processing based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the performance gate 855F during the special performance. Although the configuration is similar to the sixth embodiment, the specific configuration is different from the sixth embodiment. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102.

The pachinko machine shown in this embodiment is provided with a setting change function so that a game hall manager or the like can change the table that is referred to during the jackpot lottery. Specifically, the validity tables include a low probability mode validity table and a high probability mode validity table corresponding to "Setting 1", a low probability mode validity table and a high probability mode validity table corresponding to "Setting 2", A low probability mode validity table and a high probability mode validity table corresponding to “Setting 3” are provided.

As shown in FIG. 101(a), the jackpot probability is 1/150 under the gaming state where the low probability mode win/fail table corresponding to "Setting 1" is referred to during the above lottery, and when the above lottery is "Setting 2", the jackpot probability is 1/150. In the gaming state where the winning/failure table for the low probability mode corresponding to "Setting 3" is referred to, the jackpot probability is 1/120, and the winning/failure table for the low probability mode corresponding to "Setting 3" is referred to during the above lottery. Under these gaming conditions, the jackpot probability is 1/100.

In addition, in the game state where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode compatible with "Setting 1" is referred to during the above lottery, the jackpot probability is approximately 1/32, and during the above lottery, the high probability mode corresponding to "Setting 2" is used. The jackpot probability is 1/30 under the gaming state where the winning/failure table is referred to, and the jackpot probability is 1/30 under the gaming state where the winning/failure table for high probability mode corresponding to "Setting 3" is referred to during the above lottery. is approximately 1/28.

In this way, the differences are set in the order of "Setting 1" < "Setting 2" < "Setting 3" to give the player an advantage, and players who want to advance the game even slightly will choose "Setting 3". It is assumed that players play games with the expectation that this will be the case.

The winning probability for the operating ports 859F, 883F, etc. is manufactured so that it falls within a range preset by the gaming machine manufacturer, and if the winning probability falls within the range, the player will ``Setting 2'' is more advantageous to the player than the game hall, ``Setting 3'' is more advantageous to the player than ``Setting 2''. In the following explanation, "setting 3" is also referred to as "high setting" for convenience.

Note that it is also possible to reverse the advantageous and disadvantageous relationship in the high probability mode to the advantageous and disadvantageous relationship in the low probability mode. That is, it is also possible to set the jackpot probability to increase in the order of "Setting 3" < "Setting 2" < "Setting 1". In this case, "setting 1" corresponds to the above-mentioned "high setting".

The setting values detailed above may be arbitrarily changed by a setting change operation by the administrator of the gaming hall or the like. In a gaming machine having such a setting change function, the degree of advantage changes depending on the setting value, so playing a game while guessing the setting value is one of the pleasures. The pachinko machine shown in this embodiment is configured to prompt the player to make the above guess by suggesting the current setting value to the player (setting suggestion) when the setting value suggestion condition is satisfied. One of the setting suggestions includes a setting suggestion that is executed based on the game ball passing through the presentation gate 855F during the special presentation. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 101(b), the process related to the performance gate 855F among the various settings suggestion processes executed by the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 140 as part of the regular process will be described.

(Setting suggestion processing)
In the setting suggestion process, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not a special presentation corresponding to the second phase is being performed. If a negative determination is made in step S3301, the main setting suggestion process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, the process advances to step S3302.

In step S3302, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the production gate 855F based on the detection signal (detection information) from the ball detection sensor 866F attached to the production gate 855F. If a negative determination is made in step S3302, the main setting suggestion process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3302, the process advances to step S3303.

In step S3303, a setting suggestion lottery process is executed. Specifically, the setting suggestion is made based on the setting suggestion table provided in the lottery table storage area of the ROM 653 and the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter provided in the lottery counter area 674 of the RAM 654. Determine whether or not. Regarding the setting suggestion table, there are differences such that the winning probability is 1/100000 for setting "1", 1/3000 for setting "2", and 1/1000 for setting "3". (See Figure 102(a)).

If the lottery in step S3303 does not result in a winning result, a negative determination is made in step S3304 and the setting suggestion process ends. If the lottery result in step S3303 is won, an affirmative determination is made in step S3304 and the process proceeds to step S3305. In step S3305, setting suggestion effect execution processing is performed.

In the setting suggestion production execution process, the speaker unit 29 outputs a sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion and outputs a setting suggestion start command to the display control device 910F. In the MPU 912F of the display control device 910F, based on receiving the setting suggestion start command, a process of adding an effect to the character image displayed on the display screen 500aF (third variable display area ME3) of the symbol display device 500F is performed. I do.

When both a girl character and a fairy character are displayed, an effect is added to the fairy character whose display time is relatively short (see FIG. 102(b1)→FIG. 102(b2)). On the other hand, if only the former of the girl character and fairy character is displayed, an effect is added to the girl character. The effect added to the fairy character continues until the display of that character ends, and the effect added to the girl character continues until the current special performance ends.

While the setting suggestion is being executed, even if a game ball newly passes through the production gate 855F, the setting suggestion will not be made based on the passage. As described above, if the setting suggestion is won in the first part of the second phase, an effect is added to the fairy character whose suggestion time is limited. Therefore, the display of the effect may end before the special performance ends. In such a case, the setting suggestion may be executed multiple times during one special performance based on the fact that the setting suggestion condition is newly established (passing the performance gate 855F → winning the lottery). Such a configuration prevents the opportunity for setting suggestions from decreasing.

The current set value may be suggested when a game ball passes through the performance gate 855F during a special performance based on winning to the lower operating port 859F. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player who aims to determine the set value to shoot the game ball even during the special performance.

As shown in the fifth embodiment, in the configuration in which the special performance started upon passing through the performance gate 855F is continued by winning the lower operation port 859F, a special performance is required to perform the performance continuation function. It is important to encourage the firing of game balls during the performance. In this regard, if it becomes possible to urge the player to continue firing the game balls during the special performance as shown in the present embodiment, the above-described performance continuation function can be suitably demonstrated.

<Modification 1>
In the seventh embodiment, if a lottery is won based on passing through the performance gate 855F during the special performance, a part of the special performance is changed to one corresponding to the setting suggestion. It is not necessarily necessary to provide a relationship between the setting suggestion and the setting suggestion, and the specific form of the setting suggestion based on passing through the production gate 855F is arbitrary. For example, a special effect may be executed in the third variable display area ME3 on the display screen 500aF, and a setting suggestion display may be displayed in an area other than the third variable display area ME3 on the display screen 500aF,
<Modification 2>
In the seventh embodiment, the setting suggestion lottery is performed based on the game ball passing through the performance gate 855F during the special performance corresponding to the second phase. 1/ It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a lottery of setting suggestions is performed based on the game ball passing through the performance gate 855F during the special performance corresponding to the third phase.

<Modification 3>
In the seventh embodiment, the setting suggestion lottery is performed every time a game ball passes through the performance gate 855F during the special performance, but when the number of game balls that have passed through the performance gate 855F is a predetermined number (2 It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a lottery for setting suggestions is performed when the number (above number) is reached. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to inform the player of information indicating the number of passes remaining until the lottery is executed (the relationship between the number of passes through the production gate 855F and the predetermined number).

<Modification 4>
In the seventh embodiment, the shortest execution time of the special effect (second phase) is the execution time when adding an effect to a fairy character in the setting suggestion executed upon passage of the effect gate 855F. It was set to be shorter than . In such a configuration, the setting suggestion starts during the special performance, the setting suggestion ends during the special performance, and the setting suggestion may occur multiple times during one special performance. However, it is not essential to have a configuration in which setting suggestions can be started multiple times during one special performance. For example, when the fairy character is hidden, the effect can be inherited by the girl character, and the setting suggestion can be continued until the end of the special performance.

<Modification 5>
In the seventh embodiment, the actual execution time of the setting suggestion differs depending on the timing of passage of the production gate 855F (timing of winning the setting suggestion lottery). It is also possible to configure the execution time to be constant regardless of the execution time. For example, if the execution time (certain amount of time) for setting suggestions can be secured, a lottery for setting suggestions may be performed, but if the execution time (certain amount of time) for setting suggestions cannot be secured, the lottery for setting suggestions may not be held. . More specifically, the start timing of setting suggestions in the special performance corresponding to the second phase is predefined, and if a person wins a lottery for setting suggestions before the start timing, instead of starting the setting suggestions immediately, It is preferable to suspend (delay) the setting suggestion so that it starts at the start timing.

<Modification 6>
In the seventh embodiment, the setting suggestion display is generated in any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 3", but the display is not generated for some setting values. It is also possible. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the above-mentioned display does not occur in "Setting 1", and when the display occurs, "Setting 1" is negated.

<Modification 7>
Under the situation where the non-electric accessory 858F is in the second guidance state, the player's attention is drawn to the non-electric accessory 858F and its surroundings (e.g. It will be easier to face the Upper Croon 856F and Lower Croon 857F). Therefore, it is set under the condition that the special performance is being executed and the non-electric accessory 858F is in the second guidance state (that is, under the condition that the game ball is on the lower croon 857 or under the condition that consecutive winnings are likely to occur). If the suggestion lottery is won, instead of starting the setting suggestion immediately, it is preferable to delay the start of the setting suggestion until the second guidance state is switched to the first guidance state. Thereby, it is possible to suitably suppress overlooking of setting suggestions triggered by passing through the performance gate 855F.

<Eighth embodiment>
As shown in the first embodiment, in the configuration in which the falling path of the game ball is formed by the game nails 93 disposed in the game area PE, if for some reason (such as during cleaning) the game nails 93 If the direction of the ball changes, there is a concern that the probability of winning a prize in various ball entry sections such as the general winning hole 81 may change or ball jamming may occur more easily. In order to avoid such inconveniences, one of the features of this embodiment is that it is possible to confirm after the fact whether the direction of the game nail is in the correct direction. There is. The characteristic configuration of this embodiment (configuration related to confirmation of game nails) will be described below with reference to FIG. 103, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. FIG. 103 is a front view of the game board unit 80 in the eighth embodiment.

A substantially annular check sheet CS is arranged in front of the game board unit 80 so as to cover the game area PE. The check sheet CS is transparent, and game parts such as the game nails 93 arranged in the game area PE can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine through the check sheet CS. In addition, in FIG. 103, for convenience, game parts such as the game nail 93 located behind the check sheet CS are shown by solid lines instead of broken lines.

The check sheet CS is divided into four sheet materials CS1 to CS4 having a rectangular outer shape, and these sheet materials CS1 to CS4 are arranged so as to surround the display surface of the variable display unit 500. As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 104, each of the sheet materials CS1 to CS4 has a pattern imitating the head of the game nail 93 (hereinafter referred to as reference pattern IF), and the sheet materials CS1 to CS4 are predetermined. By comparing the reference pattern IF and the head of the game nail 93 while the game nail 93 is placed at the designated reference position, it is possible to check whether the game nail 93 is in the correct orientation.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 105, in this embodiment, an instruction means for instructing the attachment reference position of the sheet materials CS1 to CS4 to the pachinko machine 10 is disposed on the front door frame 14G. Specifically, a reference line TL indicating the reference position for installing the check sheet CS can be displayed on the rear glass panel 23G of the glass unit 22G mounted on the front door frame 14. After arranging each sheet material CS1 to CS4, attaching the sheet materials CS1 to CS4 to the rear glass panel 23G using a fixing means such as tape, completing the installation of the check sheet CS to the pachinko machine 10. The structure is as follows. Here, the instruction means will be explained with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106(a) is a horizontal sectional view of the front door frame 14G, and FIG. 106(b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration related to positioning of the check sheet CS. Note that, similarly to the glass panel 23 shown in the first embodiment, the rear glass panel 23G covers the entire gaming area PE and is parallel to the front surface of the gaming board unit 80G (gaming area forming body). It is composed of

The front door frame 14G is provided with a light emitting section 901G that supplies light to the end surface of the rear glass panel 23G. The light emitting unit 901G has a light emitting board on which a large number of LEDs are mounted, and the light emitting board is connected to the notification/effect control device 140. Further, a performance operation button 35 for performance disposed on the front side of the front door frame 14G is connected to the notification/performance control device 140. When the performance operation button 35 is operated in accordance with an operation instruction during a game, it becomes an opportunity to execute a performance corresponding to the operation on the variable display unit 500.

The MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140 performs light emission control so that the light emitting section 901G is turned on when the effect operation button 35 is operated with the front door frame 14 open. The rear glass panel 23G has a function as a light guide plate configured so that the light from the light emitting part 901G passes through the interior while being repeatedly reflected on both plate surfaces, and emits light to each plate surface. Light emitting sections 902G and 903G are provided. The light emitting parts 902G, 903G are formed with a large number of minute recesses recessed from the plate surface, and the light from the light emitting part 901G changes direction at the light emitting parts 902G, 903G and is emitted outside the rear glass panel 23G. The structure is as follows. The light emitted from the light emitting parts 902G, 903G is diffused by the light emitting parts 902G, 903G, so that the light emitting parts 902G, 903G appear to emit light.

Here, the light emitting parts 902G and 903G are formed on the rear surface of the rear glass panel 23G, and a rear light emitting part 902G that is formed on the rear surface of the rear glass panel 23G and emits light from the light emitting part 901G to the rear of the gaming machine, and It is roughly divided into a front light emitting section 903G that is formed and emits light from the light emitting section 901G to the front of the gaming machine. As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 107, a decorative pattern CF imitating a girl character is displayed on the rear glass panel 23G by the front light emitting section 903G emitting light. This decorative pattern CF is displayed only while the light emitting section 901G is lit, and is hidden when the light emitting section 901G is turned off. When the game cycle effect shifts to the reach display, or when a step-up occurs after the shift to the reach display, the light emitting part 901G lights up and the decorative pattern CF is displayed, increasing the possibility of a jackpot. It is suggested that the

As shown in FIG. 105, when the rear light emitting section 902G emits light, a reference line TL indicating the reference position for attaching the check sheet CS is displayed on the rear glass panel 23G. This reference line TL is displayed only while the light emitting section 901G is lit, and is hidden when the light emitting section 901G is turned off.

Here, when the glass unit 22G is viewed from the front side of the front door frame 14G as shown in FIG. The light from the light emitting section 902G is difficult to reach the eyes. In other words, even if both the decorative pattern CF and the reference line TL are displayed on the rear glass panel 23G, when the front door frame 14G is placed in the closed position, the front door frame 14G is When viewed from the side, the reference line TL is prevented from interfering with the visual recognition of the decorative pattern CF. On the other hand, when the glass unit 22G is viewed from the back side of the front door frame 14G as shown in FIG. The light from the light emitting section 902G can easily reach the eyes. In other words, even if both the decorative pattern CF and the reference line TL are displayed on the rear glass panel 23G, when the front door frame 14G is placed in the open position, the front door frame 14G is When viewed from the side, the decorative pattern CF is suppressed from interfering with the visual recognition of the reference line TL. Thereby, the presentation function of the front light emitting section 903G and the instruction function of the rear light emitting section 902G can suitably coexist on the rear glass panel 23G. The flow of checking the game nails 93 will be explained below.

(Confirmation work of game nail 93)
When checking the game nail 93, after opening the front door frame 14G, the effect operation button 35 of the front door frame 14G is operated. As a result, the light emitting section 901G lights up, and the decorative pattern CF and the reference line TL are displayed on the rear glass panel 23G. By viewing the front door frame 14G from the back side, the reference line TL becomes visible, while the decorative pattern CF is out of sight. In other words, the decorative pattern CF is prevented from interfering with the arrangement of the check sheet CS.

After arranging the check sheet CS along the reference line TL, the check sheet CS is fixed to the rear surface of the rear glass panel 23G using a fixing means such as tape. This completes the attachment of the check sheet CS. Thereafter, the light emitting section 901G is turned off by closing the front door frame 14G. As a result, the reference line TL and the decorative pattern CF are hidden. Thereafter, by comparing the reference pattern IF on the check sheet CS with the head of the game nail 93 on the game board unit 80, it can be determined whether the game nail 93 is in the correct orientation.

After checking the game nails 93, the front door frame 14G is opened again and the check sheet CS is collected. Thereafter, the work of checking the game nail 93 is completed by closing the front door frame 14G.

As described in detail above, by positioning the check sheet CS in accordance with the reference line TL displayed on the front door frame 14G, the head of the game nail 93 and the pattern indicating its position can be compared. It is possible to accurately check whether the game nail is in the correct position (whether there is any change such as deformation in the game nail).

Light is supplied to the end of the glass panel 23G covering the game area PE, and the light is emitted from the rear light emitting section 902G, thereby displaying the reference line TL. In this way, the confirmation accuracy can be improved by providing the glass panel 23G for the cover of the gaming area PE with a light guide function and displaying the instruction of the mounting reference position as close as possible to the confirmation target. In this configuration where the mounting reference position is displayed near the confirmation target, there is a concern that the light-emitting display may interfere with confirmation work or game performance, but by switching the light-emitting means ON/OFF, the mounting reference position can be displayed. Since the position can be displayed/hidden, such concerns can be eliminated.

The rear light emitting section 902G is composed of a large number of recesses formed to be recessed forward from the rear plate surface of the rear glass panel 23G. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of bending of the check sheet CS due to the unevenness of the rear light emitting section 902G getting caught on the check sheet CS or lifting from the rear glass panel 23G.

If the rear glass panel 23G is provided with a front light emitting section 903G and a rear light emitting section 902G, and the light from the light emitting section 901G is emitted from each light emitting section 902G, 903G in the front and back directions, the front Even if light is emitted from the rear light emitting portion 902G when a light emitting effect in which light is emitted from the light emitting portion 903G is executed, the light is prevented from going toward the player and is drawn on the rear glass panel 23G. It is possible to suppress the decorative pattern CF from becoming difficult to see. As a result, the above-mentioned function of indicating the mounting reference position and the function of presenting the light emitting display can suitably coexist in one glass panel.

<Modification 1>
In the eighth embodiment, the light from the light emitting section 901G is emitted to the back side of the glass unit 22G through the glass unit 22G (specifically, the rear glass panel 23G), and the glass unit 22G is connected to the front door frame. When viewed from the back side of 14G, the installation reference position (reference line TL) of the check sheet CS for the game nail 93 is configured to be visible. This is changed to a configuration in which the light from the light emitting section 901G is emitted to the front side of the glass unit 22G through the glass unit 22G, and when the glass unit 22G is viewed from the front side, the check sheet CS for the game nail 93 is The mounting reference position (reference line TL) may be configured to be visible. When making such a change, a light emitting part for the front glass panel and a light emitting part for the rear glass panel should be provided, and a function for displaying a decorative pattern CF for display effect on one of the two glass panels. It is preferable to add a function to display the mounting reference position (reference line) of the check sheet CS on the other side. In addition, in order to improve the positional accuracy of the check sheet CS, if the light for displaying the reference line is emitted to the front side, the reference line should be displayed on the front side of the front glass panel. is preferred.

<Modification 2>
The eighth embodiment has a configuration in which the light from the light emitting section 901G is emitted to the front side and the back side of the glass unit 22G, and has a function of displaying a decorative pattern CF for display effect on the rear glass panel 23G. , and the function of displaying the attachment reference position (reference line TL) of the check sheet CS, but it is also possible to transfer these functions to the front glass panel. Further, each function may be provided separately to the front glass panel and the rear glass panel.

<Modification 3>
In the eighth embodiment, the function of displaying the attachment reference position (reference line TL) for the check sheet CS is provided on the glass unit 22G facing the gaming area PE from the front of the gaming machine, but the invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, if a transparent cover that covers the gaming area PE from the front is provided between the front of the game board unit and the glass unit, this cover should be given the function of displaying the mounting reference position for the check sheet CS. You may. In addition, this cover can be made into an open/close type or a removable type, and the cover has the same functions as the rear glass panel 23G shown in the eighth embodiment (the display function of the decorative pattern CF and the display function of the reference line TL). functions) may be added.

<Modification 4>
The pachinko machine 10 shown in the eighth embodiment is equipped with a mounting means for attaching the check sheet CS for checking the game nails 93 to the pachinko machine 10, and fixing the check sheet CS for checking the game nails 93 with a tape or the like prepared separately from the game machine. Although the case where the glass unit 22G is attached to the glass unit 22G using means is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to include an attachment means for the check sheet CS. For example, a structure may be adopted in which rotating arms are provided in the frame portion of the front door frame, and the check sheet CS is held (pinched) by being sandwiched between the arms and the glass panel. It is also possible to configure the check sheet CS to be attached to the glass panel by adsorption such as electrostatic adsorption.

<Modification 5>
The panel material for displaying the reference line TL does not necessarily need to be made of glass. It is sufficient that the panel material is at least transparent, allowing game parts such as game nails to be seen through the panel material, and functioning as a light guide plate, and the panel material may also be made of resin such as acrylic. be.

<Modification 6>
Although the glass panel 23G of the glass unit 22G shown in the eighth embodiment is of a multi-layer type, it is also possible to use a single-layer type of glass panel.

<Modification 7>
In the eighth embodiment, a rectangular reference line TL (attachment reference position) matching the outer periphery (outer edge) of the check sheet CS is displayed on the glass unit 22G (rear glass panel 23G). The specific display mode is arbitrary as long as the position of the check sheet CS can be clearly indicated. For example, in a configuration in which the check sheet CS is provided with a reference point for positioning, a target (for example, a pattern imitating a dot or "+") indicating the position of the reference point may be displayed on the glass unit. .

<Modification 8>
In the eighth embodiment, the check sheet CS is exemplified as a combination of the divided small sheet materials CS1 to CS4, but it may be one large check sheet. Further, when combining a plurality of sheet materials CS1 to CS4, it is not necessarily necessary to unify the outer shapes of each of the sheet materials CS1 to CS4.

<Modification 9>
In the eighth embodiment, the effect operation button 35 is provided as an operation means that can switch on/off the light emitting section 901G, and when the effect operation button 35 is operated, the display of the reference line TL is turned ON/OFF. However, in view of the fact that the front door frame 14G is opened when installing the check sheet CS, when the front door frame 14G is opened, the light emitting section 901G lights up, and light from the light emitting section 901G is switched on. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the reference line TL is supplied to the glass unit 22G (a configuration in which the reference line TL is displayed). In this case, the light emitting section 901G may be configured to turn off, for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the front door frame 14 was opened or when the front door frame 14 was closed.

<Ninth embodiment>
In the eighth embodiment, the check sheet CS for checking game nails is attached to the front door frame 14G, but in this embodiment, the check sheet CS is attached to the inner frame (more specifically, the game board unit 80H). The configuration related to the attachment of the check sheet CS is different from the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109, the mounting structure of the check sheet CS in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 108(a) is a partial enlarged view of the game board unit 80H showing the vicinity of the left route, FIG. 108(b) is a partial sectional view taken along the line XX of FIG. 108(a), and FIG. 109 is a partial enlarged view of the left route and the right side. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board unit 80H showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of a route branch.

(Mounting structure of sheet material CS2)
First, the mounting structure of the left route sheet material CS2 will be described with reference to FIG. 108(a). The game board unit 80H includes a rail cover protrusion 951H provided on the rail cover 107H for the guide rail 100 as a holding means for the sheet material CS2, and a general prize opening 81 arranged at the bottom of the game area PE. A decorative block protrusion 961H provided on the decorative block 960H and a center frame protrusion 971H provided on the center frame 95H are provided.

The rail cover protrusion 951H, the decorative block protrusion 961H, and the center frame protrusion 971H are all connected to the seat surfaces 952H, 962H, and 972H facing the front side of the game machine, and from the seat surfaces 952H, 962H, and 972H to the game machine. It has standing portions 953H, 963H, and 973H that stand up in the front (see, for example, FIG. 108(b)). The seat surfaces 952H, 962H, and 972H are located on one virtual plane parallel to the front surface of the game board unit 80H, and are formed so that the distance from the front surface of the game board unit 80H is the same. When the sheet material CS2 is placed in surface contact with the seat surfaces 952H, 962H, and 972H, the sheet material CS2 and the front surface of the game board unit 80H are parallel to each other.

The upright portion 953H of the rail cover protrusion 951H is in contact with the edge of the sheet material CS2 from the left, and the leftward displacement of the sheet material CS2 is regulated by the upright portion 953H. The upright portion 963H of the decorative block protrusion 961H contacts the edge of the sheet material CS2 from below and from the right, and the upright portion 963H restricts the downward and rightward displacement of the sheet material CS2. . The upright portion 973H of the center frame protrusion 971H contacts the edge of the sheet material CS2 from above, and the upward displacement of the sheet material CS2 is regulated by the upright portion 973H. These protrusions 951H, 961H, and 971H define the mounting position of the sheet material CS2 and prevent it from falling off from the game board unit 80H.

The frame portion of the front door frame 14H is formed with a facing portion that faces the seat surface 952H with a slight gap therebetween when the front door frame 14H is placed in the closed position. When the front door frame 14H is placed in the closed position with the sheet material CS2 placed on the game board unit 80H, the sheet material CS2 is sandwiched between the seat surface 952H and the opposing portion, and the game board unit Sheet material CS2 is prevented from falling off from 80H.

(Mounting structure of sheet material CS1)
Next, the mounting structure of the sheet material CS1 will be described with reference to FIG. 109. The game board unit 80H includes a center frame protrusion 971H (used in combination with the sheet material CS2) disposed on the center frame 95H as a holding means for the sheet material CS1, and a center frame protrusion 971H disposed on the center frame 95H as well. A protrusion 981H and an outer rail protrusion 991H attached to the guide rail 100 (specifically, the outer rail 102) are provided.

The center frame protrusions 971H, 981H and the outer rail protrusions 991H each have seat surfaces 972H, 982H, 992H facing the front side of the game machine, and stand-up surfaces that rise from the seat surfaces 972H, 982H, 992H toward the front of the game machine. 973H, 983H, and 993H. The seat surfaces 972H, 982H, and 992H are located on one virtual plane parallel to the front surface of the game board unit 80H, and are formed so that the distance from the front surface of the game board unit 80H is the same. When the sheet material CS1 is placed in surface contact with the seat surfaces 972H, 982H, and 992H, the sheet material CS1 and the front surface of the game board unit 80H are parallel to each other.

The upright portion 983H of the center frame protrusion 981H abuts the edge of the sheet material CS1 from the right, and the rightward displacement of the sheet material CS1 is regulated by the upright portion 983H. The upright portion 973H of the center frame protrusion 971H is in contact with the edge of the sheet material CS1 from below, and the downward displacement of the sheet material CS1 is regulated by the upright portion 973H. Further, the upright portion 993H of the outer rail protrusion 991H is in contact with the edge of the sheet material CS1 from above, and upward displacement of the sheet material CS1 is regulated by the upright portion 993H. These protrusions 971H, 981H, and 991H define the mounting position of the sheet material CS1 and prevent it from falling off from the game board unit 80H.

The frame portion of the front door frame 14H is formed with a facing portion that faces the seat surface 982H with a slight gap therebetween when the front door frame 14H is placed in the closed position. When the front door frame 14H is placed in the closed position with the sheet material CS1 placed on the game board unit 80H, the sheet material CS1 will be sandwiched between the seat surface 982H and the opposing portion, and the game board unit Sheet material CS1 is prevented from falling off from 80H.

<Modification 1>
In the ninth embodiment, the game board unit 80H is provided with the function of defining the position of the check sheet CS for checking the game nails 93 and the function of holding the check sheet CS. As for the game board unit, it is sufficient that it has at least the function of holding the check sheet CS, and the function of defining the position is not essential.

<Modification 2>
In the ninth embodiment, the game area PE is divided by the center frame 95H, the guide rail 100, and the game area dividing member 99, and the center side (inside) across the falling path of the game ball in the game area PE. A holding section for the check sheet is provided on both the inside and outside. It is not necessarily necessary to arrange the holding part on both the center side and the outer side, and it is also possible to arrange the holding part only on either the center side or the outer side.

<Modification 3>
In the ninth embodiment, protrusions constituting holding means for the check sheet are provided both on the center side (inside) and on the outside across the falling path of the game ball in the game area PE. By arranging these protrusions to face each other across a predetermined game nail in the downstream path, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the above-mentioned confirmation regarding the predetermined game nail. Regarding game nails, there are those that have a relatively strong influence on the movement of the game ball and those that have a relatively weak influence. By selecting a game nail that has a relatively strong influence as the predetermined game nail, the accuracy improvement effect described above can be suitably exhibited.

<Modification 4>
When considering assembly variations of game parts in the game board unit 80H, one game part is provided with a plurality of holding parts (two) for the check sheet CS, and the position of the check sheet is defined by these holding parts. It is preferable that the check sheet is further held by another game component provided apart from the game component. Thereby, positioning accuracy in the holding section can be improved and disturbances in the posture of the check sheet can be suitably suppressed.

<Modification 5>
In the ninth embodiment, the outer edge portion of the check sheet CS is supported by the protrusions 951H, 961H, 971H, 981H, and 991H protruding from the center frame 95H and the rail cover 107H. The holding structure is not limited to this. For example, the check sheet CS may be positioned and held by inserting a protrusion (pin) protruding from the center frame 95H or the rail cover 107H into a reference hole formed in the check sheet CS. .

<Modification 6>
In the ninth embodiment described above, the check sheet CS is exemplified as a combination of the divided small sheet materials CS1 to CS4, but it may be one large check sheet. Further, when combining a plurality of sheet materials CS1 to CS4, it is not necessarily necessary to unify the outer shapes of each of the sheet materials CS1 to CS4.

<Modification 7>
In the ninth embodiment, one sheet material is held by a plurality of protrusions, but each of these protrusions may have a function of holding a sheet material. For example, it is preferable to arrange a movable member at the tip of each protrusion, which can be moved between a pinching position where the sheet material is sandwiched between the sheet material and the seat surface, and a release position where the sandwiching is released.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the embodiments described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of the embodiments, or it is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the light guide portions 532 and 732 are rotatable, but the light guide portions 532 and 732 are not limited to this. The operating mode of the light guiding section is arbitrary, and for example, it is also possible to use a sliding type. In the case of a sliding type, the sliding direction is also preferably the same as the arrangement direction of the light emitting parts 553, 753 (the arrangement direction of the symbols).

(2) In each of the above embodiments, the scrolling direction (vertical direction) of the symbols in the first display unit is arranged to be the same as the scrolling direction (vertical direction) of the symbols in the second display unit, but the present invention is not limited to this. It's not something you can do. For example, it is also possible to configure the scrolling direction of the symbols in the first display unit and the scrolling direction of the symbols in the second display unit to intersect with each other.

(3) The processing direction of the light emitting portions 553, 753 shown in each of the above embodiments is arbitrary. For example, the unevenness as a "light emitting part" may be formed by edging, by laser processing or molding, or by printing.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the light emitting portions 553, 753 are configured by forming fine irregularities on the surfaces of the light guide portions 532, 732, but the specific structure for light emission in the light guide portions is is optional. For example, it is also possible to configure the light guide section to include a medium having a different refractive index from the base of the light guide section, so that light that reaches the medium is emitted from the light guide section.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the display surface of the first display unit and the display surface of the second display unit are parallel to each other, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient as long as an operating gap is ensured for each display unit to operate, and the display surface of the first display unit and the display surface of the second display unit may be configured to face different directions.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the light guide section 532 can be moved by operating the light guide section 532 in a situation where the supply of light from the side light 528 to the light guide section 532 is stopped. However, in order to embody such a technical idea, if at least a part of the period during which the light supply is stopped is used as the operating period of the light guide section 532, However, it is not necessarily necessary to use the entire period during which the supply is stopped as the operating period.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the boundary portion BP1 of the light guide panels 555 to 557 is configured to extend in the same direction as the rotation center axis CL of the rotating body 525, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration extending in a direction intersecting the direction of the rotation center axis CL.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result is displayed using three drums has been exemplified, but the number of drums is arbitrary. For example, there may be one, two, or four or more.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, when the main controller 162 performs a lottery based on pending information, the pattern on the operating port display section of the main display unit changes at the same time as the lottery (more specifically, immediately after the lottery). Although the configuration is such that the variable display of symbols in the variable display area of the display and variable display unit 500 is started, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, prior to the lottery, the variable display of the symbols on the operating port display section or the variable display of the symbols in the variable display area of the variable display unit 500 is started.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, a difference in advantage is provided between the lottery related to the operating ports 83a and 859H and the lottery related to the operating ports 83b and 883H. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is not provided. In addition, it is not that the lottery for the actuating ports 83b, 883H is more advantageous to the player than the drawing for the actuating ports 83a, 859H, but that the drawing for the actuating ports 83a, 859H is more advantageous than the drawing for the actuating ports 83b, 883H. It is also possible that the lottery is more advantageous to the player.

(11) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball enters the machine, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine that gives a player a benefit such as a payout of medals if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an active line that can be seen from a display window after the reels have stopped. can be applied.

Furthermore, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner is provided with a storage section and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
The following features group A are as follows: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays the pattern in a variable manner on the display screen. When the game ball passes through the actuation port, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of symbols is started. In the case of winning, a specific symbol combination, etc. is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). ``In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase the attention to games.However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature A1. The variable display of symbols is started based on the fulfillment of a predetermined starting condition (a prize entered into the operating ports 83a, 83b), and a symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means (the lottery function in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) is displayed. A gaming machine equipped with a pattern display means (variable display unit 500 and notification/performance control device 140) that stops and displays the image,
The pattern display means includes a light guide (light guide section 532) in which a plurality of light emitting sections (light emitting sections 553) are formed, and a light emitting section (side surface) that supplies light to an end surface (end surface 554) of the light guide. light 528), and is configured such that when light is supplied from the light emitting part to the light guide, the light is emitted from the light emitting part so that the picture is displayed. A gaming machine featuring:

In the pattern display means shown in feature A1, a pattern is displayed by emitting light from a light emitting section from a light emitting section formed in a light guide. The pattern can be switched between display and non-display by turning on/off the light emitting section, and the color of the pattern can also be changed by changing the emitted light color. In this way, it is preferable to construct a pattern display means by using a light guide and a light emitting section in combination, in order to diversify the pattern display mode and to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the following features A2 to A14 to this feature.

Feature A2. The variable display of symbols is started based on the fulfillment of a predetermined starting condition (a prize entered into the operating ports 83a, 83b), and a symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means (the lottery function in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) is displayed. A gaming machine equipped with a pattern display means (variable display unit 500 and notification/performance control device 140) that stops and displays the image,
The picture display means includes:
A light emitting part (side light 528),
A light guide (light guide section) is formed with a light emitting section (light emitting section 553) and is configured such that the pattern is displayed by emitting light supplied from the light emitting section from the light emitting section. 532) and
Changing means for changing the pattern displayed on the light guide by operating at least one of the light guide and the light emitting section to change the irradiation location of light from the light emitting section to the light guide. (Notification/performance control device 140).

In the pattern display means shown in feature A2, a pattern is displayed by emitting light from a light emitting section from a light emitting section formed in a light guide. Then, the pattern displayed on the light guide is changed by operating at least one of the light guide and the light emitting section to change the irradiation location of the light on the light guide. With such a configuration, the display of the patterns can be made innovative, which can contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A3. The light emitting section is arranged to face an end surface (end surface 554) of the light guide,
The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the changing means is configured to change a location where light from the light emitting section is irradiated onto the end surface.

By configuring the end face of the light guide to be irradiated with light from the light emitting section, it is possible to prevent the light source from being noticed when visually confirming the pattern.

Feature A4. The pattern displayed on the light guide is not visible when the light is not supplied from the light emitting unit to the light guide (unlit state), or the pattern displayed on the light guide is The gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3, wherein the gaming machine is difficult to see compared to a supply state (lit state) in which light is supplied to the light guide.

According to feature A4, the pattern becomes invisible or difficult to see (hereinafter also referred to as non-display) by changing from the supply state to the non-supply state. In this way, by making it possible to switch between displaying and non-displaying the symbols, it is possible to limit the information provided to the player by the symbol display means depending on the gaming situation. Furthermore, it can contribute to diversification of display modes when displaying patterns in a variable manner.

Feature A5. The changing means is configured to operate at least one of the light guide and the light emitting section in the supply state to change the irradiation location of the light on the light guide. A gaming machine described on A4.

When changing the pattern, if at least one of the light guide and the light emitting section is operated in the light supply state, the pattern can be made to appear to be moving in the direction of the movement.

Feature A6. The pattern display means has a holding part (base body 524) that operably holds the light guide,
The game according to any one of features A2 to A5, wherein the changing means is configured to operate the light guide to change the irradiation location of the light on the light guide. Machine.

If the configuration is such that the light guide itself is moved instead of the light emitting part (light source), it is possible to avoid restrictions on how the pattern can be changed due to the length of the wiring or the like. In addition, since the position of the light emitting part can be fixed, it is possible to replace the symbols displayed at the same position, and even when displaying symbols in a variable manner, the areas that players should pay attention to are unified. be able to. This is a preferable configuration in order to prevent missed display of symbols and to reduce player fatigue.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the operating direction of the light guide is set to intersect with the direction of light irradiation from the light emitting section.

As the light guide moves, it is possible to suppress changes in the distance between the light irradiation target (end face) and the light emitting part in the light guide. This is preferable in order to prevent the amount of light supplied to the light emitting portion from being insufficient due to the light from the light emitting portion being diffused before being irradiated onto the end face.

Feature A8. The light emitting parts are arranged side by side in the operating direction of the light guide,
The light emitting section includes a first light emitting section and a second light emitting section arranged side by side in the operating direction of the light guide,
Feature A6 or Feature A7 is characterized in that the pattern display means is capable of changing the number of displayed patterns by individually controlling the first light emitting section and the second light emitting section. The game machine described.

By using the first light emitting section and the second light emitting section that can be individually controlled to emit light in combination, it is possible to increase or decrease the number of displayed symbols depending on the gaming situation, etc., thereby dramatically increasing the expressive power of the symbol display means. can be improved.

Note that the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "the light emitting parts are arranged in the operating direction of the light guide, and the light emitting parts include first light emitting parts and The pattern display means includes a second light emitting section, and the number of patterns displayed at the predetermined display position in the operating direction by individually controlling the first light emitting section and the second light emitting section to emit light. The gaming machine according to feature A6 or feature A7, characterized in that the game machine can be changed.

Feature A9. The game according to any one of features A4 to A8, characterized in that the pattern display means includes means for stopping the supply of light from the light emitting section while the light guide is in operation. Machine.

Even in conventional gaming machines, it is possible to make the symbols virtually indistinguishable by, for example, displaying the symbols variably at high speed. However, such movement hinders improvement in the durability of the picture display means. In particular, since light guides are heavier than paper or the like, there is concern that such inconveniences will become more noticeable.

Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the pattern displayed on the light guide can be suddenly erased by stopping the supply of light from the light emitting section. By adopting a configuration in which the appearance is greatly changed (the identifiability is changed) by controlling the light emission of the light emitting section in this way, it is possible to diversify the display mode and suitably suppress the deterioration in durability caused by this.

For example, a display mode that clearly shows the process of pattern change and a display mode that does not clearly show the process of pattern change may be used together. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably diversify the modes of variable display of patterns.

Feature A10. The light emitting unit is a first light emitting unit, and the pattern is displayed at the predetermined display position by emitting light from the first light emitting unit from the light emitting unit located at the predetermined display position. It is composed of
The light emitting part has an uneven shape,
The picture display means has a second light emitting section (backlight 582 of the background display device 529) capable of emitting light from behind the gaming machine to a portion of the light guide located at the predetermined display position. The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A8.

If the light emitting part is composed of minute irregularities, environmental light such as lighting in the game hall will be diffused by the light emitting part, making it impossible to visually identify the position and shape of the light emitting part. It will be difficult to make it possible. In other words, it is possible to grasp the shape and position of the light emitting part by looking closely. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that light is irradiated from the second light emitting part to the light guide, the light from the second light emitting part can confuse environmental light, etc., and the shape and position of the light emitting part can be changed. It can be difficult to understand. This is preferable in order to strengthen the impact when a pattern suddenly appears by switching the supply state/non-supply state of the first light emitting section.

Feature A11. The changing means changes the light guide under a situation where the first light emitting section stops supplying light to the light guide and the second light emitting section is irradiating light to the light guide. The gaming machine according to feature A10, further comprising a means for operating the gaming machine.

When operating the light guide, it cannot be denied that by looking carefully, the light emitting portion may be used as a landmark to identify that the light guide is in operation. This becomes a factor that reduces the impact when suddenly changing the pattern by operating the light guide while the first light emitting section is in the non-supply state. Therefore, when replacing the patterns, as shown in this feature, the first light emitting section stops supplying light to the light guide, and the second light emitting section irradiates light to the light guide. If the light guide is operated at the bottom, the light from the second light emitting section can distract from environmental light. This makes it difficult to tell that the light guide is in operation, and can suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature A12. The second light emitting section includes, when the light emitting section is located at the predetermined display position, a portion of the light guide where the light emitting section is formed and a portion where the light emitting section is formed. The gaming machine according to feature A10 or feature A11, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to irradiate light to both parts that are not present.

According to feature A12, since the light from the second light emitting part is irradiated to the light emitting part located at a predetermined display position and its surrounding area, it is possible to identify the shape of the light emitting part, the operating status of the light guide, etc. The effect of making it difficult to understand can be suitably exerted.

Feature A13. The light guide is transparent and is configured so that the gaming machine (background display device 529) located on the back side thereof can be seen from the front of the gaming machine through the part where the picture is displayed,
The pattern may be invisible when in a non-supply state (unlit state) in which light is not supplied from the light emitting part to the light guide, or in a supply state (on) in which light is supplied from the light emitting part to the light guide. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A12, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be difficult to visually recognize compared to the state).

According to feature A13, the pattern becomes invisible or difficult to see when the supply state changes from the supply state to the non-supply state. Thereby, the visibility of the gaming machine located on the back side of the light guide can be changed through the light guide. For example, when playing a game with the main effect on the gaming device, by switching to a non-supply state and making the symbols invisible or difficult, it is possible to prevent the symbols from interfering with the visibility of the gaming device. can.

Feature A14. The picture display means includes:
a display device (second display unit) that is visible from the front of the gaming machine through the light guide;
It has a display control means for variably displaying the pattern on the display device (a function for controlling the light emission and drive of the second display unit by the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140),
The patterns include a first pattern displayed on the light guide and a second pattern displayed on the display device,
The first picture displayed on the light guide is not visible when the light is not supplied from the light emitting unit to the light guide (unlit state), or the first pattern is not visible from the light emitting unit. It becomes difficult to see compared to the supply state (lit state) in which light is supplied to the light guide,
The display control means is configured to perform variable display of the second picture on the display device in the non-supply state, while not performing variable display of the second picture on the display device in the supply state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A13.

According to feature A14, in a situation where one of the variable display of a picture by the light guide and the variable display of a picture by the display device is focused on, it is possible to prevent the other from becoming a factor that reduces visibility.

<Characteristic group B>
The following feature group B is: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays a pattern on the display screen in a fluctuating manner. When the game ball passes through the actuating port, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of symbols is started. In the case of winning, a specific symbol combination, etc. is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175). ``In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase the attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature B1. A gaming machine equipped with a pattern display means (variable display unit 500 and notification/performance control device 140) that variably displays a pattern as the game progresses,
The picture display means includes:
It has an annular or substantially annular shape centered on a predetermined central axis (rotation center axis CL), is provided so as to be rotatable around the predetermined central axis, and a part of the outer peripheral surface (outer surface portion 551) is a gaming machine. a light guide section (light guide section 532) arranged to face forward;
a light emitting part (side light 528) that supplies light to an end face (end face 554) facing in the same direction as the predetermined central axis in the light guide part;
A plurality of light emitting parts (light emitting parts 553) are provided on the outer circumferential surface, arranged in the rotational direction of the light guide part,
The light guide section is configured to display the pattern by emitting light supplied from the light emitting section to the outside of the light guide section,
A gaming machine characterized in that, by rotating the light guide section about the predetermined central axis, a supply location on the end surface of the light guide section to which light is supplied from the light emitting section is changed.

According to feature B1, by rotating the annular or substantially annular light guide, the light supply location in the light guide (end surface) is changed. As a result, the pattern is variably displayed on the light guide section. Since the light guide has an annular or substantially annular shape, the variable display of the picture can be continued without reversing the direction of rotation of the light guide. In other words, when performing dynamic display using the light guide and enhancing expressiveness, it is possible to prevent the light guide from becoming excessively large. This is a preferable configuration in order to improve the player's attention level.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as "information acquisition means (on hold in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (on hold information) when a predetermined acquisition condition (winning to the operating ports 83a, 83) is met. a lottery means (a lottery function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that performs a lottery based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means), and a notification means (a lottery function in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that notifies the lottery results by the lottery means. A gaming machine comprising a main display unit 87) and a pattern display means (variable display unit 500 and notification/performance control device 140) that variably displays a pattern according to the progress of the game, wherein the pattern display means is , has an annular or substantially annular shape centered on a predetermined central axis (rotation center axis CL), is provided so as to be rotatable around the predetermined central axis, and a part of the outer circumferential surface (outer surface portion 551) A light guide section (light guide section 532) arranged to face the front of the aircraft, and a light emitting section (side light 528) that supplies light to an end surface (end surface 554) of the light guide section facing the central axis direction. A plurality of light emitting parts (light emitting parts 553) are provided on the outer circumferential surface of the light emitting part (light emitting parts 553) arranged in the rotational direction of the light guide part, and the light guide part is provided with a plurality of light emitting parts (light emitting parts 553) that are supplied from the light emitting part. The pattern is displayed by emitting light from the light emitting section, and when the light guide section rotates about the predetermined central axis, the end surface of the light guide section It is also possible to provide a game machine characterized in that a supply location to which light is supplied from the light emitting section is changed in the above.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that, by changing the supply location, a light emitting section to which light is emitted among the plurality of light emitting sections is switched.

As shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the light emitting section that is the target of light emission is switched, the pattern displayed at a predetermined display position can be changed (replaced). If the displayed patterns are replaced in this way, it is possible to greatly change the appearance of the display by the pattern display means.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the light guide portion has an annular shape, and the end surface is located on a plane perpendicular to the predetermined central axis.

According to feature B3, the distance from the light emitting section to the end surface of the light guide section is constant at any rotational position. Therefore, there is no need to change the position or orientation of the light emitting section in response to changes in the light supply location. Therefore, the configuration related to light supply in the picture display means can be simplified.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the light emitting section is configured such that the direction of irradiation of light is the same as the predetermined central axis.

In the configuration shown in feature B4, the light irradiation direction and the arrangement direction of the light emitting parts intersect. In other words, when using a plurality of light emitting sections in combination, it is avoided that the light emitting sections are lined up in the light irradiation direction. Therefore, when switching the displayed picture according to the rotation position, it is possible to suppress the supply of light to the picture that is not to be displayed, and to prevent the picture that should not be displayed from emitting a faint light. The occurrence of inconvenience can be suitably avoided.

Feature B5. The light guide portion is formed such that regions where the light emitting portion is provided and regions where the light emitting portion is not provided are alternately formed in the rotation direction of the light guide portion,
The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein a regulating section for regulating passage of light is provided in a portion of the end surface of the light guiding section corresponding to the non-disposed area.

As shown in feature B5, by arranging the arrangement area and the non-arrangement area alternately and then providing a regulating part in the part corresponding to the non-arrangement area, the light supply path can be made to reach the non-arrangement area. Straddling can be suppressed. Thereby, the effect shown in feature B4 can be more suitably exhibited.

Feature B6. A rotating body (rotating body 525) is configured by the light guiding section and a frame (frame 531) to which the light guiding section is fixed,
An end portion of the light guide portion on the side where the end surface is formed extends laterally from the frame,
comprising an insertion part (insertion part 561) through which the end of the light guide part is inserted;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B5, wherein the light emitting portion is disposed in a portion of the insertion portion that faces the end surface.

As shown in feature B3, etc., in a structure in which the light guide part has an annular shape, an insertion part is provided through which the part (end) extending from the frame is inserted in the light guide part, and this insertion part is inserted. The following effects can be expected by arranging the light emitting section in the section. That is, even if the movement of the light guide becomes unstable, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the light guide at a location (insertion part) close to the light irradiation position. Thereby, the light supply function can be stably performed.

Note that by making the insertion portion colored and opaque to hide the light emitting portion, the appearance of the pattern display means can be suitably improved.

Feature B7. The game according to feature B6, wherein the picture display means has a base body (base body 524) that rotatably holds the rotating body, and the insertion portion is provided in the base body. Machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by providing the insertion portion in the base body holding the rotary body, the gap between the rotation body and the light guide portion can be made as small as possible. This is preferable in terms of suppressing strong interference between the insertion part and the light guide part and suppressing light leakage from the insertion part.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to feature B6 or feature B7, wherein the insertion portion faces the outer circumferential surface and the inner circumferential surface of the light guide portion with a gap in between.

In a configuration that changes the positional relationship between the light emitting part and the light guide part, there is a concern that if the light guide part and the insertion part come into contact and the light guide part is damaged, light leakage may occur at that part. be done. This becomes a factor that reduces the efficiency of supplying light to the light emitting section. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by forming a gap between the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the light guide part to avoid contact between the insertion part and the light guide part, such inconveniences can be prevented. This can be suitably suppressed.

Feature B9. The game according to feature B8, characterized in that the insertion part is open to the original side in the rotational direction of the light guide part, and is expanded so that the gap becomes larger toward the open part. Machine.

Regarding the above-mentioned light guide section, for example, by dividing it into a plurality of pieces in the rotation direction, it is possible to contribute to facilitation of manufacturing and reduction of manufacturing costs. However, in such a configuration, if the boundary (edge) of each piece were to be caught in the open part (entrance part) of the insertion part, it is assumed that the behavior of the light guide part would be disturbed. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the above-mentioned gap is formed so as to become larger toward the open portion, and by suppressing the catching between the edge and the insertion portion, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature B10. The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein the open portion of the insertion portion has a component facing toward the rear of the gaming machine.

In a configuration in which the open portion (entrance portion) is expanded as shown in feature B9, light tends to leak from this portion. Therefore, by directing the open portion toward the rear side of the gaming machine, even if light leaks, it can be made less noticeable.

It is also possible to apply each technical concept shown in the feature A group to the features B1 to B10 detailed above.

<Feature C group>
The following characteristic group C is described as follows: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a pattern on the display screen. When the game ball passes through the actuating port, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of symbols is started. In the case of winning, a specific symbol combination, etc. is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175). ``In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase the attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature C1. A gaming machine equipped with a pattern display means (variable display unit 500) that variably displays a pattern as the game progresses,
The pattern display means is
A first light emitting part (for example, a light emitting part 553 corresponding to a "6" symbol) and a second light emitting part (for example, a light emitting part 553 corresponding to a "7" symbol) are formed, and have light transmittance. A light guide section (light guide section) switchable between a first state in which the first light emitting section is located at a predetermined display position (effective line) and a second state in which the second light emitting section is located at the predetermined display position. 532) and
a drive unit (motor 526) that drives the light guide unit;
A drive control means (drive control function in the MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 140) that switches the light guide section between the first state and the second state by controlling the drive section;
a light emitting section (side light 528) that supplies light to the end surface of the light guide section;
It has a light emission control means (light emission control function in the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140) that controls the light emission of the light emitting part,
The pattern includes a first pattern (for example, a "6" pattern) that is displayed when light supplied from the light emitting section is emitted from the first light emitting section in the first state, and a first pattern (for example, a "6" pattern) that is displayed in the first state. a second pattern (for example, a "7" pattern) that is displayed when the light supplied from the light emitting section is emitted from the second light emitting section;
The light emission control means includes a supply stop means for stopping the supply of light by the light emitting section when switching from the first state to the second state,
The drive control means uses at least a part of the period during which the supply of light is stopped by the supply stop means as a drive period for driving the drive unit when switching from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to.

According to feature C1, when switching from the first state to the second state, the light guide section operates using a period during which light supply by the light emitting section is stopped (light-off period). With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to notice the movement of the drive unit, and it is possible to make it appear as if the symbols displayed at a predetermined display position have suddenly been replaced. Such an innovative display can contribute to increasing the level of attention to the game.

Feature C2. The supply stop means stops the supply of light by the light emitting section before the light guiding section starts operating or at the same time as the light guiding section starts operating when switching from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that the gaming machine has a means for causing.

According to feature C2, the movement of the light guide section becomes less noticeable when the patterns displayed at a predetermined display position are replaced. Thereby, the effect shown in feature C1 can be suitably exhibited.

Note that the configuration shown in this feature is as follows: "The drive control means controls the drive section of the drive section after the supply of light is stopped by the supply stop means when switching from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that it has a means for starting.

Feature C3. The supply stop means includes means for stopping the supply of light by the light emitting section after the light guide section starts operating when switching from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine according to feature C1.

According to feature C3, when a moving picture suddenly disappears and the display of the picture is resumed, it can be made to appear as if it has been replaced by another picture. By providing such eye-catching changes, monotony of picture display can be suitably suppressed.

Feature C4. Feature C1, characterized in that the light emission control means includes means for restarting the supply of light after the operation of the light guide section is stopped when switching from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C3.

When the supply of light is started after the replacement of the light emitting parts is completed, a different picture (replaced picture) suddenly appears at a predetermined display position, thereby enhancing the visual impact.

Feature C5. A waiting period from when the operation of the light guide section stops until the supply of light is resumed is shorter than an operation period during which the light guide section operates when switching from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine according to feature C4.

As shown in feature C4, in a configuration in which light supply is restarted after the light guide stops operating, the waiting period until restart is longer, so that the next symbol to be displayed can be visually identified by the player. The possibility increases. This is because the light emitting section is irradiated with ambient light from a game hall or the like, so that if one looks closely, the external shape of the light emitting section can be identified. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed by shortening the waiting period when replacing the pictures.

Feature C6. The light emission control means includes means for starting the supply of the light prior to switching to the second state when the light guide section is switched from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

For example, when displaying a picture frame-by-frame at a predetermined display position, as the operating speed of the light guide (e.g. scrolling speed or fluctuating speed) becomes faster, the display period of the picture at the predetermined display position becomes shorter. . There is a concern that this will make it difficult to visually identify the pattern. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the light is supplied in advance, such inconveniences can be suppressed. This is preferable in terms of increasing the operating speed of the light guiding section and improving responsiveness in switching patterns and the like.

Feature C7. The drive control means includes:
a first control means for operating the light guide section at a first speed to switch from the first state to the second state;
and a second control means for operating the light guide at a second speed faster than the first speed to switch from the first state to the second state,
The light emission control means includes means for starting the supply of light prior to switching to the second state when the second state is switched from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

For example, when displaying a picture frame-by-frame at a predetermined display position, as the operating speed of the light guide (e.g. scrolling speed or fluctuating speed) becomes faster, the display period of the picture at the predetermined display position becomes shorter. . There is a concern that this will make it difficult to visually identify the pattern. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the light guide is operated at the latter of the relatively slow first speed and the relatively fast second speed, the light supply is restarted in advance. , such inconveniences can be suppressed.

Feature C8. A first period and a second period shorter than the first period are provided as a stop display period for stopping and displaying the pattern at the predetermined display position,
When switching from the first state to the second state, the light emission control means may switch to the second state if the second period is set as a stop display period of a pattern in the second state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, further comprising means for starting the supply of the light prior to the start of the supply of the light.

When the stop display period of a pattern at a predetermined display position becomes short, it becomes difficult to visually identify the pattern. Therefore, in such a case (when a relatively short second period is set), the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be avoided by configuring a configuration in which the supply of light is restarted prior to switching to the second state. This can be suitably suppressed.

Feature C9. When the drive control means switches from the first state to the second state and the supply of light by the light emission control means is stopped, the drive control means controls the light guide section during the switching process. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured not to stop the game midway.

When replacing the patterns shown in feature C1, etc., there is a concern that the impact will be reduced because the process can be visually identified. In particular, even when the light emitting section is made difficult to see by making the light guide section transparent, the light emitting section can be identified when the light guide section is stopped. Therefore, when switching from the first state to the second state, the light guide section is configured not to be stopped midway through the process, so that the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature C10. Any of features C1 to C9, characterized in that the light emission control means includes a supply continuation means for continuing the supply of light by the light emitting section when switching from the first state to the second state. The gaming machine described in item 1.

By using the configuration shown in Feature C10 and the configuration shown in Feature C1, etc., in other words, by using a combination of a structure that shows the process of switching pictures and a structure that does not show it, the impact when the displayed pictures are suddenly changed can be reduced. It can be strengthened.

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to B to the features C1 to C10 detailed above.

<Characteristic group D>
The following feature group D includes: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays a pattern on the display screen in a fluctuating manner. When the game ball passes through the actuating port, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of symbols is started. In the case of winning, a specific symbol combination, etc. is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175). ``In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase the attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature D1. A gaming machine equipped with a pattern display means (variable display unit 500) that variably displays a pattern based on the fulfillment of a predetermined starting condition (a winning in the operating ports 83a, 83b),
The picture display means includes:
A base body (base body 524) held rotatably;
a plurality of light guide plates (light guide panels 555 to 557) having transparency and arranged in parallel in the rotation direction of the base body;
a light emitting unit (side light 528) that supplies light to an end face of the light guide plate facing in a direction intersecting the rotation direction;
A gaming machine characterized in that the light guide plates are attached to the base body in a state in which the light guide plates are not fixed to each other.

By configuring the pattern display means (specifically, the light guide unit) by a plurality of light guide plates arranged in parallel in the rotation direction as shown in feature D1, the shape of the pattern display means can be made into, for example, a substantially annular shape. . Such a configuration can contribute to facilitating the manufacture of the pattern display means and reducing manufacturing costs, compared to, for example, a case where one light guide plate is formed in an annular shape. Here, when a plurality of parallel light guide plates are coupled to each other, distortion may occur due to manufacturing variations or the like. In a configuration in which light is supplied to the end face of the light guide plate, there is a concern that the effect of such distortion may cause variations in the positional relationship between the light emitting portion and the end face, and that the pattern display function may not be performed effectively. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by mounting a plurality of light guides on the base body without fixing them to each other, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed. This is preferable in order to suppress deterioration in appearance when displaying patterns variably using a light guide plate, and to improve player's attention.

Feature D2. Feature D1 characterized in that the light guide plate is fixed to the base body at an intermediate portion of the light guide plate in the rotation direction, and both ends in the rotation direction are free ends. The gaming machine described in .

When a plurality of light guide plates are combined to form one light guide unit as shown in feature D1, the appearance of the light guide unit is degraded because the boundary between the light guide plates becomes conspicuous. This is not preferable in terms of increasing player attention. Furthermore, in the configuration in which the light guide plate is fixed to the base body as shown in feature D1, the portions of the light guide plate that are fixed to the base body may be different in appearance from the portions that are not fixed. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the ends of each light guide on both sides in the rotation direction are free ends, and the fixed location is kept away from the boundary between the light guides. This prevents the player's line of sight from being guided to the boundary area when the fixed point enters the player's field of vision, and reduces the appearance caused by configuring one light guide unit by combining multiple light guides. can be suppressed.

Feature D3. Feature D1 or The gaming machine described in feature D2.

As shown in feature D3, by arranging adjacent light guide plates so that their end faces in the rotating direction face each other with a gap in between, it is possible to prevent the light guide plates from coming into contact with each other due to manufacturing errors of the light guide plates. . This is preferable in order to suppress the occurrence of distortion etc. shown in feature D1.

Moreover, arranging each light guide plate so that the inner and outer sides are not doubled is advantageous in suppressing an increase in the weight of the unit and suppressing a decrease in responsiveness when operating the picture display means.

Feature D4. The light emitting unit is configured to emit light in a predetermined direction,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein end surfaces of the light guide plate on both sides in the rotation direction extend in the predetermined direction.

When a light guide unit is constituted by a plurality of light guide plates as shown in feature D1 etc., it is preferable to make the boundary portions of these light guides as inconspicuous as possible. Here, as shown in this feature, by aligning the irradiation direction of light with the direction in which the boundary portion (end surface) extends, it is possible to suppress the boundary portion from emitting light. This is preferable in order to improve the appearance of the picture display means.

Feature D5. The pattern display means displays the pattern by emitting light from the light emitting part from a light emitting part formed in the light guide plate, and the pattern display means displays the pattern by emitting light from the light emitting part from a light emitting part formed in the light guide plate, and emitting the light in the rotating direction of the base body. The arrangement area and the non-arrangement area of the part are arranged alternately,
The boundary portion between the light guide plates is located in the non-disposed area,
The light emitting unit is configured to irradiate light in the direction of the rotation center axis of the base body,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein end surfaces of the light guide plate on both sides in the rotation direction extend in the direction of the rotation center axis.

When a light guide unit is constituted by a plurality of light guide plates as shown in feature D1 etc., it is preferable to make the boundary portions of these light guides as inconspicuous as possible. Here, as shown in this feature, by aligning the irradiation direction of light with the direction in which the boundary portion (end surface) extends, it is possible to suppress the boundary portion from emitting light. This is preferable in order to improve the appearance of the picture display means.

In addition, the border area is located in the non-design area (blank area), but since this boundary area extends in the direction of the rotation center axis, the border area is located in the non-design area (blank area). Excessive growth can be suppressed.

Feature D6. The pattern display means displays the pattern by emitting light from the light emitting part from a light emitting part formed in the light guide plate, and the pattern display means displays the pattern by emitting light from the light emitting part from a light emitting part formed in the light guide plate, and the light emitting part is configured to display the pattern by emitting light from the light emitting part from a light emitting part formed in the light guide plate. The arrangement area and the non-arrangement area of the part are arranged alternately,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the boundary between the light guide plates is located in the non-disposed area.

As shown in feature D6, if the boundary between the light guide plates is located in a pattern-free area (blank area), the boundary may become conspicuous due to light leaking from the boundary, or It is possible to suppress a decrease in supply efficiency.

Feature D7. The light guide plates are each formed to have a curved surface having the same thickness, and the outer surfaces of the light guides form a circular imaginary surface centered on the rotation center axis of the base body. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that: is formed.

According to feature D7, it becomes possible to replace the light guide to which light is supplied depending on the rotational position of the light guide unit, and it is possible to suppress the complexity of the structure of the pattern display means.

Feature D8. Features D1 to D1 are characterized in that each end face of the light guide plate facing the rotation center direction of the base body and to which light from the light emitting unit is supplied is located on the same plane. The gaming machine according to any one of feature D7.

According to feature D8, it is possible to suppress differences in the distance relationship between the light emitting portion and the end face (light irradiation location) for each light guide, and contribute to improving the light supply efficiency.

Feature D9. The pattern display means stops and displays a pattern at a predetermined display position (valid line L1 to L5) based on a lottery result by a lottery device (a lottery function in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162),
Feature D1, characterized in that the number of light emitting parts formed on each of the plurality of light guide plates is configured to be larger than the upper limit number of the number of pictures displayed at the predetermined display position. The gaming machine according to any one of features D8 to D8.

If the number of light guides (the number of divisions) is excessively increased, there will be an increased chance that the boundary portion of the light guide will stop at the predetermined display position. There is a concern that this may be a factor that deteriorates the appearance of the picture display means. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the number of divisions is defined so that the number of patterns disposed on each light guide is greater than the upper limit number of patterns that can stop at a predetermined display position, the boundary portion can be It is possible to reduce the chances of stopping at a predetermined display position. Thereby, the adverse effects caused by using a plurality of light guides together can be alleviated.

It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to C to the features D1 to D9 detailed above.

<Characteristic group E>
The following characteristic group E includes: ``Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a pattern display device that displays a pattern on the display screen in a fluctuating manner. When the game ball passes through the actuation port, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of symbols is started. In the case of winning, a specific symbol combination, etc. is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). ``In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase the attention to games.However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature E1. A game board (game board unit 80) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A first special device that acquires first special information (for example, pending information regarding the upper operation port 83a) when a ball enters a first starting ball entry portion (for example, the upper operation port 83a) provided in the gaming area; Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing based on the ball entering the upper operating port 83a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
a first acquisition information storage means (upper operation opening holding area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
A first lottery means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 sends to the upper operating port 83a) which sequentially performs a first lottery process (lotteries such as jackpots) based on the first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means. ), and
Second special information for acquiring second special information (retention information related to the lower operating port 83b) when a ball enters a second starting ball entry portion (for example, the lower operating port 83b) provided in the gaming area. Acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing based on the ball entering the lower operating port 83b in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
a second acquired information storage means (lower operation opening holding area Rb of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
A second lottery means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 sends the lower operating port 83b to the ), and
It has a first display section (for example, the rotating body 525Z of the first display unit) and a second display section (for example, the rotating body 725Z of the second display unit), and a picture is displayed on each of the first display section and the second display section. a pattern display means (variable display unit 500Z) capable of variably displaying;
When the first lottery process is performed by the first lottery process, a first display control unit (for example, a controller of the main controller 162) displays a pattern corresponding to the result of the first lottery process on the first display unit. (a function of executing the game time control process related to the upper operating port 83a in the MPU 602);
When the second lottery process is performed by the second lottery process, a second display control unit (for example, a controller of the main controller 162) displays a pattern corresponding to the result of the second lottery process on the second display unit. The MPU 602 has a function of executing the game time control process related to the lower operating port 83b,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first display section is transparent, and the second display section is visible through the first display section.

According to feature E1, the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the first starting ball section is displayed on the first display section, and the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the second starting ball entering section is displayed on the first display section. Displayed on 2 display sections. In this way, by separately providing the first display section for the first starting ball entering section and the second display section for the second starting ball entering section, the player can determine which starting ball entering section the ball enters. Based on this, it is possible to quickly grasp whether the game is progressing or not. However, if a display section is provided for each starting ball entry section in this way, there is a concern that the burden on the player will increase and the chance of overlooking the lottery results will increase due to the scattered locations that require attention. In this regard, as shown in this feature, since the second display section is configured to be visible through the first display section, there are cases where attention is focused on the first display section and when attention is focused on the second display section. The amount of movement of the line of sight can be reduced. Therefore, while uniqueness is strengthened by providing a separate display for each starting ball entry section, the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above due to this can be suitably suppressed. Thereby, the effect of increasing attention to the game can be suitably strengthened.

Feature E2. The first display section and the second display section are arranged such that the display surface (outer surface) of the first display section and the display surface (outer surface) of the second display section are parallel to each other. The gaming machine described in feature E1.

According to feature E2, it is possible to suppress a large difference in visibility between the pattern display on the first display section and the pattern display on the second display section.

Feature E3. The first display control means has means for variably displaying the symbols on the first display section and then stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result by the first lottery means,
The second display control means includes means for variably displaying the symbols on the second display section and then stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result by the second lottery means;
A variable display area where a pattern is variably displayed on the first display section and a variable display area where a pattern is variably displayed on the second display section overlap front and back when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2.

As shown in this feature, if the variable display area of the picture on the first display section and the variable display area of the picture on the second display section are configured to overlap one after the other, the player may focus on one of the display sections. When variable display of a picture is performed on the other display part under certain circumstances, the chances of the variable display being overlooked can be suitably reduced without making the performance flashy or giving unnecessary accents.

Feature E4. The first display control means has means for variably displaying the symbols on the first display section and then stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result by the first lottery device on the first valid line;
The second display control means has means for variably displaying the symbols on the second display section and then stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result by the second lottery device on a second active line;
A stop display area in which the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the first active line and a stop display area in which the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the second active line overlap in the front and back directions when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3.

As shown in this feature, by overlapping the stop display areas in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the lottery results are stopped and displayed in the first and second display sections, which symbol combinations correspond to the current lottery results. This makes it easy to identify what is being done.

In addition, in the configuration in which the lottery results are notified by the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed on the active line, the active line in the first display part and the active line in the second display part are overlapped one after the other when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. It is also possible to do so.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to feature E3 or feature E4, wherein the pattern group displayed on the first display section and the pattern group displayed on the second display section are different in appearance.

As shown in feature E3 and feature E4, in a configuration in which the static display area and the variable display area are overlapped one after the other, by making the picture groups displayed on each display section different in appearance, it is possible to It is possible to improve the ability to identify whether a pattern is displayed.

In particular, as shown in feature E4, in a configuration in which the effective lines are aligned front and back, the pattern on the first display section and the pattern on the second display section coexist, so that, for example, each display section can handle deviations. Even though the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed, it can be preferably avoided that it appears as if the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed.

Feature E6. As a display control mode of the first display section and the second display section by the first display control means and the second display control means, a picture is variably displayed on the first display section, while the second display section a first control mode that regulates the variable display of the picture on the second display section, and a second control mode that regulates the variable display of the picture on the first display section while displaying the picture variably on the second display section;
In the first control mode and the second control mode, during a period when variable display is regulated, the image on the display section subject to the regulation is configured to be hidden. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5.

According to feature E6, by hiding the picture on the second display section in the first control mode and hiding the picture on the first display section in the second control mode, the display on the first display section and the picture on the first display section can be changed. Confusion with the display on the second display section can be suitably suppressed.

Feature E7. The first display control means is configured to, when a lottery is won by the first lottery means during the second control mode, display a picture corresponding to the winning result in a state where it is stopped on the first display section. having a first special display means for displaying,
When a lottery is won by the second lottery means during the first control mode, the second display control means causes a picture corresponding to the winning result to be stopped on the second display section. The gaming machine according to feature E6, characterized in that it has a second special display means for displaying.

In a configuration in which the drawings by each drawing means are conducted in parallel, there is a possibility of winning the drawing by the second drawing means during the first control mode, or winning a drawing by the first drawing means during the second control mode. There is. In such a case, it is possible to use a display section other than the display section on the winning side to notify the winning result, but this may confuse the player. On the other hand, if the symbols are displayed variably in the process up to displaying the lottery results, the variable symbols will be displayed overlappingly on both display sections, resulting in too much information being provided to the player. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if a lottery is won by the first lottery means during the second control mode, the first display section displays the symbol corresponding to the winning result in a stopped state, If a lottery is won by the second lottery means during the first control mode, the second display section displays the pattern corresponding to the winning result in a stopped state, thereby preventing the above-mentioned various inconveniences. can be suitably suppressed.

Feature E8. The first display section includes a first light guide section (light guide section 532Z) in which a plurality of light emitting sections that are transparent and are arranged in a predetermined direction are formed, and a first light guide section that directs light to the first light guide section. It has a first light emitting section (side light 528Z) that supplies light, and a first drive section (motor 526Z) that operates the first light guiding section in the predetermined direction, and the light from the first light emitting section is transmitted to the first light emitting section. 1. The pattern is displayed by being emitted from a light emitting part formed in the light guide part,
The first display control means has a drive control means (drive control function in the MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 140) that drives and controls the drive section, and operates the first light guide section by the drive control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to display symbols variably.

As shown in this feature, if the first display section is composed of a movable first light guiding section, a light emitting section, and a driving section, the picture on the first display section can be switched between display and non-display as necessary. can. Thereby, coexistence with the second display section located behind can be suitably realized.

Feature E9. The first light emitting section is configured to emit light in a direction intersecting a direction in which the first display section and the second display section are arranged side by side,
The gaming machine according to feature E8, characterized in that the light from the first light emitting section is configured to be supplied to an end surface of the first light guiding section.

According to feature E9, the light from the first light emitting section is irradiated in a direction intersecting the direction in which the first display section and the second display section are arranged in parallel, and is supplied to the end surface of the first light guide section. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the pattern display from becoming difficult to understand due to the light from the first light emitting section being irradiated onto the second display section side.

Feature E10. The first display control means has a light emission control means (light emission control function in the MPU 652 of the notification/effect control device 140) that controls light emission of the first light emitting section,
The light emission control means and the drive control means control the first light guide while keeping the first light emitting section in a light-off state when the second display control means is displaying a picture on the second display section. The gaming machine according to feature E8 or feature E9, characterized in that the gaming machine has a special control means for operating the section.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the first light guiding section is operated when a pattern is displayed on the second display section, the pattern on the first display section remains hidden. Therefore, it is possible to avoid confusing the player due to the operation of the first light guiding section.

Feature E11. The gaming machine according to feature E10, wherein the special control means is configured to turn on the first light emitting section after the operation of the first light guide section stops.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even when a pattern is displayed on the second display section, the first light emitting section is turned on after operating the first light guide section in the off state. By doing so, it is possible to notify the lottery result related to the first starting ball entry section. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the pattern display on the second display section from becoming difficult to understand during the process of notifying the lottery results.

Feature E12. The first light guide part has an annular shape or a substantially annular shape, and is held rotatably about a central axis of the first light guide part,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E8 to E11, wherein the second display section is disposed inside the first light guide section.

As shown in this feature, if the first light guiding part is formed in an annular or annular shape and is configured to rotate around its central axis, it is possible to ensure the variable display function of the picture in the first display part. , the distance between the first display section and the second display section can be reduced.

Feature E13. The second display section includes a second light guide section (light guide section 732Z) in which a plurality of light emitting sections are transparent and arranged in the predetermined direction, and a second light guide section (light guide section 732Z) that transmits light to the second light guide section. a second light emitting section (side light 728Z) that supplies the light, and a second drive section (motor 726Z) that moves the second light guiding section in the predetermined direction; The pattern is displayed by being emitted from a light emitting part formed in the second light guide part,
The second light guide part has an annular shape or a substantially annular shape, and is held rotatably about the central axis of the first light guide part,
The second display control means has a drive control means (drive control function in the MPU 652 of the notification/presentation control device 140) that drives and controls the drive section, and operates the second light guide section by the drive control means. By doing so, it is configured to display a variable pattern.
The first light emitting section is configured to emit light in the direction of the central axis of the first light guide, and the second light emitting section is configured to emit light in the direction of the center axis of the second light guide. The gaming machine according to any one of features E8 to E12.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the first display section (first light guide section) and the second display section (second light guide section) are brought close to each other, and the light from the first light emitting section is transmitted to the second light guide section. It is possible to suppress the supply of light from the second light emitting section to the first light guide section.

Feature E14. A game board (game board unit 80) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A first special device that acquires first special information (for example, pending information regarding the upper operation port 83a) when a ball enters a first starting ball entry portion (for example, the upper operation port 83a) provided in the gaming area; Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing based on the ball entering the upper operating port 83a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
a first acquisition information storage means (upper operation opening holding area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
A first lottery means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 sends to the upper operating port 83a) which sequentially performs a first lottery process (lotteries such as jackpots) based on the first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means. ), and
Second special information for acquiring second special information (retention information related to the lower operating port 83b) when a ball enters a second starting ball entry portion (for example, the lower operating port 83b) provided in the gaming area. Acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing based on the ball entering the lower operating port 83b in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
a second acquired information storage means (lower operation opening holding area Rb of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
A second lottery means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 sends the lower operating port 83b to the ), and
A pattern display having a first display section (e.g., a first display unit) and a second display section (e.g., a second display unit), and in which a pattern can be variably displayed on each of the first display section and the second display section. means (for example, variable display unit 500Z);
Starting variable display of symbols on the first display section prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means. The first special stored in the first acquired information storage means is defined as one game round in which a stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the symbols is ended. A first game round control means that can control the picture display means so that the symbols of each game round are displayed variably according to the information (for example, the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 controls the game round concerning the upper operating port 83a). functions) and
Starting variable display of symbols on the second display section prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means. The second special stored in the second acquired information storage means is defined as one game round in which a stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the symbols is ended. A second game round control means that can control the picture display means so that the symbols of each game round are displayed variably according to the information (for example, the game round control unit related to the lower operating port 83b by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) function to execute processing),
The first display section and the second display section are arranged in parallel, front and back, with the first display section on the front side and the second display section on the back side, and the second display section is arranged in parallel with the second display section. A gaming machine characterized by being visible from the front of the gaming machine through a display section.

According to feature E14, the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the first starting ball section is displayed on the first display section, and the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the second starting ball entering section is displayed on the first display section. Displayed on 2 display sections. In this way, by separately providing the first display section for the first starting ball entering section and the second display section for the second starting ball entering section, the player can determine which starting ball entering section the ball enters. Based on this, it is possible to quickly grasp whether the game is progressing or not. However, if a display section is provided for each starting ball entry section in this way, there is a concern that the burden on the player will increase and the chance of overlooking the lottery results will increase due to the scattered locations that require attention. In this regard, as shown in this feature, since the second display section is configured to be visible through the first display section, there are cases where attention is focused on the first display section and when attention is focused on the second display section. The amount of movement of the line of sight can be reduced. Therefore, while uniqueness is strengthened by providing a separate display for each starting ball entry section, the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above due to this can be suitably suppressed. Thereby, the effect of increasing attention to the game can be suitably strengthened.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the above features E2 to E13 to feature E14.

Further, it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to D to the features E1 to E14 described in detail above.

<Characteristic group F>
The following feature group F is as follows: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a game board that has a gaming area where game balls flow down.Game balls are released based on the player's firing operation. When the fired game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of the game ball. In gaming machines where the award of benefits depends on the movement of the game ball, by placing game parts such as nails and windmills in the game area, the falling path of the game ball can be dispersed and the movement of the game ball can be diversified. There is a technique that increases attention to the movement of the game ball and, in turn, to the game (for example, see Patent Document 1). There is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to attract more attention to the system.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature F1. A game board (game board unit 80) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming device (gaming mechanism 800) provided at a position visible from the front of the gaming machine,
The gaming device includes a rolling surface (stage section 831) on which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can roll, and a movable section (movable body 821) that can be displaced to a first position and a second position. , when the game ball is placed on the rolling surface, the movable part is displaced from the first position to the second position, and when the game ball leaves the rolling surface, the movable part is moved to the second position. It is configured to be displaced from to the first position,
A game machine characterized in that the period during which the game ball stays on the rolling surface varies depending on the rolling manner of the game ball.

According to feature F1, when the game ball is placed on the rolling surface, the movable part is displaced from the first position to the second position, and when the game ball leaves the rolling surface, the movable part is displaced from the second position to the first position. Return to position. Here, depending on the rolling manner of the game ball on the rolling surface (for example, the rolling direction and rolling speed of the game ball), a difference occurs in the staying period on the rolling surface. In other words, the period during which the movable part is located at the second position depends on the stay period. In this way, by suppressing the monotonous movement of the gaming machine, it is possible to contribute to increasing the level of attention to the game.

The configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a game board (game board unit 80) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game device (game mechanism 800) provided at a position that is visible from the front of the game machine. A gaming machine comprising: a rolling surface (stage section 831) on which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can roll; and a movable surface that can be displaced to a first position and a second position. (movable body 821), and when the game ball is placed on the rolling surface, the movable part is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the game ball is detached from the rolling surface. The gaming machine is characterized in that the movable part is configured to be displaced from the second position to the first position in the case where the movable part moves from the second position to the first position.

Feature F2. The stage portion on which the rolling surface is formed is held movably up and down,
The movable part is displaced from the first position to the second position by descending from the standby position to the lowered position against the biasing force, and the stage part is moved from the lowered position to the standby position by the biasing force. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the movable part is displaced from the second position to the first position by returning to the position.

According to feature F2, the movable part is displaced to the first position/second position in conjunction with the vertical movement of the stage part on which the rolling surface is formed. Here, by making the operating direction of the stage part up and down, it is possible to suppress the behavior of the game ball from changing due to the movement of the stage part. This is preferable in order to alleviate the imbalance in the waiting period during which game balls wait on the rolling surface.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the stage section is configured to move from the standby position to the lowered position by the weight of the game ball placed on the rolling surface.

As shown in this feature, if the configuration utilizes the weight of the game ball located on the rolling surface, for example, a sensor that detects the game ball on the rolling surface or a movable part based on the detection result of the sensor may be used. No electrical configuration such as an actuator for displacement is required. Therefore, while increasing the attention to the game, it is possible to suppress the complication of the configuration caused by this. This is preferable in order to promote the use of the configuration shown in feature F1 and the like.

Feature F4. The game device has a link part (link member 840) that connects the stage part and the movable part and is rotatably held at an intermediate position between the stage part and the movable part, and the link part 840 connects the stage part and the movable part. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the stage part and the movable part are configured to be displaced alternately.

In the configuration in which the stage section is raised and lowered using the weight of the game ball as shown in feature F3, the driving force depends on the weight of the game ball. As shown in this feature, the stage part is arranged at one end of the link part that is rotatably held, and the movable part is arranged at the other end, so that the movement of the stage part and the movable part is alternated up and down. By forming it so that it becomes, output transmission loss can be reduced. This is preferable in order to increase the reliability of the operation of the gaming machine, assuming that the driving force is small.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein the rotational center of the link part is arranged so as to be biased towards the movable part of the stage part and the movable part.

If the center of rotation is moved closer to the movable part as shown in this feature, it is possible to increase the allowable weight of the movable part when displacing the movable part using the weight of the game ball. This is preferable in terms of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F5, wherein the stage portion is formed so that a plurality of game balls can roll simultaneously on the rolling surface.

As described above, in the configuration in which the weight of the game ball is used as the power to displace the movable part, the displacement speed (responsiveness) can be changed depending on the number of game balls that can be positioned on the rolling surface. If the configuration is such that the responsiveness changes depending on the number of game balls, it can contribute to further diversification of the period during which the movable part is maintained at the second position.

Feature F7. The rolling surface is formed with an exit portion (center opening 832) that is open upward and allows the game ball to pass through.
A discharge passage (discharge passage 833) is formed in the stage part, through which the game balls that have passed through the exit part pass;
The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F6, wherein the discharge passage is a vertical passage extending vertically from the exit portion.

In a configuration in which a discharge passage is formed in the stage part, as shown in this feature, by making the discharge passage a vertical passage, the stage part is moved to the standby position by being pushed by the game ball passing through the discharge passage. It is possible to avoid delays in returning to . This can contribute to improving responsiveness when displacing the movable part to the first position/second position.

Feature F8. The rolling surface is formed with an exit portion (center opening 832) that is open upward and allows the game ball to pass through.
The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F7, wherein the exit portion has a size that prevents a plurality of game balls from passing through at the same time.

According to feature F8, when a plurality of game balls roll on the rolling surface, the game balls will leave the rolling surface one after another, and it is avoided that they come off all at once. Therefore, the period during which the movable part waits at the second position (for example, the action period) can be varied depending on the number of game balls located on the rolling surface.

Feature F9. Any one of features F3 to F8, characterized in that the movement path of the game ball on the rolling surface includes a plurality of movement paths in which the length of stay of the game ball on the rolling surface is different. The gaming machine described in .

According to the configuration shown in this feature, a difference occurs in the stay period of the game ball on the rolling surface depending on which movement route the game ball passes when reaching the rolling surface. With such a configuration, the player can estimate the length of stay to some extent by paying attention to the moving route of the game ball. In this way, it is preferable to allow the player to make a few guesses in order to increase the attention level of the game.

Feature F10. The gaming machine according to feature F9, wherein the rolling surface is formed so that the game ball can move from one of the plurality of movement paths to another movement path. .

By allowing the movement of game balls between travel routes, further diversification of stay periods can be easily realized.

Feature F11. It is characterized by comprising a guide part (communication passage 88bD) that guides the game ball to the rolling surface, and that the guide part has a plurality of channels in which the moving speed of the game ball moving to the rolling surface is different. The gaming machine according to any one of features F2 to F10.

As shown in this feature, if the moving speed of the game ball is made different when moving to the rolling surface, the difference in the stay period of the game ball on the rolling surface can be increased.

Note that it is also possible to apply the technical idea shown in this feature to the feature F1.

Feature F12. The stage portion on which the rolling surface is formed is a first stage portion,
The gaming device has a second stage section (stage section 811) provided with a plurality of ball entry sections including predetermined ball entry sections (ball entry ports 812 and 813), and the movable section is in the second position. Features F2 to F11 are characterized in that the ball is configured such that it is difficult for the ball to enter the predetermined ball entry portion when the ball is placed at the first position, compared to when the ball is placed at the first position. The gaming machine described in any one of the above.

According to feature F12, the movable part is placed in the second position, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the predetermined ball entry part, but this period is different from the period in which the game ball stays on the rolling surface. It will be done. In this way, by diversifying the period during which it is difficult for the ball to enter a predetermined ball entry area, it is possible to appropriately draw players' attention to the movement of the game ball on the first stage part and the second stage part. can be encouraged.

Feature F13. The first stage section is configured to move from the standby position to the lowered position by the weight of the game ball resting on the rolling surface,
The gaming device has a link part (link member 840) that connects the first stage part and the movable part and is rotatably held at an intermediate position between the first stage part and the movable part, and The first stage portion and the movable portion are configured to be alternately displaced in the direction,
The movable part has a stage surface forming part (upper surfaces 823a and 824a of the columnar parts 823 and 824) that forms a part of the stage surface of the second stage part when placed in the second position,
The gaming machine according to feature F12, wherein the stage surface forming portion is formed such that an area of the stage surface forming portion is smaller than an area of the rolling surface in the first stage portion.

In a configuration in which the first stage part is lowered using the weight of the game ball and the movable part is raised in conjunction with the first stage part, when the game ball is placed on the movable part (stage surface forming part), the movable part will sink downward. Although this is desirable in terms of diversifying the movements of the gaming machine, there is a concern that in a configuration where such movements occur frequently and the state changes minutely, players who are paying attention to the gaming machine will become increasingly fatigued. Ru. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by making the area of the stage surface forming part smaller than the area of the rolling surface of the first stage part, the number of game balls on the stage surface forming part is reduced. By reducing the chances of exceeding the number, the above-mentioned small state changes can be suppressed and a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature F14. The first stage section is configured to move from the standby position to the lowered position by the weight of the game ball resting on the rolling surface,
The gaming device has a link part (link member 840) that connects the first stage part and the movable part and is rotatably held at an intermediate position between the first stage part and the movable part, and The first stage portion and the movable portion are configured to be alternately displaced in the direction,
The movable part includes a passage forming part (top surfaces 823a, 824a of the columnar parts 823, 824) that forms the bottom of a passage through which game balls that have flowed into the predetermined ball entry part pass when placed in the first position. ), and is configured such that when the movable part is placed in the second position, the passage forming part projects upward from the predetermined ball entry part. The gaming machine according to F12 or feature F13.

As shown in this feature, the passage forming part of the movable part forms a discharge passage (bottom part) in the second stage part, and the passage forming part is configured to protrude upward from a predetermined ball entry part. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the game ball heading toward the predetermined ball entry portion from being placed on the movable portion. Thereby, it is possible to suitably avoid shortening the period during which it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry section due to the game ball reaching the second stage.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to E to the features F1 to F14 detailed above.

<Feature G group>
The following feature G group is as follows: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a game board that has a gaming area where game balls flow down.Game balls are released based on the player's firing operation. When the fired game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of the game ball. In gaming machines where the award of benefits depends on the movement of the game ball, by placing game parts such as nails and windmills in the game area, the falling path of the game ball can be dispersed and the movement of the game ball can be diversified. There is a technique that increases attention to the movement of the game ball and, in turn, to the game (for example, see Patent Document 1). There is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to attract more attention to the system.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature G1. A gaming machine comprising a gaming board (game board unit 80F) on which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed,
Sorting means (upper clone 856F) for distributing game balls flowing down the gaming area into a first flow path (first branch passage portion 864F) and a second flow path (second branch passage portion 865F);
A first state (first guiding state) in which a game ball flowing down the first flow path is guided to the ball entry part (lower operation port 859F), a game ball flowing down the first flow path and the second flow path. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a guiding means (non-electric accessory 858F) that can be switched to a second state (second guiding state) for guiding the ball to the ball entry part.

According to feature G1, when the guiding means is in the first state, the game balls distributed to the first channel by the distributing means are guided to the ball entry section by the guiding means. That is, in the first state, the ball entry path into the ball entry section is limited to the first flow path. On the other hand, when the guide means is in the second state, the guide means not only the game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means but also the game balls distributed to the second flow path. You will be guided to the entrance area. That is, in the second state, there is room for game balls distributed to the second channel to enter the ball entry section, and the frequency of balls entering the ball entry section is higher than in the first state. In this way, by configuring the distribution means to give game balls that are seemingly out of the way an opportunity to enter the ball, the game balls distributed to the second flow path can also attract more attention from players. This can contribute to increasing the level of attention to the game.

Feature G2. A gaming machine comprising a gaming board (game board unit 80F) on which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed,
A game ball flowing down the second predetermined flow path among a first predetermined flow path (side route) and a second predetermined flow path (center route) formed in the game area is placed in a first special flow path (first branch path). 864F) and a second special flow path (second branch passage portion 865F);
A first state (first guiding state) in which the game ball flowing down the first special channel is guided to the ball entry part (lower operation port 859F), and the first special channel, the second special channel, and the second special channel. It is characterized by comprising a guide means (non-electric accessory 858F) that can be switched to a second state (second guide state) for guiding the game ball flowing down the first predetermined flow path to the ball entry part. A gaming machine.

According to feature G2, when the guide means is in the first state, the game balls that have been sorted to the first special channel by the sorter are guided to the ball entry section by the guide means. That is, in the first state, the ball entry path into the ball entry section is limited to the first special channel. On the other hand, when the guiding means is in the second state, not only the game balls distributed to the first special flow path by the distribution means but also the game balls distributed to the second special flow path are also affected. The guide means guides the player to the ball entry area. That is, in the second state, there is room for game balls sorted to the second special channel to enter the ball entry section, and the frequency of balls entering the ball entry section is higher than in the first state. In this way, by configuring the distribution means to give game balls that are seemingly out of place an opportunity to enter the ball, the game balls that have been distributed to the second special flow path can also attract more attention from players. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of money and contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

Feature G3. A game board (game board unit 80F) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry part (operating ports 83a, 83b) provided in the gaming area (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the holding information) function) and
Acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Transition determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a validity determination process, etc.) function) and
Based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open/closed) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The game repetition operation is carried out, with a time when the game repetition operation is ended as a result of a notification corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining means after the game repetition operation is started being performed. A game time control means (a function for executing display control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operating port of the main display unit 87) so as to
A game ball flowing down the second predetermined flow path among a first predetermined flow path (side route) and a second predetermined flow path (center route) formed in the game area is placed in a first special flow path (first branch path). 864F) and a second special flow path (second branch passage 865F);
A first state (first guiding state) in which a game ball flowing down the first special flow path is guided to the starting ball entry part (lower operating port 859F), the first special flow path, and the second special flow path. and a guide means (non-electric accessory 858F) that can be switched to a second state (second guide state) that guides the game ball flowing down the first predetermined flow path to the starting ball entry section. A gaming machine featuring:

According to feature G3, when the guiding means is in the first state, the game balls distributed to the first special channel by the distributing means are guided to the starting ball entry section by the guiding means. That is, in the first state, the ball entry path to the starting ball entry section is limited to the first special flow path. On the other hand, when the guide means is in the second state, not only the game balls distributed to the first special channel by the distribution means but also the game balls distributed to the second special channel, Game balls flowing down the first predetermined channel (game balls that have not reached the sorting means) are also guided to the starting ball entry section by the guide means. In this way, even game balls that are likely to miss without reaching the sorting means or game balls that are not sorted by the sorting means are given the opportunity to enter the starting ball entry section. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's attention level with respect to game balls flowing down other than the first special flow path, and contribute to an increase in the attention level of the game.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to cause a bias in the frequency of occurrence of balls in the starting ball entry section, so game progress may be affected by repeated execution of game repetition operations or failure of execution of game repetition operations. The sharpness of the image can be strengthened. This can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Feature G4. The first predetermined flow path and the second predetermined flow path allow the game ball flowing down the first predetermined flow path to move from a branch position of the first predetermined flow path and the second predetermined flow path to the guide means. The time required for the game ball flowing down the second predetermined flow path to move from the branch position to the guide means is formed to be different in length. The gaming machine described in feature G3.

According to feature G4, the game balls separated into the first predetermined flow path and the second predetermined flow path have a difference in the predetermined period until they reach the guide means. Thereby, when both the preceding game ball and the following game ball head toward the starting ball entry section, it is possible to easily cause a change in density in the ball entry span of the game ball. Thereby, the effect shown in feature G3 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature G5. The first predetermined flow path has a time period required for the game ball flowing down the first predetermined flow path to move from a branching position of the first predetermined flow path and the second predetermined flow path to the distribution means. , the game according to feature G3, characterized in that the game ball flowing down the second predetermined flow path is formed so as to be shorter than the period required for moving from the branch position to the distribution means. Machine.

According to feature G5, the required period for the game ball to go through the second predetermined flow path → the guide means is longer than the time required for the game ball to go through the first predetermined flow path → the distribution means → the guide means. It will be shorter. As a result, when the preceding game ball passes through the first route and the subsequent game ball passes through the second route, the subsequent game ball approaches the preceding game ball, making it easier for consecutive balls to enter the ball. Thereby, the effect shown in feature G3 can be suitably exhibited. In particular, it is important for players to lengthen the time required for flowing down the first predetermined flow path side, which has a relatively high advantage, and shorten the time required for flowing down the second predetermined flow path side, which has a relatively low advantage. This is preferable for increasing attention.

Feature G6. The sorting means has a stopping part in which game balls can be parked, and an entrance part of the first special flow path and an entrance part of the second special flow path into which the game balls parked in the stopping part can flow. The gaming machine according to feature G4 or feature G5.

If the game balls are configured to be able to stay in the distribution means as shown in feature G6, the period difference shown in feature G5 can be suitably ensured.

Feature G7. Any one of features G3 to G6, characterized in that the distribution means is configured to distribute a larger number of game balls to the second special flow path than to the first special flow path. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature G7, it is possible to make the difference in the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry area remarkable between a case where no balls enter the starting ball entry area and a case where balls entering the starting ball entry area continue. .

Feature G8. The guiding means is configured to switch to the guiding state when the game ball guided by the guiding means to the starting ball entering section reaches a predetermined position between the guiding means and the starting ball entering section. The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G7.

According to feature G8, when one game ball enters the starting ball part, the subsequent game balls also enter the starting ball part easily, and the ball entering the starting ball part becomes easier. It will be continuous. If the configuration is such that one ball enters the ball as a priming signal and the ball enters the ball continuously, the technical idea shown in the feature G1 and the like can be suitably realized.

Note that each of the technical ideas shown in features G3 to G8 may be applied to features G1 to G2.

Further, it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to F to features G1 to G8.

<Feature H group>
The following characteristic group H is defined as ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a gaming board that has a gaming area in which the gaming ball flows down. When the fired game ball enters the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of the game ball. In gaming machines where the granting of benefits depends on the movement of the game balls, by arranging game parts such as nails and windmills in the game area, the falling paths of the game balls can be dispersed and the movement of the game balls can be diversified. There is a technique that increases attention to the movement of the game ball and, in turn, to the game (see Patent Document 1, for example).'' There is still room for improvement in its structure in order to attract more attention to the system.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature H1. A game board (game board unit 80F) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry part (lower operation port 859F) provided in the gaming area (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the reservation information function) and
Acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Transition determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a validity determination process, etc.) function) and
Based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open/closed) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The game repetition operation is carried out, with a time when the game repetition operation is ended as a result of a notification corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining means after the game repetition operation is started being performed. A game time control means (a function for executing display control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operating port of the main display unit 87) so as to
A special flow path (center route) is provided in the gaming area so that the gaming ball that has passed through a predetermined position (non-electric accessory 858F) in the gaming area flows into the starting ball entry section. ,
When a game ball that has passed the predetermined position is located in the special flow path, a guide means (non-electric accessory 858F and lower Clune 857F).

According to feature H1, the game ball that has passed a predetermined position in the game area enters the starting ball entry section via the special flow path. Here, if the game ball heading toward the starting ball entry section is located in the special flow path, other game balls (subsequent game balls) will be guided to the starting ball entry section, and the starting ball entry section will be guided to the starting ball entry section. Continuous balls entering the ball are more likely to occur. With such a configuration, it is possible to create a bias in the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entering section, and it is possible to create a bias in the frequency of the game repetition operation based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section. can. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game progress and contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H2. The guide means is
a stage part (lower croon 857F) that constitutes the special flow path and is formed with a rolling surface on which game balls can roll;
a holding part (base body 851F) that holds the stage part so that it can be raised and lowered between a standby position and a lowered position;
a biasing unit that biases the stage unit to the standby position;
A movable body that is disposed at the predetermined position and is switchable between a first state and a second state that guides the game ball in such a manner that the game ball flows into the special channel more easily than in the first state. (Non-electric accessory 858F) and
a link mechanism connecting the stage part and the movable body,
The guide means is configured to move the movable body from the first state by lowering the game ball onto the rolling surface of the stage portion and lowering the movable body from the standby position to the lowering position against the biasing force of the stage portion. The gaming machine according to feature H1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to switch to the second state.

According to feature H2, the stage part is displaced from the standby position to the lowered position when the game ball that has passed the predetermined position is placed on the stage part (rolling surface). As the movable body switches from the first state to the second state as the movable body moves to the lowered position, it becomes easier to flow into the special flow path, and the ball continues to enter the starting ball entry section. With such a configuration, the technical idea shown in feature H1 can be suitably realized.

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to feature H2, wherein the stage section is configured to move from the standby position to the lowered position by the weight of the game ball placed on the rolling surface.

As shown in feature H2, it is preferable to utilize the weight of the game ball in interlocking the stage section and the movable body. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the control load related to the game progress, which would cause a bias in the ball entry frequency.

Feature H4. The stage section is configured to return from the lowered position to the standby position by the urging force of the urging section when the game ball resting on the rolling surface is separated from the rolling surface,
The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the movable body switches from the second state to the first state as the stage portion returns from the standby position to the lowered position.

According to feature H4, the movable body is maintained in the second state while the preceding game ball is rolling on the rolling surface. In this way, by delaying the timing at which the preceding game ball enters the starting ball entry area and waiting for the arrival of the following game ball, there is time to visually check the continuous entry of balls, and the player Satisfaction level can be suitably increased.

Feature H5. The stage section is configured to return from the lowered position to the standby position by the urging force of the urging section when the game ball resting on the rolling surface is separated from the rolling surface,
The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the movable body switches from the second state to the first state when a predetermined period of time elapses after switching from the first state to the second state.

According to feature H5, the movement of the stage part and the movement of the movable body are not completely linked, and after the movable body is in the second state, it returns to the first state after a predetermined period of time has passed. do. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down the game area from being placed on the stage part one after another, and the movable body from being maintained in the second state for an excessively long time. In other words, by placing a certain kind of limit on the continuous entry of game balls, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned deviation in the frequency of entry from becoming excessive.

Feature H6. The stage section is configured such that the direction of the rolling surface when the stage section is disposed at the standby position is the same as the direction of the rolling surface when the stage section is disposed at the lowered position. The gaming machine according to any one of Features H3 to H5.

When the stage section descends due to the game ball being placed on the stage section, disturbances in the behavior of the game ball can be suppressed by avoiding changes in the posture of the stage section. Suppressing disturbances in the behavior of the game balls in this way is preferable in order to increase the degree of attention to the game balls on the stage section.

Feature H7. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The transition determining means is configured to sequentially determine whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, winning information);
Any one of features H2 to H6, characterized in that the number of special information that can be stored by the acquired information storage means is smaller than the maximum number of game balls that can be positioned on the rolling surface. The gaming machine described in item 1.

As shown in this feature, by making the number of special information that can be stored smaller than the number of game balls that can be located on the stage section (rolling surface), transition judgment can be performed while increasing the number of consecutive balls. It is possible to suppress an excessive number of balls entering the ball that are not included. This is preferable in order to prevent the feeling of exhilaration from decreasing due to continuous ball hitting.

Feature H8. The stage section is configured such that a game ball cannot reach the stage section via a route other than the special flow path, according to any one of features H3 to H7. Game machine.

As shown in this feature, by narrowing down the trigger for starting continuous ball entry into the starting ball entry section to passage of a predetermined position, it is possible to suppress continuous ball entry from starting at an unintended timing. In this way, by reducing the chance of missing the start of consecutive pitches, it is possible to suitably bring out the effect of increasing the attention level due to consecutive pitches.

Feature H9. the predetermined position is a first predetermined position,
comprising a distribution means (upper croon 856F) for distributing game balls that have reached the branch position to the first predetermined position and a second predetermined position different from the first predetermined position;
In the first state, the movable body guides the game ball that has reached the first predetermined position to the special flow path, but does not guide the game ball that has reached the second predetermined position to the special flow path. , and in the second state, the game balls that have reached the first predetermined position and the second predetermined position are guided to the special flow path. The gaming machine described in item 1.

According to feature H9, the movable body is switched to the second state when the game balls distributed to the first predetermined positions by the distribution means flow into the special channel. As a result, even if the subsequent game balls are distributed to the second predetermined position, they will be guided to the special flow path by the movable body. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance of occurrence of an event in which consecutive balls do not occur even though the starting conditions for consecutive balls to hit are satisfied.

Feature H10. A game machine comprising a game board (game board unit 80F) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) capable of firing game balls into the game area. There it is,
Information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the entry of a ball into a starting ball entry section provided in the gaming area;
Acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Transition determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a validity determination process, etc.) function) and
Based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open/closed) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The game repetition operation is carried out, with a time when the game repetition operation is ended as a result of a notification corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining means after the game repetition operation is started being performed. A game time control means (a function for executing display control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operating port of the main display unit 87) so as to
The starting ball entering section includes a first starting ball entering section (lower operating port 859F) disposed in the first channel (left route) in the game area, and a second channel different from the first channel. (right route) and a second starting ball entry part (right operating port 883F),
a switching means (electric accessory 891F) for switching between an acceptance state in which the ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-acceptance state in which it is more difficult or impossible to enter the ball than in the acceptance state;
A switching control means (a function for executing electric support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the switching means,
The switching control modes of the switching means by the switching control means include a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode in which the mode of switching to the acceptance state is more advantageous to the player than the first switching mode. (high frequency support mode) is provided.
In the first switching mode, the game ball is fired into the first flow path, which is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball is fired into the second flow path. It is configured such that firing the game ball into the flow path is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball is fired into the first flow path,
The first flow path is a special flow path (center route) formed such that the game ball that has passed through a predetermined position (non-electric accessory 858F) in the first flow path flows into the first starting ball entry section. It has a lower croon 857F),
When the game ball that has passed the predetermined position is located in the special flow path, a guide means (non-electric accessory 858F) that guides another game ball that follows the game ball to the first starting ball entry section. ) A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature H10, the game ball that has passed the predetermined position in the game area enters the first starting ball entry section via the special flow path. Here, if the game ball heading towards the first starting ball entry section is located in the special flow path, other game balls (following game balls) will be guided to the first starting ball entering section, Even in the first switching mode, consecutive balls entering the first starting ball entering section are likely to occur. With such a configuration, it is possible to create a bias in the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entering section in the first switching mode, and it is also possible to create a bias in the frequency of the game repetition operation based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section. can be generated. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game progress and contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to G to the features H1 to H10 detailed above.

<Characteristics Group I>
The following feature group I is described as follows: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays a pattern on the display screen in a fluctuating manner. When the game ball passes through the actuation port, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of symbols is started. In the case of winning, a specific symbol combination, etc. is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). ``In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase the attention to games.However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature I1. A starting ball entrance part (lower operating port 859F) provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE),
an information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Transition determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a validity determination process, etc.) function) and
Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the transition determining means corresponds to the predetermined transition information (jackpot result), the gaming state is changed to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the gaming state (opening/closing execution mode);
The game repetition operation is carried out, with a time when the game repetition operation is ended as a result of a notification corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining means after the game repetition operation is started being performed. a game time control means (a function for executing display control in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operation port of the main display unit 87) so that the information is displayed;
Display means (design display device 500F) having a display section (display screen 500aF);
A performance execution means (a display performance using the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) that can execute a performance corresponding to the determination result by the transition determination means on the display unit in conjunction with the game repeat operation. A gaming machine that is equipped with a function to execute
a passing section (acting gate 855F) provided in the gaming area through which game balls flowing down the gaming area pass;
A detection means (ball detection sensor 866F) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the passage part,
The starting ball entry part and the passage part are arranged in a predetermined flow path (a center route constituting a downstream part of the left route) formed in the game area,
The performance execution means is
A performance start means that starts a special performance based on the game ball passing through the passing portion;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: performance ending means for ending the special performance started by the performance starting means based on the entry of a ball into the starting ball entry section.

In a type of gaming machine where a predetermined display section performs an effect linked to the game repetition operation, monotony of the game is suppressed by diversifying the process (display mode) up to the notification of the determination result by the transition determination means. can. In this type of gaming machine, although it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game, the following disadvantages may occur because the presence or absence of performance depends on the ball entering the starting ball entry section. That is, as the period during which no performance is performed becomes longer, it becomes noticeable that no balls have entered the starting ball entry section, which can become a factor that reduces the player's desire to play. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the special performance is started (preliminary start) when the game ball passes through the passing section, and the special performance ends based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section. . Thereby, it is possible to suppress an excessively long non-performance period in which no performance is performed on a predetermined display section, and to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game. This is preferable in order to suppress a decrease in the desire to play.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "a starting ball entrance part (lower operating port 859F) provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE), and special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering part. (a function for acquiring pending information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162), and an acquired information storage device (a function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition device. a function of storing pending information in the acquired information storage means), and a transition determination means (main controller 162) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, winning information). (a function of executing a propriety judgment process, etc. in the MPU 602 of , a game state transition means (a function for executing game state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; The game reuse operation is performed such that the game reuse operation is ended as a result of the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means after the reuse operation is started. As shown in FIG. (symbol display device 500F), and a performance execution means (notification/performance) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the determination result by the transition determination unit on the display unit in conjunction with the game repeat operation. It is a gaming machine equipped with a function of executing a display effect using a control device 140 and a display control device 410, and is provided in the gaming area, and has a passing section (a function of executing a display effect) through which a game ball flowing down the gaming area passes. a gate 855F) and a detection means (ball detection sensor 866F) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the passage section, and the starting ball entry section and the passage section (a center route constituting a downstream portion of the left route), and is configured such that the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entering portion is higher than the frequency of passing through the passing portion; The performance execution means includes a performance start means that starts a special performance based on the passage of a game ball through the passage section, and a performance start means that starts a special performance based on the passing of a game ball through the passing section, and a performance execution means that starts the special performance started by the performance start means when the ball enters the starting ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a performance ending means for ending the performance based on. ” It is also possible.

Feature I2. The passing section is disposed upstream of the starting ball entry section in the predetermined flow path, and the game ball that has passed through the passing section can enter the starting ball entry section. The gaming machine according to feature I1.

According to feature I2, the effect of suppressing the extension of the non-performance period is preferably achieved by arranging the passing section that is the trigger for starting the special performance on the upstream side of the starting ball entry section that is the trigger for ending the special performance. can be demonstrated.

Feature I3. The predetermined flow path is a flow path that connects the passing section and the starting ball entering section, and the game ball that has passed through the passing section can enter the starting ball entering section. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2.

According to feature I3, the game ball flowing down the predetermined channel can enter the starting ball entry section after passing through the passage section. As a result, a single game ball may serve as both a starting opportunity and an ending opportunity for a special performance.

Feature I4. The performance starting means sets an execution period of the special performance when starting the special performance based on the game ball passing through the passage part,
The performance terminating means causes the special performance to continue even after the execution period has elapsed when a game ball enters the starting ball entry part during the execution period set by the performance starting means. The gaming machine according to any one of Features I1 to I3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to delay the end timing of the special performance.

According to feature I4, when the special performance starts, an execution period for the special performance is set, and if a ball enters the starting ball entry section during this execution period, the special performance will continue even after the execution period has passed. will continue, and the end timing of the special performance will be delayed. Thereby, it is possible to avoid abrupt termination of the special performance due to the ball entering the starting ball entry section, and to suppress deterioration in the appearance of the special performance.

Feature I5. The performance ending means is a first ending means,
The performance execution means is configured to provide a second performance that ends the special performance after the execution period has elapsed, if the ball does not enter the starting ball entry section during the special performance started by the performance start means. The gaming machine according to feature I4, characterized by having a termination means.

As shown in feature I4, when a special performance is started based on the game ball passing through the passage section, an execution period of the special performance is set. If the execution period elapses without a ball entering the starting ball entering section, the special performance ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get the impression that the special performance is completely unrelated to the ball entering the starting ball entry section.

Feature I6. The special performance includes a first part and a second part that is executed after the first part so that the player recognizes that the second part is continuous with the first part,
The performance start means starts the special performance so that the first part is executed,
The gaming machine according to feature I5, wherein the second ending means is configured to end the special performance without transitioning to the second part.

According to feature I6, the transition of the special performance from the first part to the second part increases expectations for the transition to the special gaming state. If the above-mentioned execution period passes without a ball entering the starting ball entering part in the special performance triggered by passing through the passing part, the transition to the second part is avoided, and the determination by the transition determining means is made. Despite the fact that it has not been carried out, the display does not have a high level of expectation. In this way, by suppressing the player's sense of expectation from being implicitly aroused, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of the player's attention being reduced even though the situation is worthy of attention. This is preferable in order to suitably exhibit the attention-grabbing effect of the special performance.

Feature I7. The special performance includes a first part and a second part that is executed after the first part so that the player recognizes that the second part is continuous with the first part,
The performance start means is a first start means that starts the special performance so that the first part is executed,
The performance execution means is
The special performance is started by the first starting means, and the special performance is transferred from the first part to the second part based on the fact that a ball enters the starting ball entry section during the special performance. A first migration means for migrating;
a second starting means for starting the special performance by causing the first part to be executed based on the occurrence of a ball entering the starting ball entry section in a situation where the special performance is not being performed; ,
Any one of features I1 to I6, characterized in that it has a second transition means for shifting the special performance started by the second start means from the first part to the second part. The gaming machine described in .

As shown in feature I7, in the special performance that is started based on the passing of the passing part, the first part is first executed, and the special performance is performed based on the fact that the ball enters the starting ball entering part during the first part. On the other hand, the special performance corresponding to the first part is started based on the occurrence of a ball entering the starting ball entering section while the special performance is not being executed, and then the transition to the second part. If the configuration is such that the transition occurs, even if a special performance corresponding to the first part is being executed, the transition to the second part can be expected. Thereby, it is possible to avoid giving the impression to the player that the special performance corresponding to the first part means that the ball does not enter the starting ball entry section. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the special performance.

Feature I8. The first transition means changes the special performance from the first part to the first part based on the occurrence of a ball entering the starting ball entry part during the special performance started by the first starting means. The gaming machine according to feature I7, characterized in that the timing of transition to the second part is delayed from the timing of the ball entering.

According to feature I8, when transitioning to the second part based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section during the special performance, the transition timing can be made difficult or impossible to identify. If the timing of transition to the second part is made difficult to specify in this way, the transition to the second part can be expected at any time during the first part, and the above-mentioned attention improvement effect can be suitably demonstrated. can.

Feature I9. The special performance includes a first part and a second part that is executed after the first part so that the player recognizes that the second part is continuous with the first part,
The performance start means is a first start means that starts the special performance so that the first part is executed,
The performance execution means is
The special performance is started by the first starting means, and the special performance is transferred from the first part to the second part based on the fact that a ball enters the starting ball entry section during the special performance. A first migration means for migrating;
a second starting means for starting the special performance by causing the first part to be executed based on the occurrence of a ball entering the starting ball entry section in a situation where the special performance is not being performed; ,
a second transition means for transitioning the special performance started by the second start means from the first part to the second part;
After the special effect is started by the first starting means and before the timing at which the special effect is ended by the second ending means, the passage part and the starting ball entering part are connected in the predetermined flow path. When the game ball reaches a specific position between which the ball enters the starting ball entering section, at least until the gaming ball that has passed through the specific position enters the starting ball entering section. The gaming machine according to feature I5 or feature I6, further comprising a delay means for delaying the special performance.

According to feature I9, after the special effect is started by the first starting means, the game ball reaches a specific position in the predetermined channel before the timing when the second ending means ends the special effect, and the special effect is started. Performances may be extended. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably exhibit the function of continuing the special performance when the ball enters the starting ball entry part while minimizing the execution period set as the ball passes through the passing part. .

Feature I10. The performance execution means is configured to perform a special performance in a case where the special performance is delayed by the delay unit, and if the delay is not performed, the special performance may end before the ball enters the starting ball entry section. The gaming machine according to feature I9, further comprising a changing means capable of changing the display mode of the special performance from the first mode to the second mode.

According to feature I10, when a special performance that normally ends before the ball enters the starting ball entry area is continued when the game ball reaches a specific position, the display mode of the special performance is changed to the first one. By switching from one aspect to the second aspect, this is suggested or made clear. With such a configuration, it is possible to attract attention to the starting ball entry area, and it is possible to reduce the chance of missing a ball entering the starting ball entry area. As already explained, when the special effect shifts from the first part to the second part due to the ball entering the starting ball entering section, the timing of the transition may deviate from the timing of the ball entering the starting ball entering section. By making it clear, the function of suppressing the decrease in the degree of attention during the first part can be suitably exerted.

Feature I11. The performance execution means starts the special performance when a ball enters the starting ball entry section under a situation where the special performance is not being performed, and starts the special performance based on the elapse of a predetermined execution period. The gaming machine according to any one of Features I1 to I10, further comprising means for ending the special performance.

In a configuration in which a special effect is executed when a ball enters the starting ball entering section while the special effect is not being executed, the game ball passes through the passing section before entering the starting ball entering section. If the special performance is started (advance start) based on the above, the effect of suppressing the decrease in the degree of attention to the game can be suitably exerted.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to H to the features I1 to I11 detailed above.

<Feature J group>
The following characteristic group J includes: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays a pattern on the display screen in a fluctuating manner. When the game ball passes through the actuation port, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of symbols is started. In the case of winning, a specific symbol combination, etc. is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). ``In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase the attention to games.However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature J1. A game machine comprising a game board (game board unit 80F) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) capable of firing game balls into the game area. There it is,
a starting ball entry part (lower operating port 859F) provided in the gaming area;
an information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Transition determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a validity determination process, etc.) function) and
Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the transition determining means corresponds to the predetermined transition information (jackpot result), the gaming state is changed to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the gaming state (opening/closing execution mode);
The game repetition operation is carried out, with a time when the game repetition operation is ended as a result of a notification corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining means after the game repetition operation is started being performed. a game time control means (a function for executing display control in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operating port of the main display unit 87) so that the information is displayed;
Display means (design display device 500F) having a display section (display screen 500aF);
Display control means (notification/presentation control device 140 and display control device 410) that controls the display of the display section;
a passing section (acting gate 855F) provided in the gaming area through which game balls flowing down the gaming area pass;
A detection means (ball detection sensor 866F) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the passage part,
The starting ball entry part and the passing part are arranged in a predetermined flow path (center route forming a downstream part of the left route) formed in the game area,
The display control means executes a predetermined display process when a game ball passes through the passage section during the game recirculation operation, and executes a predetermined display process when the game ball passes through the passage section under the condition that the game ball passes through the passage section during the game recirculation operation. A gaming machine characterized by having means for not executing the predetermined display processing when the symbol has passed.

According to feature J1, a predetermined display process is executed when a game ball passes through a passing section located in the same predetermined flow path as the starting ball entry section during a game recirculation operation (during a game rerun). If the game ball passes through the passage part under a situation where the recirculation operation is not in progress, the predetermined process is not executed. In such a configuration, when the game ball continues to be launched toward the starting ball entry section during the game circulation operation, the display contents on the display section can be changed in accordance with the passing of the passing section. , it is possible to suitably suppress monotony of display. This prevents the display from becoming monotonous and contributes to increasing the level of attention to the game.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "a starting ball entrance part (lower operating port 859F) provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE), and special information (holding information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entering part. (a function for acquiring pending information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162), and an acquired information storage device (a function in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition device. a function of storing pending information in the acquired information storage means), and a transition determination means (main controller 162) that determines whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, winning information). (a function of executing a propriety judgment process, etc. in the MPU 602 of , a game state transition means (a function for executing game state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; The game reuse operation is performed such that the game reuse operation is ended as a result of the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means after the reuse operation is started. This gaming machine is equipped with a game time control means (a function for executing display control by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operating port of the main display unit 87). a passing section (acting gate 855F) provided in the gaming area through which game balls flowing down the gaming area pass; and a detection means (ball detection sensor 866F) capable of detecting gaming balls passing through the passing section. The starting ball entry part and the passage part are arranged in a predetermined flow path (a center route constituting a downstream part of the left route) formed in the game area, and the starting ball entry part and the passing part are arranged in a predetermined flow path (a center route constituting a downstream part of the left route), and during the game circulation operation. further comprising a display means for executing a predetermined display process when a game ball passes through the passage section, and the display means is configured to perform a predetermined display process when a game ball passes through the passage section in a situation where the game ball passes through the passage section in a situation where the game ball passes through the passage section. In some cases, the gaming machine is configured such that the predetermined display processing is not executed.

Feature J2. A game machine comprising a game board (game board unit 80F) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) capable of firing game balls into the game area. There it is,
a starting ball entry part (lower operating port 859F) provided in the gaming area;
an information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Transition determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a validity determination process, etc.) function) and
Based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open/closed) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The game repetition operation is carried out, with a time when the game repetition operation is ended as a result of a notification corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining means after the game repetition operation is started being performed. a game time control means (a function for executing display control in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operation port of the main display unit 87) so that the information is displayed;
Display means (design display device 500F) having a display section (display screen 500aF);
A gaming machine comprising display control means (notification/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) that performs display control of the display means,
a passing section (acting gate 855F) provided in the gaming area through which game balls flowing down the gaming area pass;
A detection means (ball detection sensor 866F) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the passage part,
The starting ball entry part and the passage part are arranged in a predetermined flow path (a center route constituting a downstream part of the left route) formed in the game area,
The display control means includes:
Entering ball corresponding display means (display of a pending icon in the notification/effect control device 140 and display control device 410 functions) and
When a game ball passes through the passage part during the ball entry correspondence display, a changing means (notification/performance control device) that changes the display mode of the ball entry correspondence display (for example, the color of the hold icon) based on the passing; 140 and a function of executing processing for changing the color of a pending display icon in the display control device 410).

According to feature J2, when a ball enters the starting ball entry section, a ball entry correspondence display is executed based on the ball entry. If the game ball passes through a passing section located in the same predetermined flow path as the starting ball entry section during the ball entry correspondence display, the display mode of the ball entry correspondence display can be changed by the changing means. In such a configuration, when the game ball continues to be launched toward the starting ball entry section even while the ball entry response display is displayed, the display format of the entry ball response display changes, making the ball entry response display monotonous. can be suitably suppressed. This prevents the display from becoming monotonous and contributes to increasing the level of attention to the game.

Feature J3. The ball entry correspondence display means has means for changing the display mode of the ball entry correspondence display into a predetermined display mode in the process of the ball entry correspondence display;
The changing means has a lottery means that determines by lottery whether or not to make the change when a game ball passes through the passing section during the ball entry correspondence display, and the change is determined by a lottery by the lottery means. The gaming machine according to feature J2, further comprising means for changing the display mode of the ball entry correspondence display to a predetermined display mode when it is determined to perform the ball entry correspondence display.

As shown in feature J3, there are two cases: a case where the display mode of the ball entering correspondence display is changed regardless of passing through the passing section, and a case where the display mode of the ball entering correspondence display is changed based on passing of the passing section. By using a common display mode (predetermined display mode), the above-mentioned monotony suppressing function can be achieved while suppressing changes in the display mode from becoming excessively complicated.

Feature J4. The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the lottery means performs the lottery based on whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined transfer information.

According to feature J4, by determining whether or not to change the display mode with reference to the special information, a correlation is provided between the change in the display mode by the changing means and the special information (result of transition determination). Can be done. This is preferable in order to suppress changes made by the changing means from becoming obsolete.

Feature J5. The ball entry compatible display means has special display means that changes the display format of the ball entry compatible display to a predetermined display format through a plurality of different display formats,
The changing means determines that the game ball passes through the passing section before the special display means changes the display mode of the ball entry correspondence display to the predetermined display mode, and the lottery means makes the change. described in feature J3 or feature J4, further comprising a special changing means for changing the display mode of the ball entry correspondence display before being changed to the predetermined display mode by the special display means. gaming machines.

In a configuration in which the display mode of the ball entry correspondence display is changed to a predetermined display mode (final display mode) in a predetermined pattern, before the display mode is changed to the predetermined display mode by the special display means. When the game ball passes through the passage section and the lottery means decides to change the display mode, the display mode is changed before the special means changes the display mode to a predetermined display mode. In this way, by changing the display mode within a range that takes into consideration the predetermined pattern, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that changing the display mode is bothersome.

Feature J6. The special change means determines that the game ball passes through the passing portion before the special display means changes the display mode of the ball entry correspondence display to the predetermined display mode, and the lottery means determines that the change is performed. The gaming machine according to feature J5, characterized in that, when the ball input corresponding display changes to follow a pattern determined by the special display means at an earlier timing than the pattern. .

As shown in feature J6, the above-mentioned monotony suppressing effect is achieved by configuring the display mode of the ball entry response display to be changed earlier (moved up) when the game ball passes through the passage part during the ball entry response display. However, it is possible to suitably prevent this from becoming a factor that confuses the player.

Feature J7. The special display means is configured to change the display mode of the ball entry correspondence display when a game round is started,
The game according to feature J6, characterized in that the special change means has means for suspending the change until the start of the next game time when it is decided during the game time to make the change. Machine.

If it is decided during a game round to change the display format of the ball entry correspondence display, the display format is not necessarily changed at that timing, but the change is deferred until the start of the next game round. There are cases. With such a configuration, even if the display mode does not change immediately after passing through the passage section, the possibility that the display mode will be changed remains until the start of the next game round. This makes it easier to maintain the above-mentioned degree of attention at a high level.

Feature J8. The ball entry compatible display means has special display means that changes the display format of the ball entry compatible display to a predetermined display format through a plurality of different display formats,
Feature J5 to J5 characterized in that after the display mode of the ball entry correspondence display becomes the predetermined display mode by the special display means, the change of the ball entry correspondence display by the special changing means is disabled. The gaming machine according to any one of feature J7.

In a configuration in which the display mode of the ball entry correspondence display is changed to a predetermined display mode according to a predetermined pattern, after the display mode becomes the predetermined display mode, the change by the above-mentioned changing means is performed. The corresponding incoming ball display is removed from the target. As a result, it is possible to avoid causing a decrease in the player's desire to play, such as reverting to a display mode with relatively low expectations even though the display mode has a relatively high level of expectation. .

Feature J9. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the special information,
The transition determining means is configured to sequentially determine whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information,
The display control means displays a number of pending images (holding icons) corresponding to the number of special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in a holding display area provided in the display section, and A hold display control means for sequentially moving images from the hold display area to a determination display area provided on the display unit,
The hold display control means includes normal changing means for changing the display mode of the hold image in the process of moving the hold image,
Any one of features J2 to J7, characterized in that the changing means is a special changing means that can change the display mode of the reserved image when the display mode is not changed by the normal changing means. The gaming machine described in item 1.

According to feature J9, when a ball enters the starting ball entry section, a pending image is displayed based on the ball entering. If the game ball passes through a passage section located in the same predetermined flow path as the starting ball entry section while displaying the pending image, the display mode of the pending image can be changed by the changing means. In other words, when the game ball continues to be launched toward the starting ball entering part even while the pending image is displayed, monotony of the display corresponding to entering the ball can be suitably suppressed by changing the display mode of the pending image. This prevents the display from becoming monotonous and contributes to increasing the level of attention to the game.

Feature J10. A game machine comprising a game board (game board unit 80F) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) capable of firing game balls into the game area. There it is,
a starting ball entry part (lower operating port 859F) provided in the gaming area;
an information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Transition determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a validity determination process, etc.) function) and
Based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open/closed) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The game repetition operation is carried out, with a time when the game repetition operation is ended as a result of a notification corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining means after the game repetition operation is started being performed. a game time control means (a function for executing display control in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operation port of the main display unit 87) so that the information is displayed;
Display means (design display device 500F) having a display section (display screen 500aF);
a performance execution means (a function for executing a display performance in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) for executing a performance on the display unit corresponding to the determination result by the transition determination means;
a passing section (acting gate 855F) provided in the gaming area through which game balls flowing down the gaming area pass;
A detection means (ball detection sensor 866F) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the passage part,
The starting ball entry part and the passage part are arranged in a predetermined flow path (a center route constituting a downstream part of the left route) formed in the game area,
The performance execution means changes at least a part of the performance to be executed after the passing timing based on the fact that the game ball passes through the passing part while the performance is being executed by the performance execution means. A gaming machine characterized by having means for.

According to feature J10, when a ball enters the starting ball entry section, an effect corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means is executed on the display section. When the game ball passes through the passage section during this performance, at least a part of the performance to be executed thereafter may be changed. In this way, if the configuration is such that the performance can change when the game ball continues to be fired, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game and encourage the continuation of the game ball firing operation.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in features J2 to J9 to this feature.

Feature J11. A game machine comprising a game board (game board unit 80F) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) capable of firing game balls into the game area. There it is,
a starting ball entry part (lower operating port 859F) provided in the gaming area;
an information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Transition determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a validity determination process, etc.) function) and
Based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open/closed) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The game repetition operation is carried out, with a time when the game repetition operation is ended as a result of a notification corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining means after the game repetition operation is started being performed. a game time control means (a function for executing display control in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operation port of the main display unit 87) so that the information is displayed;
Display means (design display device 500F) having a display section (display screen 500aF);
comprising a performance execution means (a function of executing a display performance in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) for executing a performance corresponding to the determination result by the transition determination means on the display unit,
A setting value determining means having a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the expected acquisition value of game balls, and determining one setting value from among the setting values;
a setting value changing means operated to change the setting value determined by the setting value determining means,
The set values include a first set value and a second set value for which the expected acquisition value is larger than the first set value,
a passing section (acting gate 855F) provided in the gaming area through which game balls flowing down the gaming area pass;
A detection means (ball detection sensor 866F) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the passage part,
The starting ball entry part and the passage part are arranged in a predetermined flow path (a center route constituting a downstream part of the left route) formed in the game area,
The game machine characterized in that the performance execution means includes means for suggesting the set value on the display unit based on the fact that a game ball passes through the passage part during execution of the performance. .

According to feature J11, when a ball enters the starting ball entry section, an effect corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means is executed on the display section. When the game ball passes through the passage section during this performance, a set value may be suggested. In this way, if the configuration is such that the setting value can be suggested when the game ball continues to be fired, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game and encourage the continuation of the game ball firing operation.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in features J2 to J9 to this feature.

Further, it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to I to the features J1 to J11 detailed above.

<Feature K group>
The following characteristic group K includes: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays a pattern on the display screen in a fluctuating manner. When the game ball passes through the actuating port, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of symbols is started. In the case of winning, a specific symbol combination, etc. is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175). ``In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase the attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature K1. A game machine comprising a game board (game board unit 80F) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) capable of firing game balls into the game area. There it is,
a starting ball entry part (lower operating port 859F) provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE);
an information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Transition determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a validity determination process, etc.) function) and
Based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open/closed) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The game repetition operation is carried out, with a time when the game repetition operation is ended as a result of a notification corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining means after the game repetition operation is started being performed. a game time control means (a function for executing display control in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operation port of the main display unit 87) so that the information is displayed;
Display means (design display device 500F) having a display section (display screen 500aF);
a performance execution means (a function for executing a display performance in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) for executing a performance on the display unit corresponding to the determination result by the transition determination means;
a passing section (acting gate 855F) provided in the gaming area through which game balls flowing down the gaming area pass;
A detection means (ball detection sensor 866F) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the passage part,
The starting ball entry part and the passing part are arranged in a predetermined flow path (a center route that constitutes the downstream part of the left route) formed in the gaming area, and the game ball that has passed through the passing part enters the starting ball. It has a configuration that allows the ball to enter the ball entering section,
The performance execution means is
a first starting means for starting a first special effect in the predetermined area based on the game ball entering the starting ball entering section;
a second starting means for starting a second special effect in a predetermined area of the display section based on the game ball passing through the passage section;
has
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first special performance and the second special performance are configured such that at least a part of each special performance, including a beginning part, is recognized by a player as being the same.

In a type of gaming machine in which a transition to a special gaming state is determined based on the ball entering a starting ball entry section provided in the gaming area, an effect corresponding to the result of the transition determination may be executed on the display section. It is possible to suppress the monotony of the game. However, in such a configuration, if a situation continues in which the ball does not enter the starting ball entry section, the state in which no performance is performed on the display section becomes easily noticeable. There is a concern that this will give the player the impression that the ball has not entered the starting ball entry area, leading to a decrease in the player's desire to play. Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, not only the first special effect is executed in a predetermined area of the display section based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section, but also the flow toward the starting ball entering section is executed. A second special performance may be executed in a predetermined area on the display section based on the game ball passing through a passage section disposed on the channel (predetermined flow path). In this way, if the special effect is performed not only when the ball enters the starting ball entry area but also when the ball passes through the passing area, the period during which the effect on the display area is not performed becomes longer, resulting in the above-mentioned inconvenience. can be suitably suppressed. The first special performance and the second special performance are configured such that at least a portion of each special performance, including the beginning part, is recognized by the player as being the same. When a special performance is performed in a predetermined area, there remains a possibility that the ball will enter the starting ball entry area at least in the common part (the beginning part), which draws attention to the special performance performed in the predetermined area. It is possible to suitably improve the degree of

Feature K2. The second starting means executes the second special effect in the predetermined area based on the game ball passing through the passage section under the condition that the first special effect is not executed in the predetermined area. The gaming machine according to feature K1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to start.

According to feature K2, the first special effect based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section is executed preferentially. In this way, by making the second special effect based on passing through the passing part a supplementary position, it is possible to smooth the game progress with the first special effect as the main one, and to increase the attention to the special effect. It is preferable to aim for.

Feature K3. The performance execution means is configured to execute the first special performance and the above-mentioned performance if the passing of the passing part and the ball entering the starting ball entry part occur at the same time in a situation where the special performance is not being performed. The gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to execute the first special performance among the second special performances.

According to feature K3, when the ball passes through the passage section and the ball enters the starting ball entry section at the same timing, a special effect based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section is preferentially executed. In this way, the special performance based on passing through the passage section is positioned as an auxiliary one, which has technical significance in that unnecessary transition from the second special performance to the first special performance can be avoided.

Feature K4. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, wherein the execution period of the second special performance is configured to be shorter than the execution period of the first special performance.

It is possible to suppress prolongation of the first special performance, which is substantially unrelated to whether or not the transition to the special game state is possible. Thereby, the effect shown in feature K1 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature K5. When a game ball enters the starting ball entry section during execution of the second special performance, the performance execution means executes the second special performance without waiting for the execution period of the second special performance to elapse. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, further comprising a special performance transition means for transitioning from a special performance to the first special performance.

According to feature K5, when a ball enters the starting ball entry section during execution of the second special performance, the first special performance is shifted to. Shifting from the second special performance, which is not substantially related to the possibility of transition to the special gaming state, to the first special performance, which is related to the possibility of transition to the special gaming state, improves the degree of attention to the game due to the special performance. It is preferable in terms of exhibiting the effect.

Feature K6. The special performance transition means is characterized in that the special performance transition means transitions from the second special performance to the first special performance in such a way that the player recognizes that a series of performances are being executed in the predetermined area. The gaming machine described in K5.

According to the configuration shown in feature K6, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the first special performance and the second special performance, and the cooperation between the two special performances can be strengthened.

Feature K7. The first special performance includes a first part and a second part that is executed after the first part,
The gaming machine according to feature K6, wherein the second special performance is comprised of the first part.

According to feature K7, it is possible to alleviate or eliminate the sense of discomfort when transitioning from the second special performance to the first special performance.

The configuration shown in this feature is as follows: "The first special performance includes at least the first part of the first part and the second part that is executed after the first part, and the second special performance includes the second part that is executed after the first part. "The gaming machine according to feature K6, characterized in that the gaming machine is comprised of a first part."

Feature K8. After the first special performance ends, the first starting means is configured to be unable to start the first special performance until a predetermined period of time has elapsed;
After the first special performance ends, the second special performance cannot be started by the second starting means until a period of the same length as the predetermined period has elapsed. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K7.

According to feature K8, by unifying the behavior after the first special performance ends between the first special performance and the second special performance, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort regarding the second special performance.

Feature K9. After the second special performance ends, the second special performance cannot be started by the second starting means until a period of the same length as the predetermined period has elapsed. The gaming machine described in feature K8.

According to feature K9, when the second special performance → second special performance is continuous, the first special performance → first special performance is consecutive between the preceding and succeeding second special performances. By ensuring an interval period (predetermined period) similar to , it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort regarding the second special performance.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to J to the features K1 to K9 detailed above.

<Feature L group>
The following characteristic group L includes: ``Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a pattern display device that displays a pattern on the display screen in a variable manner. When the game ball passes through the actuation port, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific game state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a changing display of symbols is started. In the case of winning, a specific symbol combination, etc. is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-074175). ``In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase the attention to games.However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention to games.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature L1. This gaming machine is equipped with a game board (game board unit 80F) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) that fires game balls into the game area. hand,
a starting ball entry part (lower operating port 859F) provided in the gaming area;
an information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Transition determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a validity determination process, etc.) function) and
Based on the fact that the result of the determination by the transition determining means corresponds to the predetermined transition information (jackpot result), the gaming state is changed to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to the gaming state (opening/closing execution mode);
The game repetition operation is carried out, with a time when the game repetition operation is ended as a result of a notification corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining means after the game repetition operation is started being performed. a game time control means (a function for executing display control in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operation port of the main display unit 87) so that the information is displayed;
Display means (design display device 500F) having a display section (display screen 500aF);
a first performance execution means (a function for executing a display performance in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the determination result by the transition determination means on the display unit;
a passing section (acting gate 855F) provided in the gaming area through which game balls flowing down the gaming area pass;
A detection means (ball detection sensor 866F) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the passage part,
The starting ball entry part and the passing part are arranged in a predetermined flow path (a center route that constitutes the downstream part of the left route) formed in the gaming area, and the game ball that has passed through the passing part enters the starting ball. It is configured so that the ball can enter the ball entering section,
Based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means, a special performance whose execution period is longer than the period required until the game ball passes through the passage section and enters the starting ball entry section. A gaming machine characterized by comprising second performance execution means executed on a display section.

In a type of gaming machine in which a transition to a special gaming state is determined based on the ball entering a starting ball entry section provided in the gaming area, an effect corresponding to the result of the transition determination may be executed on the display section. It is possible to suppress the monotony of the game. However, in such a configuration, if a situation continues in which the ball does not enter the starting ball entry section, the state in which no performance is performed on the display section becomes easily noticeable. This tends to give the player the impression that the ball has not entered the starting ball entry area, and there is a concern that this may be a factor that causes a decrease in the player's desire to play. Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, not only is the performance executed on the display section based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section, but also the flow path (predetermined) where the game ball is directed toward the starting ball entering section. A special effect may be executed on the display section based on the passage through the passage section located above the flow path). In this way, if the special effect is performed not only when the ball enters the starting ball entry area but also when the ball passes through the passing area, the period during which the effect is not performed on the display section (blank or non-effect period) becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned disadvantages. Since the execution period of the special performance is set to be longer than the period required for the game ball that passes through the passing section to enter the starting ball entering section, the special performance and the starting ball entering section It is possible to reduce the chances of blanks occurring between the production that starts when the ball enters the ball. Thereby, the effect of increasing attention to the performance on the display section can be suitably exhibited.

Feature L2. The first performance execution means changes the performance on the display unit from the special performance to a performance corresponding to the determination result by the transition determination unit when a ball enters the starting ball entry part during the special performance. The gaming machine according to feature L1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to transfer.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when a ball enters the starting ball entry section during the special performance, the special performance is shifted to the performance corresponding to the determination result by the transition determination means. By applying the technical idea shown in feature L1 to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of blanks between performances.

In addition, when transitioning from the special performance to the performance corresponding to the determination result by the transition determination means, it is preferable to suppress the gap in appearance at the time of transition so that the player recognizes that both performances are a series.

Feature L3. In the predetermined flow path, a section between the passing portion and the starting ball entry portion includes a first flow path (first branch passage portion 864F) through which the game ball enters the starting ball entry portion; A distributing means (upper clone 856F) is provided for distributing balls into a second flow path (second branch passage portion 865F) in which it is more difficult or impossible for balls to enter the starting ball entry portion than in the first flow path. The gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2.

In a configuration in which the game balls that have passed through the passage section are distributed to the first channel/second channel by the distribution means, the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry section tends to be uneven. Therefore, by configuring the special effect to be started based on the passing of the passing section, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned blank from increasing due to the bias in the frequency of ball entry.

Feature L4. The predetermined flow path is formed such that all game balls distributed to the first flow path enter the starting ball entry section,
Feature L3 characterized in that the second performance execution means has an extension means for extending the execution period of the special performance when game balls are distributed to the first channel during the special performance. The gaming machine described in .

In the configuration in which it is determined that the game balls distributed to the first flow path enter the starting ball entry section, the special performance may be extended if the game balls are distributed to the first flow path during the special performance. By doing so, it is possible to suitably reduce the chance that the above-mentioned blank occurs between the special performance and the performance based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section. Further, by providing such an extension function, it becomes possible to shorten the predetermined execution period of the special performance as much as possible, and it is possible to suitably suppress the extension of the special performance.

Feature L5. The extension means is configured such that the period extended by the extension means is longer than the period required for the game ball to enter the starting ball entry section via the first flow path. The gaming machine according to feature L4.

By determining the extension period based on the period required for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section via the first flow path, it is possible to prevent the extension function shown in feature L4 from not being effectively performed.

Feature L6. The predetermined flow path is formed such that any game ball that reaches a specific location in the predetermined flow path enters the starting ball entry section,
Features L1 to L1 characterized in that the second performance execution means has an extension means for extending the execution period of the special performance based on the arrival of the game ball to the specific location during the special performance. The gaming machine according to any one of feature L5.

A configuration in which the entry of a game ball into a starting ball entry section is confirmed for a game ball that reaches a specific location in a predetermined channel, and a configuration in which the special performance is extended when the game ball reaches the specific location during the special performance. By doing so, it is possible to suitably reduce the chance that the above-mentioned blank occurs between the special performance and the performance based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section. Further, by providing such an extension function, it becomes possible to shorten the predetermined execution period of the special performance as much as possible, and it is possible to suitably suppress the extension of the special performance.

Feature L7. The special performance includes a first special performance and a second special performance that is set so that the level of expectation for transition to the special game state is higher than that of the first special performance,
The second performance execution means includes means for executing the first special performance based on the game ball passing through the passage section,
The extension means performs the extension when a ball enters the starting ball entry part during the first special performance based on passing through the passing part, and performs the extension during the extended period. is configured to run
The second performance execution means is configured to be capable of transitioning from the first special performance to the second special performance even when a ball has not entered the starting ball entry section. The gaming machine according to any one of features L4 to L5.

After the start of the special performance, there are cases in which a ball enters the starting ball entry section and cases in which a ball does not enter the starting ball entry section. For the latter, there is a possibility of transitioning to the special gaming state after a transition determination, but for the former, no transition determination is made, so it cannot be expected to transition to the special gaming state. Here, the transition to the second special performance may occur both when the above extension occurs and when it does not occur, and during the special performance, the player's attention will be focused on whether or not there will be a transition to the second special performance. Become. Thereby, the above-described effect of increasing attention to the game can be suitably exerted.

Feature L8. Feature L1 characterized in that the second performance execution means ends the special performance when the execution period has elapsed without a ball entering the starting ball entry section during the special performance. The gaming machine described in any one of L7.

In a configuration in which game balls that have passed through the passage section are divided into those that enter the starting ball entry section and those that do not enter the starting ball entry section, an event may occur in which the ball does not enter the starting ball entry section during the special performance. . In such a case, by configuring the special performance to end when the execution period has elapsed, the extension of the special performance can be suitably suppressed.

Feature L9. Features L1 to L1 are characterized in that, during performance execution by the first performance execution means, even if a game ball passes through the passage section, the special performance is not started based on the passing of the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of feature L8.

In a configuration in which the effect based on the ball entering the starting entry area is directly linked to the transition determination result, and the special effect based on passing through the passing area is not directly linked to the transition determination result, the former is preferred over the latter as shown in this feature. It is preferable to have a configuration that gives priority.

Feature L10. The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information,
The transition determining means is configured to sequentially determine whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information,
The number of game balls that pass through the passage section among the game balls fired into the predetermined flow path is the number of game balls that enter the starting ball entry section among the game balls fired into the predetermined flow path. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L9, characterized in that the number of games is greater than the number of players.

In a configuration in which the number of game balls passing through the passage section is greater than the number of game balls entering the starting ball, the above-mentioned blank can be prevented by executing a special effect based on passing through the passage section. can be suitably suppressed.

Feature L11. After the performance by the first performance execution means ends, the performance by the first performance execution means is not started until a predetermined waiting period (determined display time) has elapsed,
The second performance execution means is configured such that after the special performance ends, the special performance cannot be started until a period of the same length as the predetermined waiting period has elapsed. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L10.

According to feature L11, by unifying the behavior after the end of the performance between the performance based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section and the special performance based on passing through the passing section, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort regarding the special performance. .

Feature L12. This gaming machine is equipped with a game board (game board unit 80F) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) that fires game balls into the game area. hand,
a starting ball entry part (lower operating port 859F) provided in the gaming area;
an information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
Acquired information storage means capable of storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Transition determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a validity determination process, etc.) function) and
Based on the result of the determination by the transition determination means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (open/closed) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a gaming state transition means (a function for executing gaming state transition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The game repetition operation is carried out, with a time when the game repetition operation is ended as a result of a notification corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining means after the game repetition operation is started being performed. a game time control means (a function for executing display control in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (the display section for the operation port of the main display unit 87) so that the information is displayed;
Display means (design display device 500F) having a display section (display screen 500aF);
a first performance execution means (a function for executing a display performance in the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the determination result by the transition determination means on the display unit;
A passing section (acting gate 855F) provided in the gaming area, through which game balls flowing down the gaming area pass,
The starting ball entry part and the passing part are arranged in a predetermined flow path (a center route that constitutes the downstream part of the left route) formed in the gaming area, and the game ball that has passed through the passing part enters the starting ball. It is configured so that the ball can enter the ball entering section,
comprising a second effect execution means for executing a special effect on the display section based on the game ball passing through the passage section,
The second performance execution means has means for setting a period longer than the period required for the game ball passing through the passage section to enter the starting ball entry section as the execution period of the special performance. A gaming machine characterized by:

In a type of gaming machine in which a transition to a special gaming state is determined based on the ball entering a starting ball entry section provided in the gaming area, an effect corresponding to the result of the transition determination may be executed on the display section. It is possible to suppress the monotony of the game. However, in such a configuration, if a situation continues in which the ball does not enter the starting ball entry section, the state in which no performance is performed on the display section becomes easily noticeable. This tends to give the player the impression that the ball has not entered the starting ball entry area, and there is a concern that this may be a factor that causes a decrease in the player's desire to play. Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, not only is the performance executed on the display section based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section, but also the flow path (predetermined) where the game ball is directed toward the starting ball entering section. A special effect may be executed on the display section based on the passage through the passage section located above the flow path). In this way, if the special effect is performed not only when the ball enters the starting ball entry area but also when the ball passes through the passing area, the period during which the effect is not performed on the display section (blank or non-effect period) becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned disadvantages. Since the execution period of the special performance is set to be longer than the period required for the game ball that passes through the passing section to enter the starting ball entering section, the special performance and the starting ball entering section It is possible to reduce the chances of blanks occurring between the production that starts when the ball enters the ball. Thereby, the effect of increasing attention to the performance on the display section can be suitably exhibited.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the features L2 to L11 to the feature L12.

Further, it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to K to the features L1 to L12 detailed above.

<Feature M group>
The following feature group M is based on the following: ``Pachinko machines and other gaming machines provide players with benefits such as paying out game balls when a ball enters a ball entry section such as a starting hole provided in the gaming area.'' Regarding the background technology, there is a technology that diversifies the falling paths of game balls by arranging game nails in the game area (for example, see Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-78904). ``In the above-mentioned types of game machines, there is a risk that the condition of the game nails may change during work such as cleaning the game area, and if the condition of the game nails changes, problems such as balls clogging may occur. .Here, when it comes to checking whether the state of the game nail has not changed, that is, whether it is in a normal state, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to the confirmation.'' The invention will solve the problem. This was done with the goal of achieving this goal.

Feature M1. Supports a game board (game board units 80, 80H) in which a game area (game area PE) in which a plurality of game nails (game nails 93) are arranged so as to protrude from the front side (game board units 80, 80H) and the game board a gaming machine main body (inner frame 13, 13H) having a support frame (inner frame base body 50),
A door body (front door frame 14, 14G) is provided to be openable and closable with respect to the gaming machine main body, and covers the gaming area from the front of the gaming machine when placed in a closed position,
A check sheet (check sheet CS), which is a transparent sheet material with a pattern indicating the position of the head of the game nail, is attached to the main body of the game machine or the door, and is located at the front of the game machine. The game machine is characterized by being provided with at least one of an indicating means for instructing a mounting position where the check sheet overlaps the game board in a visual sense, and a holding means for holding the check sheet disposed at the mounting position. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature M1, by positioning the check sheet according to the instruction means provided on the main body of the game machine or the door body, the head of the game nail can be compared with the pattern indicating its position to determine the correct position of the head. It is possible to accurately check whether the game nail is in the correct position (whether there is any change such as deformation in the game nail). In addition, if the check sheet is held by the holding means, so that the worker does not have to hold the check sheet by hand, the check sheet may become misaligned during confirmation, resulting in a decrease in confirmation accuracy and work efficiency. You can refrain from doing things. Therefore, it is possible to suitably confirm whether the game nail is in a normal condition.

Note that the configuration shown in feature M1 is defined as "a game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (play area PE) is formed in which a plurality of game nails (game nails 93) are arranged so as to protrude to the front side. . a door body (front door frame 14, 14G) that covers the gaming area from the front of the gaming machine in the state where the game machine is open; an instruction means capable of instructing a mounting position of a check sheet (check sheet CS) on which a pattern indicating the position of the head is arranged, where the check sheet overlaps the game board when viewed from the front of the gaming machine; A game machine characterized by being provided with at least one of a holding means capable of holding the check sheet disposed at the mounting position.''

Feature M2. A game board (game board unit 80) in which a game area (game area PE) in which a plurality of game nails (game nails 93) are arranged so as to protrude from the front side is formed (game board unit 80), and a support that supports the game board. A gaming machine main body (inner frame 13) having a frame (inner frame base body 50),
a door body (front door frame 14G) that is provided to be openable and closable with respect to the gaming machine main body and covers the gaming area from the front of the gaming machine when placed in a closed position;
A check sheet (check sheet CS), which is a transparent sheet material with a pattern indicating the position of the head of the game nail, is attached to the main body of the game machine or the door, and is located at the front of the game machine. A game machine characterized by being provided with an instruction means (a glass panel 23G and a light emitting part 901G) for instructing a mounting position where the check sheet overlaps the game board in a visual manner.

According to feature M2, by positioning the check sheet according to the instruction means provided on the game machine main body or the door body, the head of the game nail can be compared with the pattern indicating its position, and the head can be determined to be in the correct position. It is possible to accurately check whether the game nail is in the correct position (whether there is any change such as deformation in the game nail).

Feature M3. a transparent panel (for example, a glass panel 23G) provided on one of the door body and the gaming machine main body, and facing the gaming area when the door body is placed in a closed position;
A light emitting unit (light emitting unit 901G) that supplies light to an end of the transparent panel,
The indicating means is configured to display the mounting position by emitting light from the light emitting means from a light emitting part (rear light emitting part 902G) formed on the transparent panel. The gaming machine according to feature M2.

According to feature M3, light is supplied to the end of the transparent panel that covers the gaming area, and the light is emitted from the light emitting portion to display the mounting position. In this way, the confirmation accuracy can be improved by providing the transparent panel for the game area cover with a light guide function and displaying the attachment position of the check sheet as close as possible to the confirmation target. In this configuration, where the mounting position is displayed near the confirmation target, there is a concern that the light-emitting display may interfere with game production or confirmation work, but it is possible to change the mounting position by switching the light-emitting means ON/OFF. Since it is possible to display/hide the information, such concerns can be eliminated.

Feature M4. The instruction means and the transparent panel are arranged on the door body,
The gaming machine according to feature M3, wherein the light emitting section is formed to emit light from the rear surface of the transparent panel toward the gaming area.

According to feature M4, the mounting position of the check sheet is clearly indicated by causing the light emitting means to emit light while the door body is open. After placing the check sheet and fixing it using fixing means such as tape, closing the door will cause the light emitting part to face the rear, and the light from the light emitting means will interfere with checking work. You can avoid that.

Feature M5. The gaming machine according to feature M4, wherein the light emitting section is comprised of a large number of concave portions formed to be concave forward from the rear plate surface of the transparent panel.

According to feature M5, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of bending of the check sheet due to the unevenness for light emission being caught on the check sheet or rising from the transparent panel.

Feature M6. The light emitting part is a first light emitting part,
Feature M4 characterized in that the transparent panel is formed with a second light emitting part (front light emitting part 903G) that emits light from the light emitting means from the front side of the transparent panel to the front of the gaming machine. Or the gaming machine described in feature M5.

As shown in feature M6, if the transparent panel is provided with a first light emitting part and a second light emitting part, and the light from the light emitting means is emitted back and forth from each light emitting part, for example, when playing a game, the transparent panel Even if light is emitted from the first light emitting part when a performance using a panel is executed, the light is prevented from heading towards the player, and it is suppressed from making it difficult to see the patterns etc. drawn on the transparent panel. can. As a result, the function of instructing the mounting position shown in feature M5 and the performance function using the light-emitting display can suitably coexist in one transparent panel.

Feature M7. comprising a light emission control means (notification/effect control device 140) that controls light emission of the light emission means,
The light emission control means includes:
a first control means that causes the light emitting means to emit light when a predetermined game performance is executed;
The gaming machine according to feature M6, further comprising a second control means for causing the light emitting means to emit light based on an operation of a predetermined operation section (performance operation button 35).

According to feature M7, the light emitting means can be turned on/off by operating a predetermined operation section. With this configuration, by turning off the light emitting means after positioning the check sheet, it is possible to prevent the light from the second light emitting section (light for presentation) from interfering with the confirmation work. can.

Feature M8. According to feature M7, the second control means is configured to cause the light emitting means to emit light when the predetermined operation section is operated in a situation where the door body is open. gaming machines.

If the configuration is such that the mounting position is displayed based on the operator's operation under the condition that the door body is opened as shown in feature M8, the effect shown in feature M7 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature M9. A game board (game board unit 80H) in which a game area (game area PE) in which a plurality of game nails (game nails 93) are arranged on the front surface is formed, and a support frame (inner frame base body) that supports the game board. 50), a gaming machine main body (inner frame 13H),
A door body (front door frame 14) is provided to be openable and closable with respect to the gaming machine main body, and covers the gaming area from the front of the gaming machine when placed in a closed position,
A check sheet (check sheet CS), which is a transparent sheet material with a pattern indicating the position of the head of the game nail, is placed at a predetermined mounting position on one of the game machine main body and the door body. A gaming machine characterized in that a holding means (protrusions 951H, 961H, 971H, 981H, 991H) capable of holding the check sheet in the checked state is provided.

According to feature M9, since the check sheet is held by the holding means, there is no need for the operator to hold the check sheet by hand. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in confirmation accuracy or a decrease in work efficiency due to, for example, the position of the check sheet being shifted during confirmation. Therefore, it is possible to suitably confirm whether the game nail is in a normal condition.

Feature M10. The gaming machine according to feature M9, wherein the predetermined attachment position is a position where the check sheet faces the gaming area.

By arranging the check sheet to face the game board across the game area, the distance between the check sheet and the game nails can be made as small as possible. This suppresses the influence of parallax when confirming the position of the head of the game nail through the check sheet, contributing to facilitating the confirmation work.

Feature M11. The game board has a central partition and an outer partition that partition the game area, and are arranged with the game area separated from each other.
The holding means has a central holding part provided in the central partition and an outer holding part provided in the outer partition, and the central holding part and the outer holding part hold the check sheet. The gaming machine according to feature M9 or feature M10, characterized in that the gaming machine has the following configuration.

As shown in feature M11, by providing holding parts in both the central compartment and the outer compartment that are provided across the gaming area, it is possible to suppress positional variations and misalignments of the check sheet, contributing to improved confirmation accuracy. .

The configuration shown in this feature is defined as "the game board has a set of game parts facing each other across a predetermined flow path formed in the game area, and the holding means is configured to The gaming machine according to feature M9 or feature M10, wherein the check sheet is held by the holding portions, which are arranged in each of the game components.

Feature M12. The game machine according to feature M11, wherein the center side holding part and the outside holding part are arranged at positions facing each other across a flow path formed by the plurality of game nails.

According to feature M12, the effect of improving the confirmation accuracy shown in feature M11 can be suitably exhibited by configuring both holding parts to face each other with the game nail to be checked in between.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to L to the features M1 to M12 detailed above.

Any one of the technical ideas shown in each feature described above may be applied to other features, or the technical ideas shown in a plurality of features may be combined and applied to other features. It is also possible to extract a part of the configuration shown in each feature and apply it to other features.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means (game ball firing handle 41) operated by a player, a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and a It is equipped with a ball path (guiding rail 100) that guides the game ball to a predetermined game area, and each game part (nails, etc.) arranged in the game area, and has a predetermined passing part (general prize opening) of each game part. A gaming machine that gives a player a benefit when a game ball passes through a ball (such as 81).

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row as a final stop; A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.), and further includes a throwing device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a throwing process of taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a putting device that puts out game balls to the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown into the game machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 80... Game board unit, 80a... Game board, 83a... Upper operating opening, 83b... Lower operating opening, 85... Center opening, 140... Notification/performance control device, 162... Main control device , 500... Variable display unit, 523... Drum unit, 524... Base body, 525... Rotating body, 526... Motor, 528... Side light, 529... Background display device, 531... Frame, 532... Light guiding part, 535... Hub, 536...Rim, 542...Connection part, 551...Outer surface part, 552...Inner surface part, 553...Light emitting part, 554...End face, 555-557... Light guide panel, 561... Insert part, 571...Light emitting board, 572... Light emitting body, 582...backlight, 800...gaming mechanism, 810...distributing unit, 811...stage section, 812...first ball entry port, 813...second ball entry port, 814...third ball entry port, 821...movable Body, 823-824... Column, 830... Stage unit, 831... Stage part, 834... Stopper, 840... Link, 850F... Entry unit, 851F... Base body, 855F... Production gate, 856F... Upper croon, 857F... Lower croon, 858F...Non-electric accessory, 859F...Lower operating port, 861F...First guide passage, 862F...Second guide passage, 864F...First branch passage, 865F...Second branch passage, 866F... Ball detection sensor, 868F...position detection sensor, 871F...rolling surface, 873F...first opening, 874F...second opening, 875F...rolling surface, 876F...center opening, 901G...light emitting section, 902G...front light diffusion section , 903G...Rear side light diffusion part, BP1...Boundary part, CL...Rotation center axis line, CS...Check sheet, CS1 to CS4...Sheet material, PE...Game area, TL...Reference line.

Claims (1)

A game machine comprising a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means capable of firing game balls into the game area,
a starting ball entry section provided in the gaming area;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
acquired information storage means capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Transition determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined transition information;
Shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the determination by the transition determining means being a transition compatible result that corresponds to the predetermined transition information. a game state transition means for causing the
The game repetition operation is carried out, with a time when the game repetition operation is ended as a result of a notification corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining means after the game repetition operation is started being performed. a game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so as to
a display means having a display section;
Effect execution means for executing an effect corresponding to the determination result by the transition determination means on the display unit;
a passage section provided in the gaming area, through which game balls flowing down the gaming area pass;
and a detection means capable of detecting a game ball passing through the passage section,
The starting ball entry section and the passing section are arranged in a predetermined flow path formed in the gaming area, and are configured such that a game ball that has passed through the passing section can enter the starting ball entry section. Ori,
The performance execution means is
a first starting means for starting a first special effect in a predetermined area of the display section based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry section;
a second starting means for starting a second special effect in the predetermined area of the display section based on the game ball passing through the passage section;
has
The second starting means executes the second special effect in the predetermined area based on the game ball passing through the passage section under the condition that the first special effect is not executed in the predetermined area. is configured to start and
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first special performance and the second special performance are configured such that at least a part of each special performance, including a beginning part, is recognized by a player as being the same.

Images